Перевод: с греческого на все языки

со всех языков на греческий

Со всех языков на:
Греческий
С греческого на:
Английский

was+used+for

Толкование Перевод

61 κυέω

κυέω

Grammatical information: v.

Meaning: `be or become pregnant' ( τινά, τί `with a young'), Il.

Other forms: κυήσω (Hdt.), κυῆσαι (IA.), κεκύηκα (hell.), κυηθῆναι, - θήσεσθαι (late); older aorist κῡ́σασθαι (Il.) with causal active κῦσαι (A.), younger present κύω (since Arist., LXX); also κυί̄σκομαι, -ω (IA.);

Compounds: sometimes with prefix, e.g. ἐπι-, ἀπο-, συγ-κυέομαι, - κυίσκομαι (- ίσκω), ὑπο-κυσαμένη (Il.).

Derivatives: Verbal nouns: κύημα `foetus, embryo' (IA.), - ησις `conception, pregnancy, embryo' (Pl., Arist., Thphr.), κύος n. = κύημα (Ar. Fr. 609, inscr. Keos) with κυόεις (Kos, III^a); ἀπο-κυη-τικός `capable of giving birth' (Astrol.), κυητήριος `promoting pregnancy' (Hp.), κυήτωρ `begetter' (Cyran.; of a bird); κυηρόν ἔγκυον, ἁπαλόν, βλαστόν H. Compp., e.g. κυο-φορέω `be pregnant, be with young' with - φορία, - ησις (LXX, med. etc.), - φόρος (pap., EM); ἔγ-κυος `pregnant' (Ion., Arist.); κύ-ουρα f. name of a plant, which was used to procure abortion (Stob.; Strömberg Pflanzennamen 95).

Origin: IE [Indo-European] [592] *ḱuh₂- `swell'

Etymology: On κῦμα ( ἐγ-κύμων), κύριος ( κῦρος) s. vv. With κυέω can be equated Skt. śváyati `be or become great, strong, powerful, get strong, increase': IE. *ḱuh₂-éi̯e-(ti), (Schulze KZ 27, 605 = Kl. Schr. 363); h₂ is shown by κύαρ. Beside this secondary present stands in very old times the primary middle aorist κῡ́σασθαι (Skt. has the themat. root-aor. á-śv-a-t [would be Gr. *ἔ-κυ-ε; to this as innovation κύω?]). - From the many forms, esp. petrified and isolated verbal nouns, we mention the pres. ptc. Av. si-sp-i-mna-'rising up' (of a river-wave; cf. κῦμα), Welsh cyw m. `young animal' (IE. *ḱu₂o- m.; cf. ἔγ-κυος, κυο-φορέω, κύος n.), Lat. inciēns `pregnant' (loan from ἔγκυος, s. Ernout-Meillet; diff. W.-Hofmann); three more forms s. κύριος (where also on the ablaut); [not κύαμος, πᾶς, πέπαμαι]. On suppoed connection to words for `hollow, empty' s. κύαρ. - Pok. 592ff., W.-Hofmann s. inciēns and cavus. - Hitt. šuwa- `swell' (?), Götze Lang. 30, 404, must remain separate because of the anlaut.

Page in Frisk: 2,42-43

Greek-English etymological dictionary (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ετυμολογική λεξικό) > κυέω
62 Δελφοί

Δελφοί

Grammatical information: m.pl.

Meaning: name of the inhabitants of Delphi (also attribut.) and of the town itself (Gildersleeve Syntax 51, Lundahl Namn och bygd 31 [1943] 42ff.) (h. Hom.)

Dialectal forms: Aeol. Βελφοί; sec. dialectforms Δαλφοί, Δολφοί, Δερφοί (Schwyzer 205, 213, 275)

Derivatives: Fem. Δελφίς `delphian' (Delph., S.), adj. Δελφικός (S.). δέλφιξ `table made after the Delphic threefoot' (Plu., EM), Lat. ( mensa) Delphica.

Origin: IE [Indo-European] [473] * gʷelbʰu- `womb'

Etymology: Acc. to Lundahl the place was originally *Δελφύς after the form of the land, from which *ΔελφϜ-οί (cf. ἄστυ: *ἀστϜ-ός) \> Δελφοί, later used for the place. So from δελφύς.

Greek-English etymological dictionary (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ετυμολογική λεξικό) > Δελφοί
63 Βαρσα(β)βᾶς

Βαρσα(β)βᾶς, ᾶ, ὁ (Βαρσαβᾶς t.r. [so Aa I 108, 13]; Βαρζάβας AcPl Ha 11, 10–11; בַּר סָאבָא or בַּר שְׁבָא) Barsabbas (Diod S 32, 15, 7 as the name of a king of the Thracians, but with only one β.; PBenoit et al., Discoveries in the Judean Desert, II, ’61, 25, 5 [133 A.D.]).

① patronymic of a certain Joseph, surnamed Justus, a member of the earliest Christian community Ac 1:23; Pa. (2:9; 11:2); name used for a servant of Nero AcPl Ha 11, 10; s. index of names Aa I 298.

② patronymic of a certain Judas who, with Silas, was appointed by the Jerusalem apostles as a companion of Paul and Barnabas when they returned to Antioch fr. the meeting described Ac 15:22. (On the name and spelling s. Dalman, Gramm.² 180; Cadbury, Harris Festschr. [s. Βαρναβᾶς] 48–50.)—M-M.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > Βαρσα(β)βᾶς
64 Βαρσα(β)βᾶς

Βαρσα(β)βᾶς, ᾶ, ὁ (Βαρσαβᾶς t.r. [so Aa I 108, 13]; Βαρζάβας AcPl Ha 11, 10–11; בַּר סָאבָא or בַּר שְׁבָא) Barsabbas (Diod S 32, 15, 7 as the name of a king of the Thracians, but with only one β.; PBenoit et al., Discoveries in the Judean Desert, II, ’61, 25, 5 [133 A.D.]).

① patronymic of a certain Joseph, surnamed Justus, a member of the earliest Christian community Ac 1:23; Pa. (2:9; 11:2); name used for a servant of Nero AcPl Ha 11, 10; s. index of names Aa I 298.

② patronymic of a certain Judas who, with Silas, was appointed by the Jerusalem apostles as a companion of Paul and Barnabas when they returned to Antioch fr. the meeting described Ac 15:22. (On the name and spelling s. Dalman, Gramm.² 180; Cadbury, Harris Festschr. [s. Βαρναβᾶς] 48–50.)—M-M.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > Βαρσα(β)βᾶς
65 ἐπιστάτης

ἐπιστάτης, ου, ὁ (s. prec. entry; Hom. et al., freq. as an administrative t.t.; used for var. officials in lit., ins, pap, LXX; Jos., Ant. 8, 59, C. Ap. 2, 177) in Lk six times in the voc. ἐπιστάτα as a title addressed to Jesus, nearly always by the disciples (the synopt. parallels have διδάσκαλε [cp. Ammonius, 100 A.D., p. 45 Valck. and Philo, Poster. Cai. 54 ἐπ. κ. διδάσκαλοι], κύριε, ῥαββί) master (cp. IG XII/1, 43, 21f ἐπιστάταν τῶν παιδῶν; IPriene 112, 73ff [after 84 B.C.] ἐ. τῶν ἐφήβων whose task was τὰς ψυχὰς πρὸς ἀρετὴν προάγεσθαι; Rouffiac p. 56f.—Diod S 3, 72, 1 Aristaeus the tutor of Dionysus; 3, 73, 4 Olympus the tutor of Zeus; and 10, 3, 4 Pherecydes the teacher of Pythagoras are all called ἐπιστάτης) Lk 5:5; 8:24, 45; 9:33, 49; 17:13.—OGlombitza, ZNW 49, ’58, 275–78.—DELG s.v. ἵστημι. M-M. TW.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐπιστάτης
66 εἰ

εἰ, [dialect] Att.-[dialect] Ion. and Arc. (for εἰκ, v. infr. 11 ad init.), = [dialect] Dor. and [dialect] Aeol. αἰ, αἰκ (q. v.), Cypr.

A ἤ Inscr.Cypr.135.10
H., both εἰ and αἰ in [dialect] Ep.:— Particle used interjectionally with imper. and to express a wish, but usu. either in conditions, if, or in indirect questions, whether. In the former use its regular negative is μή; in the latter, οὐ.

A INTERJECTIONALLY, in Hom., come now! c. imper., εἰ δὲ.. ἄκουσον Il.9.262
; εἰ δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ φευγόντων ib.46; most freq. with ἄγε (q. v.), 1.302, al.

2 in wishes, c. opt., ἀλλ' εἴ τις.. καλέσειεν 10.111
, cf. 24.74; so later, εἴ μοι ξυνείη μοῖρα S.OT 863
(lyr.); εἴ μοι γένοιτο φθόγγος ἐν βραχίοσιν E.Hec. 836
: more freq. folld. by γάρ, αἲ γὰρ δὴ οὕτως εἴη Il.4.189
, al.; εἰ γὰρ γενοίμην ἀντὶ σοῦ νεκρός E.Hipp. 1410
; εἰ γὰρ γένοιτο X.Cyr.6.1.38
; εἰ γὰρ ἐν τούτῳ εἴη Pl.Prt. 310d
; of unattained wishes, in Hom. only c. opt., εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼν.. Διὸς πάϊς αἰγιόχοιο εἴην Il.13.825
; Ζεῦ πάτερ, αἰ γὰρ ἐμὸς πόσις εἴη Alcm.29
; later with past tenses of ind., εἰ γάρ μ' ὑπὸ γῆν.. ἧκεν A.Pr. 152
(anap.); εἰ γὰρ τοσαύτην δύναμιν εἶχον ὥστε .. E.Alc. 1072: twice in Od. c. inf. (cf. the use of inf. in commands), αἰ γὰρ τοῖος ἐὼν.. ἐμὸς γαμβρὸς καλέεσθαι 7.311
, cf. 24.376.

b εἴθε, [dialect] Ep. αἴθε, is freq. used in wishes in the above constructions, εἴθε οἱ αὐτῷ Ζεὺς ἀγαθὸν τελέσειεν 2.33
; εἴθ' ὣς ἡβώοιμι Il.7.157
; ἰὼ γᾶ, εἴθ' ἔμ' ἐδέξω A.Ag. 1537
(lyr.); εἴθε σοι, ὦ Περίκλεις, τότε συνεγενόμην X.Mem.1.2.46
: later c. inf., γαίης χθαμαλωτέρη εἴθε.. κεῖσθαι AP9.284
(Crin.).

c εἰ γάρ, εἴθε are also used with ὤφελον ([dialect] Ep. ὤφελλον), of past unattained wishes, αἴθ' ὤφελλες στρατοῦ ἄλλου σημαίνειν Il.14.84
; εἰ γὰρ ὤφελον [κατιδεῖν] Pl.R. 432c.

d folld. by a clause expressing a consequence of the fulfilment of the wish, αἰ γὰρ τοῦτο.. ἔπος τετελεσμένον εἴη· τῷ κε τάχα γνοίης .. Od. 15.536, cf. 17.496, al.; sts. hard to distinguish from εἰ in conditions (which may be derived from this use), εἴ μοί τι πίθοιο, τό κεν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη Il.7.28
.

B IN CONDITIONS, if:

I with INDIC.,

1 with all tenses (for [tense] fut., v. infr. 2), to state a condition, with nothing implied as to its fulfilment, εἰ δ' οὕτω τοῦτ' ἐστίν, ἐμοὶ μέλλει φίλον εἶναι but if this is so, it will be.., Il.1.564: any form of the Verb may stand in apodosi, εἰ θεοί τι δρῶσιν αἰσχρόν, οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοί E.Fr.292.7
; εἰ δοκεῖ, πλέωμεν S.Ph. 526
; εἰ Φαῖδρον ἀγνοῶ, καὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐπιλέλησμαι Pl.Phdr. 228a
; κάκιστ' ἀπολοίμην, Ξανθίαν εἰ μὴ φιλῶ Ar.Ra. 579
, cf. Od.17.475; εἰ θεοῦ ἦν, οὐκ ἦν αἰσχροκερδής· εἰ δ' αἰσχροκερδής, οὐκ ἦν θεοῦ Pl.R. 408c
; εἰ ταῦτα λέγων διαφθείρω τοὺς νέους, ταῦτ' ἂν εἴη βλαβερά Id.Ap. 30b
, cf. 25b; εἰ οὗτοι ὀρθῶς ἀπέστησαν, ὑμεῖς ἂν οὐ χρεὼν ἄρχοιτε if these were right in their revolt, (it would follow that) you rule when you have no right, Th.3.40.

b to express a general condition, if ever, whenever, sts. with [tense] pres., εἴ τις δύο ἢ καὶ πλείους τις ἡμέρας λογίζεται, μάταιός ἐστιν S.Tr. 943
: with [tense] impf., εἴ τίς τι ἠρώτα ἀπεκρίνοντο Th.7.10
: rarely with [tense] aor., D.S.31.26.1, S.E.P.1.84; cf. 111.2.

2 with [tense] fut. (much less freq. than ἐάν c. subj.), either to express a future supposition emphatically, εἰ φθάσομεν τοὺς πολεμίους κατακαίνοντες οὐδεὶς ἡμῶν ἀποθανεῖται X.Cyr.7.1.19
; εἰ μὴ βοηθήσετε οὐ περιέσται τἀκεῖ Th.6.91
; εἰ αὕτη ἡ πόλις ληφθήσεται, ἔχεται ἡ πᾶσα Σικελία ibid.; in threats or warnings, εἰ μὴ καθέξεις γλῶσσαν ἔσται σοι κακά E.Fr.5
; εἰ τιμωρήσεις Πατρόκλῳ, αὐτὸς ἀποθανῇ Pl.Ap. 28c
, cf. D.28.21: or,

b to express a present intention or expectation, αἶρε πλῆκτρον εἰ μαχεῖ if you mean to fight, Ar.Av. 759; ἐγὼ μὲν οὐκ ἀνήρ.. εἰ ταῦτ' ἀνατεὶ τῇδε κείσεται κράτη S.Ant. 485
, cf. Il.1.61, E.Hec. 863.

3 with historical tenses, implying that the condition is or was unfulfilled.

a with [tense] impf., referring to present time or to continued or repeated action in past time (in Hom. always the latter, Il.24.715, al.): ταῦτα οὐκ ἂν ἐδύναντο ποιεῖν, εἰ μὴ διαίτῃ μετρίᾳ ἐχρῶντο they would not be able to do this (as they do), if they did not live an abstemious life, X.Cyr.1.2.16, cf. Pl.R. 489b; οὐκ ἂν νήσων ἐκράτει, εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν he ([place name] Agamemnon) would not have been master of islands, if he had not had also some naval force, Th.1.9; αἰ δ' ἦχες ἔσλων ἴμερον ἢ κάλων.. αἴδως κεν.. ἦχεν Sapph.28
; εἰ ἦσαν ἄνδρες ἀγαθοὶ.. οὐκ ἄν ποτε ταῦτα ἔπασχον if they had been good men, they would never have suffered as they did, Pl.Grg. 516e, cf. X.Mem.1.1.5; εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼ τάδε ᾔδἐ.. οὐκ ἂν ὑπεξέφυγε if I had known this.., Il.8.366.

b with [tense] aor. referring to past time, εἰ μὴ ἔφυσε θεὸς μέλι.. ἔφασκον γλύσσονα σῦκα πέλεσθαι Xenoph.38
; εἰ μὴ ὑμεῖς ἤλθετε, ἐπορευόμεθα ἂν ἐπὶ βασιλέα had you not come, we should be on our way.., X.An.2.1.4; καὶ ἴσως ἂν ἀπέθανον, εἰ μὴ ἡ ἀρχὴ διὰ ταχέων κατελύθη Pl.Ap. 32d
, cf. Il.5.680, Od.4.364, D.4.5, 27.63: with [tense] plpf. in apodosi, εἰ τριάκοντα μόναι μετέπεσον τῶν ψήφων, ἀπεπεφεύγη ἄν Pl. Ap. 36a
.

c rarely with [tense] plpf. referring to action finished in past or present time, λοιπὸν δ' ἂν ἦν ἡμῖν ἔτι περὶ τῆς πόλεως διαλεχθῆναι, εἰ μὴ προτέρα τῶν ἄλλων τὴν εἰρήνην ἐπεποίητο if she had not (as she has done) made peace before the rest, Isoc.5.56, cf. Pl.Ti. 21c.

II with SUBJ., εἰ is regularly joined with ἄν ([dialect] Ep. κε, κεν), cf. ἐάν: Arc. εἰκαν in Tegean Inscrr. of iv B. C. (IG5(2).3.16, 31, 6.2, SIG306.34) should be understood as εἰκ ἄν (εἰ: εἰκ = οὐ: οὐκ), since εἰ δ' ἄν is also found in IG5(2).3.2, 6.45, and εἰκ alone, ib.3.21; but ἄν ([etym.] κε, κεν) are freq. absent in Hom. as Od.5.221, 14.373 (and cf. infr. 2), and Lyr., Pi. (who never uses εἰ with ἄν or κε ([etym.] ν)) P.4.266, al.; in dialects, αἰ δείλητ' ἀγχωρεῖν IG9(1).334.6
([dialect] Locr., v B. C.), cf. Foed.[dialect] Dor. ap. Th.5.79; rarely in Hdt., εἰ μὴ ἀναβῇ 2.13
; occasionally in Trag., A.Eu. 234, S.OT 198 (lyr.), etc.; very rarely in [dialect] Att. Prose, εἰ ξυστῶσιν αἱ πόλεις Th.6.21
; εἴ τι που ἄλσος ἢ τέμενος ἀφειμένον ᾖ Pl.Lg. 761c
: in later Prose, εἴ τις θελήσῃ Apoc.11.5
; εἰ φονεύῃ Plot.2.9.9
, cf. Procl. Inst.26.

1 when the apodosis is [tense] fut., to express a future condition more distinctly and vividly than εἰ c. opt., but less so than εἰ c. [tense] fut. ind. (supr. 1.2a); εἰ δέ κεν ὣς ἕρξῃς καί τοι πείθωνται Ἀχαιοί, γνώσῃ ἔπειθ' .. if thou do thus.., thou shalt know, Il.2.364, cf. 1.128, 3.281, Od.17.549; ἂν δέ τις ἀνθιστῆται, σὺν ὑμῖν πειρασόμεθα χειροῦσθαι X. An.7.3.11
; ἂν μὴ νῦν ἐθέλωμεν ἐκεῖ πολεμεῖν αὐτῷ, ἐνθάδ' ἴσως ἀναγκασθησόμεθα τοῦτο ποιεῖν if we be not now willing, D.4.50, cf. X.Cyr. 5.3.27: folld. by imper., ἢν εἰρήνης δοκῆτε δεῖσθαι, ἄνευ ὅπλων ἥκετε ib.3.2.13, cf. 5.4.30.

2 when the apodosis is present, denoting customary or repeated action, to express a general condition, if ever, ἤν ποτε δασμὸς ἵκηται, σοὶ τὸ γέρας πολὺ μεῖζον (sc. ἐστί) whenever a division comes, your prize is (always) greater, Il.1.166; ἢν ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνῄσκειν if death come near, E.Alc. 671; with ἄν omitted, εἴ περ γάρ τε χόλον.. καταπέψῃ ἀλλά.. ἔχει κότον Il.1.81
.

b with Rhet. present in apodosis, ἐὰν μὴ οἱ φιλόσοφοι βασιλεύσωσιν, οὐκ ἔστι κακῶν παῦλα there is (i.e. can be, will be) no rest.., Pl.R. 473d.

III with OPTATIVE (never with ἄν in early Gr., later ἐάν c. opt., Dam.Pr. 114, al.),

1 to express a future condition less definitely than ἐάν c. subj., usu. with opt. with ἄν in apod., ἦ κεν γηθήσαι Πρίαμος Πριάμοιό τε παῖδες.. εἰ σφῶιν τάδε πάντα πυθοίατο μαρναμένοιιν surely they would exult, if they should hear.., Il.1.255, cf. 7.28, Od.3.223; εἴης φορητὸς οὐκ ἄν, εἰ πράσσοις καλῶς A.Pr. 979
; οὐδὲ γὰρ ἄν με ἐπαινοίη, εἰ ἐξελαύνοιμι τοὺς εὐεργέτας X.An.7.7.11
; οἶκος δ' αὐτός, εἰ φθογγὴν λάβοι, σαφέστατ' ἂν λέξειεν A.Ag.37
, etc.: [tense] fut. opt. is f.l. in Pl.Tht. 164a: with [tense] pres. ind. in apod., Xenoph.34.3, Democr.253: with [tense] fut.ind., Meliss.5.

b in Hom.sts. with [tense] pres. opt., to express an unfulfilled present condition, εἰ μὲν νῦν ἐπὶ ἄλλῳ ἀεθλεύοιμεν, ἦ τ' ἂν ἐγὼ τὰ πρῶτα φεροίμην if we were now contending, etc., Il.23.274: rarely in Trag., εἰ μὴ κνίζοι ( = εἰ μὴ ἔκνιζε) E.Med. 568; also εἰ ἀναγκαῖον εἴη ἀδικεῖν ἢ ἀδικεῖσθαι, ἑλοίμην ἂν μᾶλλον ἀδικεῖσθαι Pl.Grg. 469c
.

2 when the apodosis is past, denoting customary or repeated action, to express a general condition in past time (corresponding to use of subj. in present time, supr. 11.2); once in Hom., εἴ τίς με.. ἐνίπτοι, ἀλλὰ σὺ τόν γ'.. κατέρυκες Il.24.768
; εἰ δέ τινας θορυβουμένους αἴσθοιτο.., κατασβεννύναι τὴν ταραχὴν ἐπειρᾶτο if he should see ( whenever he saw) any troops in confusion, he (always) tried, X.Cyr.5.3.55, cf. An.4.5.13, Mem.4.2.40; εἴ τις ἀντείποι, εὐθὺς ἐτεθνήκει if any one made objection, he was a dead man at once, Th. 8.66; ἀλλ' εἴ τι μὴ φέροιμεν, ὤτρυνεν φέρειν E.Alc. 755
. For εἰ c. ind. in this sense v. supr. 1.1: ind. and opt. are found in same sentence, ἐμίσει, οὐκ εἴ τις κακῶς πάσχων ἠμύνετο, ἀλλ' εἴ τις εὐεργετούμενος ἀχάριστος φαίνοιτο X.Ages.11.3
.

3 in oratio obliqua after past tenses, representing ἐάν c. subj. or εἰ with a primary (never an historical) tense of the ind. in oratio recta, ἐλογίζοντο ὡς, εἰ μὴ μάχοιντο, ἀποστήσοιντο αἱ πόλεις (representing ἐὰν μὴ μαχώμεθα, ἀποστήσονται) X.HG6.4.6, cf. D.21.104, X.HG5.2.2; ἔλεγεν ὅτι, εἰ βλαβερὰ πεπραχὼς εἴη, δίκαιος εἴη ζημιοῦσθαι (representing εἰ βλαβερὰ πέπραχε, δίκαιός ἐστι) ib.32, cf. An.6.6.25; εἰ δέ τινα φεύγοντα λήψοιτο, προηγόρευεν ὅτι ὡς πολεμίψ χρήσοιτο (representing εἴ τινα λήψομαι, χρήσομαι) Id.Cyr.3.1.3; also, where oratio obliqua is implied in the leading clause, οὐκ ἦν τοῦ πολέμου πέρας Φιλίππῳ, εἰ μὴ Θηβαίους.. ἐχθροὺς ποιήσειε τῇ πόλει, i.e. Philip thought there would be no end to the war, unless he should make.. (his thought having been ἐὰν μὴ ποιήσω), D.18.145; ἐβούλοντο γὰρ σφίσιν, εἴ τινα λάβοιεν, ὑπάρχειν ἀντὶ τῶν ἔνδον, ἢν ἄρα τύχωσί τινες ἐζωγρημένοι Th.2.5
.

4 c. opt. with ἄν, only when the clause serves as apodosis as well as protasis, cf. Pl.Prt. 329b, D.4.18, X.Mem.1.5.3 (v. ἄν A. 111
. d).

IV c. INF., in oratio obliqua, only in Hdt., εἰ γὰρ δὴ δεῖν πάντως περιθεῖναι ἄλλῳ τέῳ τὴν βασιληΐην, [ἔφη] δικαιότερον εἶναι κτλ. 1.129
; εἰ εἶναι τοῦτο μὴ φίλον 2.64
, cf. 172, 3.105, 108.

V after Verbs denoting wonder, delight, indignation, disappointment, contentment, and similar emotions, εἰ c. ind. is used instead of ὅτι, to express the object of the feeling in a hypothetical form, θαυμάζω εἰ μηδεὶς ὑμῶν μήτ' ἐνθυμεῖται μήτ' ὀργίζεται, ὁρῶν .. I wonder that no one of you is either concerned or angry when he sees.., D.4.43; οὐκ ἀγαπᾷ εἰ μὴ δίκην δέδωκεν, ἀλλ' εἰ μὴ καὶ χρυσῷ στεφάνῳ στεφανωθήσεται ἀγανακτεῖ Aeschin.3.147
: after past tenses, ἐθαύμασε δ' εἰ μὴ φανερόν ἐστιν X.Mem.1.1.13
; δεινὸν εἰσῄει, εἰ μὴ.. δόξει D.19.33
; ἐθαύμαζον εἴ τι ἕξει τις χρήσασθαι τῷ λόγῳ Pl.Phd. 95a
; οὐδὲ ᾐσχύνθη εἰ.. ἐπάγει D.21.105
: in oratio obliqua (expressed or implied) c. opt., ἐπεῖπεν ὡς δεινὸν (sc. εἴη) εἰ.. μεγαλόψυχος γένοιτο Aeschin.2.157
; ᾤκτιρον εἰ ἁλώσοιντο X.An.1.4.7
; ἐθαύμαζε δ' εἴ τις ἀρετὴν ἐπαγγελλόμενος ἀργύριον πράττοιτο he wondered that any one should demand money, Id.Mem.1.2.7; ἔχαιρον ἀγαπῶν εἴ τις ἐάσοι I rejoiced, being content if any one should let it pass, Pl.R. 450a:—in this use the neg. οὐ is also found, ἀγανακτῶ εἰ ὁ Φίλιππος ἁρπάζων οὐ λυπεῖ D.8.55
; δεινὸν ἂν εἴη εἰ οἱ ἐκείνων ξύμμαχοι οὐκ ἀπεροῦσιν Th.1.121
; τέρας λέγεις, εἰ οὐκ ἂν δύναιντο λαθεῖν Pl.Men. 91d
, etc.

VI in citing a fact as a ground of argument or appeal, as surely as, since, εἴ ποτ' ἔην γε if there was [as there was], i.e. as sure as there was such an one, Il.3.180, al.; εἰ τότε κοῦρος ἔα, νῦν αὖτέ με γῆρας ὀπάζει 4.321
; πολλοὺς γὰρ οἶκε εἶναι εὐπετέστερον διαβάλλειν ἢ ἕνα, εἰ Κλεομένεα μὲν μοῦνον οὐκ οἷός τε ἐγένετο διαβαλεῖν, τρεῖς δὲ μυριάδας Ἀθηναίων ἐποίησε τοῦτο it seems easier to deceive many than one, if (as was the fact, i.e. since) he was not able.., Hdt.5.97, cf. 1.60,al.

VII ELLIPTICAL CONSTRUCTIONS:

1 with apodosis implied in the context, εἰ having the force of in case, supposing that, πρὸς τὴν πόλιν, εἰ ἐπιβοηθοῖεν, ἐχώρουν they marched towards the city [so as to meet the citizens], in case they should rush out, Th.6.100; ἱκέται πρὸς σὲ δεῦρ' ἀφίγμεθα, εἴ τινα πόλιν φράσειας ἡμῖν εὔερον we have come hither to you, in case you should tell us of some fleecy city (i.e. that we might hear of it), Ar.Av. 120; παρέζεο καὶ λαβὲ γούνων, αἴ κέν πως ἐθέλῃσιν ἐπὶ Τρώεσσιν ἀρῆξαι sit by him and grasp his knees [so as to persuade him], in case he be willing to help the Trojans, Il.1.408, cf. 66, Od.1.94, 3.92; ἄκουσον καὶ ἐμοῦ, ἐάν σοι ἔτι ταὐτὰ δοκῇ hear me also [that you may assent], in case the same opinion please you, Pl.R. 358b; ἰδὲ δή, ἐάν σοι ὅπερ ἐμοὶ συνδοκῇ look now, in case you approve what I do, ib. 434a.

2 with apodosis suppressed for rhetorical reasons, εἴ περ γάρ κ' ἐθέλῃσιν Ὀλύμπιος.. στυφελίξαι if he wish to thrust him away, [he will do so], Il.1.580; εἰ μὲν δώσουσι γέρας—· εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they shall give me a prize, [well and good]; but if they give not, then I will take one for myself, 1.135, cf. 6.150, Ar.Pl. 468; καὶ ἢν μὲν ξυμβῇ ἡ πεῖρα—· εἰ δὲ μή .. and if the attempt succeed, [well]; otherwise.., Th.3.3, cf. Pl.Prt. 325d.

3 with the Verb of the protasis omitted, chiefly in the following expressions:

a εἰ μή except, οὐδὲν ἄλλο σιτέονται, εἰ μὴ ἰχθῦς μοῦνον Hdt. 1.200
; μὰ τὼ θεώ, εἰ μὴ Κρίτυλλά γ' [εἰμί]—nay, if I'm not Critylla! i.e. I am, Ar.Th. 898; εἰ μὴ ὅσον except only, ἐγὼ μέν μιν οὐκ εἶδον, εἰ μὴ ὅσον γραφῇ Hdt.2.73
, cf. 1.45, 2.20; εἰ μὴ εἰ Th.1.17
, Pl.Grg. 480b, etc.; εἰ μή τι οὖν, ἀλλὰ σμικρόν γέ μοι τῆς ἀρχῆς χάλασον if nothing else, yet.., Id.Men. 86e; ironical, εἰ μὴ ἄρα ἡ τῆς ἀρετῆς ἐπιμέλεια διαφθορά ἐστιν X.Mem.1.2.8
; εἰ μή πέρ γε τὸν ὑοσκύαμον χρήματα εἶναι φήσομεν Id.Oec.1.13
.

b εἰ δὲ μή but if not, i.e. otherwise, προηγόρευε τοῖς Λαμψακηνοῖσι μετιέναι Μιλτιάδεα, εἰ δὲ μή, σφέας πίτυος τρόπον ἀπείλεε ἐκτρίψειν Hdt.6.37
, cf. 56; after μάλιστα μέν, Th.1.32,35, etc.:—after a preceding neg., μὴ τύπτ'· εἰ δὲ μή, σαυτόν ποτ' αἰτιάσει don't beat me; otherwise, you will have yourself to blame, Ar.Nu. 1433; ὦ Κῦρε, μὴ οὕτω λέγε· εἰ δὲ μή, οὐ θαρροῦντά με ἕξεις X.Cyr.3.1.35
; οὔτ' ἐν τῷ ὕδατι τὰ ὅπλα ἦν ἔχειν· εἰ δὲ μή Id.An.4.3.6
, cf. Th.1.28, 131, Pl.Phd. 91c.

c εἰ δέ sts. stands for εἰ δὲ μή, εἰ μὲν βούλεται, ἑψέτω· εἰ δ', ὅτι βούλεται, τοῦτο ποιείτω Pl.Euthd. 285c
, cf. Smp. 212c; εἰ δ' οὖν S.Ant. 722
; εἰ δ' οὕτως Arist.EN 1094a24
; εἰ δὲ τοῦτο and if so, Str.2.1.29.

d εἰ γάρ for if so, Id.7.3.6.

e εἴ τις if any, i. e. as much as or more than any, τῶν γε νῦν αἴ τις ἐπιχθονίων, ὀρθῶς B.5.5
; ὄτλον ἄλγιστον ἔσχον, εἴ τις Αἰτωλὶς γυνή S.Tr.8
, cf. OC 734; εἴ τις ἄλλος, siquis alius, E.Andr.6, etc.; εἴ τινες καὶ ἄλλοι Hdt.3.2
, etc.; εἴπερ τις ἄλλος Pl.R. 501d
; also κατ' εἰ δέ τινα τρόπον in any way, IG 5(2).6.27 ([place name] Tegea).

f εἴ ποτε or εἴπερ ποτέ now if ever, ἡμῖν δὲ καλῶς, εἴπερ ποτέ, ἔχει.. ἡ ξυναλλαγή Th.4.20
, cf. Ar.Eq. 594; αἴ ποτα κἄλλοτα Alc.Supp.7.11
, cf. X.An.6.4.12, etc.; but in prayers, εἴ ποτέ τοι ἐπὶ νηὸν ἔρεψα.. τόδε μοι κρήηνον ἐέλδωρ Il.1.39
.

g εἴ ποθεν (sc. δυνατόν ἐστι) if from any quarter, i.e. from some quarter or other, S.Ph. 1204 (lyr.); so εἴ ποθι somewhere, anywhere, Id.Aj. 885 (lyr.); εἴ που Od.4.193
.

h εἴ πως ib. 388, X.An.2.3.11: in an elliptical sentence (cf. VII. 1), πρέσβεις πέμψαντες, εἴ πως πείσειαν Th.1.58
.

VIII with other PARTICLES:

1 for the distinction between καὶ εἰ (or καὶ ἐάν, or κἄν ) even if, and εἰ καί (or ἐὰν καί ) even though, v. καί:—the opposite of καὶ εἰ is οὐδ' εἰ, not even if; that of εἰ καί is εἰ μηδέ, if (although) not even.

2 for ὡς εἰ, ὡς εἴ τε, ὥσπερ εἰ, etc., v. ὡς and ὥσπερ.

3 for εἰ ἄρα, v. ἄρα; for εἰ δή, εἴπερ, v. εἰ δή, εἴπερ; for εἴ γε, v. γέ.

IX in neg. oaths, = Hebr. im, LXXPs.94(95).11, Ev.Marc.8.12, al.

C IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS, whether, folld. by the ind., subj., or opt., according to the principles of oratio obliqua:

1 with IND. after primary tenses, representing the same tense in the direct question, σάφα δ' οὐκ οἶδ' εἰ θεός ἐστιν whether he is a god, Il.5.183; εἰ ξυμπονήσεις.. σκόπει S.Ant.41
.

2 with SUBJ. after primary tenses, representing a dubitative subj. in the direct question, τὰ ἐκπώματα οὐκ οἶδ' εἰ Χρυσάντᾳ τουτῳῒ δῶ whether I should give them, X.Cyr.8.4.16: sts. elliptical, ἐς τὰ χρηστήρια ἔπεμπε, εἰ στρατεύηται ἐπὶ τοὺς Πέρσας Hdt.1.75
.

3 OPT. after past tenses, representing either of the two previous constructions in the direct question, ἤρετο εἴ τις ἐμοῦ εἴη σοφώτερος he asked whether any one was wiser than I (direct ἔστι τις σοφώτερος;), Pl.Ap. 21a; ἐπεκηρυκεύετο Πεισιστράτῳ, εἰ βούλοιτό οἱ τὴν θυγατέρα ἔχειν γυναῖκα Hdt.1.60
: rarely [tense] aor. opt. for the [tense] aor. ind., ἠρώτων αὐτὸν εἰ ἀναπλεύσειεν I asked him whether he had set sail (direct ἀνέπλευσας;), D.50.55: but [tense] aor. opt. usually represents [tense] aor. subj., τὸν θεὸν ἐπήροντο εἰ παραδοῖεν Κορινθίοις τὴν πόλιν.. καὶ τιμωρίαν τινὰ πειρῷντ' ἀπ' αὐτῶν ποιεῖσθαι they asked whether they should deliver their city to the Corinthians, and should try.., Th.1.25:—in both constructions the ind. or subj. may be retained, ψῆφον ἐβούλοντο ἐπαγαγεῖν εἰ χρὴ πολεμεῖν ib. 119; ἐβουλεύοντο εἴτε κατακαύσωσιν.. εἴτε τι ἄλλο χρήσωνται whether they should burn them or should dispose of them in some other way, Id.2.4; ἀνακοινοῦσθαι αὐτὸν αὑτῷ εἰ δῷ ἐπιψηφίσαι τοῖς προέδροις [he said that] he consulted him whether he should give.., Aeschin.2.68.

4 with OPT. and ἄν when this was the form of the direct question, ἠρώτων εἰ δοῖεν ἂν τούτων τὰ πιστά they asked whether they would give (direct δοιήτε ἄν;), X.An.4.8.7.

5 the NEG. used with εἰ in indirect questions is οὐ, when οὐ would be used in the direct question, ἐνετέλλετο.. εἰρωτᾶν εἰ οὔ τι ἐπαισχύνεται whether he is not ashamed, Hdt.1.90, etc.; but if μή would be required in the direct form, it is retained in the indirect, οὐ τοῦτο ἐρωτῶ, ἀλλ' εἰ τοῦ μὲν δικαίου μὴ ἀξιοῖ πλέον ἔχειν μηδὲ βούλεται ὁ δίκαιος, τοῦ δὲ ἀδίκου (the direct question would be μὴ ἀξιοῖ μηδὲ βούλεται; he does not see fit nor wish, does he?) Pl.R. 349b:—in double indirect questions, εἴτε.. εἴτε.. ; εἰ.. εἴτε.. ; εἴτε.. ἢ .., either οὐ or μή can be used in the second clause, ὅπως ἴδῃς εἴτ' ἔνδον εἴτ' οὐκ ἔνδον S.Aj.7
; σκοπῶμεν εἰ ἡμῖν πρέπει ἢ οὔ Pl.R. 451d
; εἰ ἀληθὲς ἢ μή, πειράσομαι μαθεῖν ib. 339a; πολλὰ ἂν περιεσκέψω, εἴτε ἐπιτρεπτέον εἴτε οὔ·.. οὐδένα λόγον οὐδὲ συμβουλὴν ποιῇ, εἴτε χρὴ ἐπιτρέπειν σαυτὸν αὐτῷ εἴτε μή Id.Prt. 313a
, 313b; ἀνάγκη τὴν ἐμὴν μητέρα, εἴτε θυγάτηρ ἦν Κίρωνος εἴτε μή, καὶ εἰ παρ' ἐκείνῳ διῃτᾶτο ἢ οὔ, καὶ γάμους εἰ διττοὺς ὑπὲρ ταύτης εἱστίασεν ἢ μὴ.. πάντα ταῦτα εἰδέναι τοὺς οἰκέτας Is.8.9
; τοὺς νόμους καταμανθάνειν εἰ καλῶς κεῖνται ἢ μή.. τοὺς λόγους εἰ ὀρθῶς ὑμᾶς διδάσκουσιν ἢ οὔ Antipho 5.14.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > εἰ
67 ὁ

ὁ, [full] ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

A demonstr. Pronoun.

B in [dialect] Att., definite or prepositive Article.

C in [dialect] Ep., the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nom. masc. and fem. sg. and pl., ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codd. and most printed books, exc. when used as the relative ; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, αἳ ; the nom. forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by A.D.Pron.8.7 not to be enclitic. The forms τῶν, τοῖς, ταῖς were barytone (i. e. τὼν, τοὶς, ταὶς ) in [dialect] Aeol. acc. to Aristarch. ap. A.D.Synt.51.26. For οἱ, αἱ some dialects (not Cypr., cf. Inscr.Cypr.135.30H., nor Cret., cf.Leg.Gort. 5.28, nor Lesbian, cf. Alc.81, Sapph.Supp.5.1 ) and Hom. have τοί, ταί (though οἱ, αἱ are also found in Hom.): other Homeric forms are gen. sg. τοῖο, gen. and dat. dual τοῖιν Od.18.34
, al.: gen. pl. fem. τάων [pron. full] [ᾱ], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι, never ταῖσι or ταῖς in Hom.— In [dialect] Dor. and all other dialects exc. [dialect] Att. and [dialect] Ion. the fem. forms preserve the old [pron. full] ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence [dialect] Dor. etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶς ; the gen. pl. τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶν ; the gen. sg. is in many places τῶ, acc. pl. τώς, but Cret., etc., τόνς (Leg.Gort.7.7, al.) or τός (ib.3.50, al.) ; in Lesbian [dialect] Aeol. the acc. pl. forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, IG12(2).645 A13, B62 ; dat. pl. τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, v. supr.), ib.645 A8, ib.1.6 ; ταῖσι as demonstr., Sapph. 16. The [dialect] Att. Poets also used the [dialect] Ion. and [dialect] Ep. forms τοῖσι, ταῖσι ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν.., τοὶ δέ.., for οἱ μέν.., οἱ δέ.., not only in lyr., as A.Pers. 584, Th. 295, 298 ; οἱ μέν.. τοὶ δ' S.Aj. 1404
(anap.) ; but even in a trimeter, A.Pers. 424. In [dialect] Att. the dual has usu. only one gender, τὼ θεώ (for τὰ θεά) And.1.113 sq. ; τὼ πόλεε Foed. ap. Th.5.23 ; τὼ ἡμέρα X.Cyr.1.2.11
; τὼ χεῖρε Id.Mem.2.3.18
; τοῖν χεροῖν Pl.Tht. 155e
; τοῖν γενεσέοιν Id.Phd. 71e
; τοῖν πολέοιν Isoc.4.75
(τά S.Ant. 769, Ar.Eq. 424, 484, ταῖν Lys.19.17
, Is.5.16, etc. have been corrected) ; in Arc. the form τοῖς functions as gen. dual fem., μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν Schwyzer664.8
(Orchom., iv B.C.):—in Elean and [dialect] Boeot. ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, = ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε, nom.pl. masc. τυΐ the following men, Schwyzer485.14 (Thespiae, iii B.C.), al., cf. infr. VIII. 5. (With ὁ, ἁ, cf. Skt. demonstr. pron. sa, sā, Goth. sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Lat. acc. sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from Τόδ] cf. Skt. tat (tad), Lat. is-tud, Goth. pata: —with τοί cf. Skt. te, Lith. tĩe, OE. pá, etc.:—with τάων cf. Skt. tāsām, Lat. is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (q. v.) is different.)

A ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in Hom. the commonest sense: freq. also in Hdt. (1.86,5.35,al.), and sts. in Trag. (mostly in lyr., A.Supp. 1047, etc.; in trimeters, Id.Th. 197, Ag.7, Eu. 174 ; τῶν γάρ.., τῆς γάρ.., Id.Supp. 358, S.OT 1082 ; seldom in [dialect] Att. Prose, exc. in special phrases, v. infr. VI, VII):

I joined with a Subst., to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, Il. 11.660; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with Appellat., Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.— thataged man, 7.324 ; αἰετοῦ.. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, 21.252, al. ; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, 20.181 ; οἴχετ' ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, 11.288, cf. 13.433, al.: sts. with words between the Pron. and Noun, αὐτὰρ ὁ αὖτε Πέλοψ 2.105
; τὸν Ἕκτορι μῦθον ἐνίσπες 11.186
, cf. 703, al.:—different from this are cases like Il.1.409 αἴ κέν πως ἐθέλῃσιν ἐπὶ Τρώεσσιν ἀρῆξαι, τοὺς δὲ κατὰ πρύμνας τε καὶ ἀμφ' ἅλα ἔλσαι Ἀχαιούς if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships— I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, cf. 1.472, 4.20, 329, al.

II freq. without a Subst., he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε Il.1.12
, al.

III placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons., ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc., Il.17.172 ; οἷ' οὔ πώ τιν' ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν.. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who.., Od.2.119, cf. Il.5.332 ; θάλαμον τὸν ἀφίκετο, τόν ποτε τέκτων ξέσσεν Od.21.43
, cf. 1.116, 10.74 :—for the [dialect] Att. usage v. infr.

IV before a Possessive Pron. its demonstr. force is sts. very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, Il.6.407, cf. 11.608 ; but in 15.58, 16.40, and elsewh. it is merely the Art.

V for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, v. infr. B. init.

VI ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.. without a Subst., in all cases, genders, and numbers, Hom., etc.: sts. in Opposition, where ὁ μέν prop. refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter ; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter,
ὁ δέ
the former, Pl.Prt. 359e
, Isoc.2.32,34: sts. in Partition, the one.., the other.., etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in gen. pl., being divided by the ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.., into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι.., τῶν δ' αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο Il.18.595
; τῶν πόλεων αἱ μὲν τυραννοῦνται, αἱ δὲ δημοκρατοῦνται, αἱ δὲ ἀριστοκρατοῦνται Pl.R. 338d
, etc.: but freq. the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον Il.5.28
, cf. Od.12.73, etc.: so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., S.Ant. 22, etc. ; πηγὴ ἡ μὲν εἰς αὐτὸν ἔδυ, ἡ δὲ ἔξω ἀπορρεῖ Pl.Phdr. 255c
; if the Noun be collective, it is in the gen. sg., ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος D.42.6
: sts. a Noun is added in apposition with ὁ μέν or ὁ δέ, ὁ μὲν οὔτασ' Ἀτύμνιον ὀξέϊ δουρὶ Ἀντίλοχος.., Μάρις δὲ.. Il.16.317
-19, cf. 116 ; τοὺς μὲν τὰ δίκαια ποιεῖν ἠνάγκασα, τοὺς πλουσίους, τοὺς δὲ πένητας κτλ. D.18.102
, cf. Pl.Grg. 501a, etc.

2 when a neg. accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ S.OC24
; τὸν φιλόσοφον σοφίας ἐπιθυμητὴν εἶναι, οὐ τῆς μὲν τῆς δ' οὔ, ἀλλὰ πάσης Pl.R. 475b
; οὐ πάσας χρὴ τὰς δόξας τιμᾶν, ἀλλὰ τὰς μὲν τὰς δ' οὔ· οὐδὲ πάντων, ἀλλὰ τῶν μὲν τῶν δ' οὔ Id.Cri. 47a
, etc.

3 ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δέ τις.. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν.., ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος X.Cyr.3.1.41
; νόμους.. τοὺς μὲν ὀρθῶς τιθέασιν τοὺς δέ τινας οὐκ ὀρθῶς Pl.R. 339c
, cf. Phlb. 13c.

4 on τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., or τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., v. infr. VIII.4.

5 ὁ μέν is freq. used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ' ἐσκίδναντο.., Μυρμιδόνας δ' οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι Il.23.3
, cf. 24.722, Th.8.12, etc.: also folld. by ἀλλά, ἡ μὲν γάρ μ' ἐκέλευε.., ἀλλ' ἐγὼ οὐκ ἔθελον Od.7.304
; by ἄλλος δέ, Il.6.147, etc. ; τὸν μὲν.., ἕτερον δέ Ar.Av. 843
, etc. ; ὁ μέν.., ὃς δέ.. Thgn.205
(v.l. οὐδέ): less freq. ὁ δέ in the latter clause without ὁ μέν preceding, τῇ ῥα παραδραμέτην φεύγων, ὁ δ' ὄπισθε διώκων (for ὁ μὲν φεύγων) Il.22.157 ; σφραγῖδε.. χρυσοῦν ἔχουσα τὸν δακτύλιον, ἡ δ' ἑτέρα ἀργυροῦν IG22.1388.45
, cf. μέν D.
III ; γεωργὸς μὲν εἷς, ὁ δὲ οἰκοδόμος, ἄλλος δέ τις ὑφαντής Pl.R. 369d
, cf. Tht. 181d.

6 ὁ δέ following μέν sts. refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ', ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον.. βεβλήκει Il. 4.491
; τὴν μὲν γενομένην αὐτοῖσι αἰτίην οὐ μάλα ἐξέφαινε, ὁ δὲ ἔλεγέ σφι Hdt.6.3
, cf. 1.66,6.9, 133,7.6 : rare in [dialect] Att. Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν Th.1.87
; ἔμενον ὡς κατέχοντες τὸ ἄκρον· οἱ δ' οὐ κατεῖχον X.An.4.2.6
: this is different from ὁ δέ in apodosi, v. infr. 7 ; also from passages in which both clauses have a common verb, v. ὅ γε 11.

7 ὁ δέ is freq. used simply in continuing a narrative, Il.1.43, etc.; also used by Hom. in apodosi after a relat., v. ὅδε 111.3.

8 the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ' ὁ.. οὔθ' ὁ Il.15.417
; ἢ τοῖσιν ἢ τοῖς A.Supp. 439
; οὔτε τοῖς οὔτε τοῖς Pl.Lg. 701e
.

VII the following usages prevailed in [dialect] Att. Prose,

1 in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nom. sg. masc. καὶ ὅς ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Art. were used (v. ὅς A.
II.I and cf. Skt. sas, alternat. form of sa) ; so, in acc., καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν Pl.Smp. 174a
, cf. X.Cyr.1.3.9, etc.; also in Hdt., καὶ τὴν φράσαι 6.61
, al.

2 ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ Pl.Lg. 721b
: but mostly in acc., καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν Lys.1.23
, cf. Pl.Lg. 784d ; τὰ καὶ τὰ πεπονθώς D.21.141
, cf. 9.68 ; τὸ καὶ τό Id.18.243
; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, Arist.Rh. 1401a4, cf. 1413a22 ; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ' ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν Thgn.398
, cf. Pi.P.5.55,7.20, al.; τῶν τε καὶ τῶν καιρόν Id.O. 2.53
; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, Hp.Acut.46 ; cf. A. VI.8.

VIII abs. usages of single cases,

1 fem. dat. τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, Il.5.752, 858, al.: folld. by ᾗ, 13.52, etc.: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ X.Ath.2.12
.

b with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, Il.10.531,11.149, 12.124 ; τῇ ἴμεν ᾗ.. 15.46
; δελφῖνες τῇ καὶ τῇ ἐθύνεον ἰχθυάοντες Hes.Sc. 210
:—only poet.

c of Manner,
τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν
in this way, thus, Od.8.510
.

d repeated, τῇ μέν.., τῇ δέ.., in one way.., in another.., or partly.., partly.., E.Or. 356, Pl.Smp. 211a, etc.: without μέν, τῇ μᾶλλον, τῇ δ' ἧσσον Parm.8.48
.

e relat., where, by which way, only [dialect] Ep., as Il.12.118, Od.4.229.

2 neut. dat. τῷ, therefore, on this account, freq. in Hom., Il.1.418, 2.254, al. (v. infr.): also in Trag., A.Pr. 239, S.OT 510 (lyr.) ; in Prose, τῷ τοι.. Pl.Tht. 179d
, Sph. 230b.

b thus, so, Il.2.373, 13.57, etc.: it may also, esp. when εἰ precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, Od.1.239,3.224, 258,al., Theoc.29.11.—In Hom. the true form is prob. τῶ, as in cod. A, or τώ, cf. A.D.Adv.199.2.

3 neut. acc. τό, wherefore, Il.3.176, Od.8.332, al., S.Ph. 142(lyr.) ; also τὸ δέ abs., but the fact is.., Pl.Ap. 23a, Men. 97c, Phd. 109d, Tht. 157b, R. 340d, Lg. 967a ; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (cf. supr. VI. 6), τὸ δ' ἐπὶ κακουργίᾳ.. ἐπετήδευσαν Th.1.37
; τὸ δὲ.. ἡμῖν μᾶλλον περιέσται Id.2.89
; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, Nic.Dam.58J.

4 τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., partly.., partly.., or on the one hand.., on the other.., Th.7.36, etc., cf.Od.2.46 ; more freq. τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., Hdt.1.173, S.Tr. 534, etc.; also τὰ μέν τι.., τὰ δέ τι.. X.An.4.1.14
; τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δέ τι.. Luc.Macr.14
; τὰ μέν.., τὸ δὲ πλέον.. Th.1.90
: sts. without τὸ μέν.. in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι Id.1.107
,7.48 : rarely of Time, τὰ μὲν πολλὰ.., τέλος δέ several times.. and finally, Hdt.3.85.

5 of Time, sts. that time, sts. this (present) time, συνμαχία κ' ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) SIG9.3 (Olympia, vi B.C.): so with Preps., ἐκ τοῦ, [dialect] Ep. τοῖο, from that time, Il.1.493,15.601.

b πρὸ τοῦ, sts. written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, Hdt.1.103, 122,5.55, A.Ag. 1204, Ar.Nu.5, etc.; ἐν τῷ πρὸ τοῦ χρόνῳ Th.1.32
, cf. A.Eu. 462 ; τὸ πρὸ τοῦ D.S.20.59
.

c in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (lit. before this [day]), and to-day's, IG9(2).517.43 (Larissa, iii B.C.).

6 ἐν τοῖς is freq. used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, Hdt.7.137 ; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, Th.1.6, etc.; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος ( πρώτοις codd.) Pherecr.145.4 ; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, Aristid. Or.43(1).16, cf. 37(2).2: when used with fem. Nouns, ἐν τοῖς remained without change of gender, ἐν τοῖς πλεῖσται δὴ νῆες the greatest number of ships, Th.3.17; ἐν τοῖς πρώτη ἐγένετο (sc. ἡ στάσις) ib.82 : also with Advbs., ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα Id.8.90
, Pl.Cri. 52a, Plu.2.74e, 421d, 723e, Brut.6, 11,al., Paus.1.16.3, etc.; ἐν τοῖς χαλεπώτατα Th.7.71
; τὴν Αἴγυπτον ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα μελάγγειον οὖσαν Plu.2.364c
: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον Aristid.Or.48(24).47
codd.; with πάνυ, ἐν τοῖς πάνυ D.H.1.19
, cf. 66 ( ἐν ταῖς πάνυ f.l. 4.14,15).

B ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signf. in the earliest Gr., becoming commoner later. In Hom. the demonstr. force can generally be traced, v. supr. A. I, but the definite Art. must be recognized in places like Il.1.167,7.412, 9.309, 12.289, Od.19.372 : also when joined to an Adj. to make it a Subst.,
αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον
the hindmost man, Il.11.178
; τὸν ἄριστον 17.80
; τὸν δύστηνον 22.59
; τὸν προὔχοντα 23.325
; τῷ πρώτῳ.., τῷ δευτέρῳ.., etc., ib. 265sq. ; also in τῶν ἄλλων 2.674
, al.: with Advs., τὸ πρίν 24.543
, al.; τὸ πάρος περ 17.720
; τὸ πρόσθεν 23.583
; also τὸ τρίτον ib. 733 ; τὰ πρῶτα 1.6
,al.; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest, 23.454 ; ἀνδρῶν τῶν τότε 9.559
.—The true Art., however, is first fully established in fifth-cent. [dialect] Att., whilst the demonstr. usage disappears, exc. in a few cases, V. A. VI-VIII.—Chief usages, esp. in [dialect] Att.

I not only with common Appellats., Adjs., and Parts., to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also freq. where we use the Possessive Pron., τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην Ar.Ach.5
; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, And.1.61, etc. ; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, S.Ant. 190 ; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, Th.1.12; οὐχ ὑπὲρ τὴν οὐσίαν ποιούμενοι τοὺς παῖδας Pl.R. 372b
.

b omitted with pr.nn.and freq. with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, v. θεός 1.1, βασιλεύς III ; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, IG12.4.1, al.: but added to pr. nn., when attention is to be called to the previous mention of the person, as Th. (3.70 ) speaks first of Πειθίας and then refers to him repeatedly as ὁ Π.; cf. Θράσυλος in Id.8.104, with ὁ Θ. ib. 105 ; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, E.Fr. 480 ; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with pr. nn., save to give pecul. emphasis, like Lat. ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, S.OT 729, El.35, etc.: later, however, the usage became very common (the Homeric usage of ὁ with a pr. n. is different, v. A.I).

c Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in SE183b7, PA642a28, al., but ὁ Σωκράτης when he means the Platonic Socrates, as Pol.1261a6, al.: so with other pr.nn., EN1145a21, 1146a21, al.

d for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc., v. καί B.2.

2 in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν.. λεύσσει Il.3.109
; πονηρὸν ὁ συκοφάντης D.18.242
, etc.

b freq. with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως Th.3.45
, etc.

3 of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, v. γεωγράφος, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός.

4 with infs., which thereby become Substs., τὸ εἴργειν prevention, Pl.Grg. 505b ; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, S.Ant. 1348(anap.), etc.: when the subject is expressed it is put between the Art.and the inf., τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, Pl.Phd. 62b ; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, Hdt.1.86.

5 in neut. before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man ; τὸ λέγω the word λέγω ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', E.Hipp. 265(lyr.); τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, Pl.Men. 72e : and so before whole clauses, ἡ δόξα.. περὶ τοῦ οὕστινας δεῖ ἄρχειν the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', Id.R. 431e ; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ' ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if.. ', X.Cyr. 5.1.21, cf. Pl.R. 327c, etc.; τοὺς τοῦ τί πρακτέον λογισμούς D.23.148
; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, Arist.Pol. 1283b11.

6 before relat. clauses, when the Art. serves to combine the whole relat. clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, Pl.Cra. 435a ; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν.., καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) Id.Criti. 115b ; τῶν ὅσοι ἂν.. ἀγαθοὶ κριθῶσιν Id.R. 469b
; ἐκ γῆς καὶ πυρὸς μείξαντες καὶ τῶν ὅσα πυρὶ καὶ γῇ κεράννυται Id.Prt. 320d
, cf. Hyp.Lyc.2 ; ταύτην τε τὴν αἰτίαν καὶ τὴν ὅθεν ἡ κίνησις Arist.Metaph. 987a8
; τὸν ὃς ἔφη Lys.23.8
: hence the relat., by attraction, freq. follows the case of the Art., τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν τε καὶ ὑμῖν, i.e. τοῖς οὖσιν οἷοι ἡμεῖς καὶ ὑμεῖς, X.HG2.3.25, etc.

7 before Prons.,

a before the pers. Prons., giving them greater emphasis, but only in acc., τὸν ἐμέ Pl.Tht. 166a
,Phlb. 20b ; τὸν.. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ ib. 59b ; τὸν αὑτόν Id.Phdr. 258a
; on ὁ αὐτός, v. αὐτός 111.

b before the interrog. Pron. (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, A.Pr. 251, Ar. Pax 696 ; also τὰ τί; because οἷα went before, ib. 693. Of τίς only the neut. is thus used (v.supr.): ποῖος is thus used not only in neut. pl., τὰ ποῖα; E.Ph. 707 ; but also in the other genders, ὁ ποῖος; ib. 1704 ; τῆς ποίας μερίδος; D.18.64 ; τοῖς ποίοις.. ; Arist.Ph. 227b1.

c with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc., the Art. either makes the Pron. into a Subst.,
ὁ τοιοῦτος
that sort of person, X.Mem.4.2.21
, etc.; or subjoins it to a Subst. which already has an Art., τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην D.41.13
.

8 before ἅπας, Pi.N.1.69, Hdt.3.64, 7.153 (s.v.l.), S.OC 1224 (lyr.), D.18.231, etc.; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, Arist.Pol. 1287b8, 1288a19 : on its usage with ἕκαστος, v. sub voc.; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc., v. ἄλλος 11.6, πολύς 11.3
, etc.

9 the Art. with the [comp] Comp. is rare, if ἤ follows, S.Ant. 313, OC 796.

II elliptic expressions:

1 before the gen. of a pr.<*>., to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (sc. υἱός) Th.4.104 ; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (sc. θυγάτηρ) E.Hel. 470 : also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, Lys.32.24, Alciphr.2.2.10 ; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M. the wife of S., Ar.Ec.46 ; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, X.An.1.2.15 ; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of A., Hp.Hum.20.

2 generally, before a gen. it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, Th.4.23,6.60 ; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, Id.4.83, cf. 6.89, etc.; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, Id.4.18 ; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, ib.55 ; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, E.Supp.78(lyr.); τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, S.Tr. 498(lyr.): hence with neut. of Possessive Pron., τὸ ἐμόν, τὸ σόν, what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, S.Aj. 124, El. 251, etc.: and with gen. of 3 pers., τὸ τῆσδε E.Hipp.48
. But τό τινος is freq. also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος Hdt.1.86
; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, Pl.Tht. 183e ; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, Ar.V. 1432, D.54.7, Theoc.2.76, Herod.5.52, Ev.Luc.2.49.

3 very freq. with cases governed by Preps.. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, Th.4.13 ; οἱ ἀμφί τινα, οἱ περί τινα, such an one and his followers, v. ἀμφί c.1.3, περί c.1.2 ; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, Th.1.59, al.; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, Id.7.70 ; τὰ ἀπ' Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, Id.8.48 ; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, Id.2.87, etc.

4 on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc., v. μά IV.

5 in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (sc. ὁδόν) Pl.Ly. 203a ; ἡ ἐπὶ θανάτῳ (sc. στολή, δέσις), v. θάνατος; κατὰ τὴν ἐμήν (sc. γνώμην), v. ἐμός 11.4 ; ἡ αὔριον (sc. ἡμέρα), v. αὔριον; ἡ Λυδιστί (sc. ἁρμονία) Arist.Pol. 1342b32, etc.: freq. with Advs., which thus take an adj. sense, as ὁ, ἡ, τὸ νῦν; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς Th.1.52
; οἱ τότε, οἱ ἔπειτα (sc. ἄνθρωποι), ib.9,10, etc. ; but τό stands abs. with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a Subst., as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο E.Ph. 266
, cf.[315] (lyr.); ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν Id.Or. 1412
(lyr.): rarely abs. in gen., ἰέναι τοῦ πρόσω to go forward, X.An.1.3.1 ; τοῦ προσωτάτω δραμεῖν S.Aj. 731
.

C as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects ; both in nom. sg. masc. ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες Od.2.262
, cf. 1.300, al. ; Ἔρως, ὃ κατ' ὀμμάτων στάζεις πόθον E.Hipp. 526
(lyr.); Ἄδωνις, ὃ κἠν Ἀχέροντι φιλεῖται Theoc.15.86
; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, Schwyzer679.12,25 ([place name] Cyprus) ; and in the forms beginning with τ, esp. in Hom. (Od.4.160, al.), Hdt.1.7, al.: also in [dialect] Ion. Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι Archil.87.3
, cf. Semon.7.3, Anacr.86 (prob.), Herod.2.64, al.: freq. in Trag., τῆς S.OC 1258
, Tr. 381, 728, E.Alc. 883 (anap.); τῷ S.Ph.14
; τήν Id.OC 747
, Tr.47, El. 1144 ; τό Id.OT 1427 ; τῶν ib. 1379, Ant. 1086.—Never in Com. or [dialect] Att. Prose:—[dialect] Ep. gen. sg. τεῦ Il.18.192
(s.v.l.).

D CRASIS OF ARTICLE:

a [dialect] Att. ὁ, ἡ, τό, with [pron. full] ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιον; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθά; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc.; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντος; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([pron. full] ¯ ?ὁX?ὁX), [dialect] Ion. οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (v. ἕτερος), [dialect] Att. fem. ἡτέρα, dat. θητέρᾳ (v. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc., before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (freq. written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Pap.); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί= αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ.

b other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g., [dialect] Dor. ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ Theoc.1.65
, ὥλαφος from ὁ ἔλαφος ib. 135 ; [dialect] Ion. ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς- SIG57.45 (Milet., v B.C.) ; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή Heraclit.60
, etc.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὁ
68 ὡς

ὡς (Hom.+; loanw. in rabb.) relative adv. of the relative pron. ὅς. It is used as

① a comparative particle, marking the manner in which someth. proceeds, as, like

ⓐ corresponding to οὕτως=‘so, in such a way’: σωθήσεται, οὕτως ὡς διὰ πυρός he will be saved, (but only) in such a way as (one, in an attempt to save oneself, must go) through fire (and therefore suffer fr. burns) 1 Cor 3:15. τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα οὕτως ἀγαπάτω ὡς ἑαυτόν Eph 5:33; cp. vs. 28. ἡμέρα κυρίου ὡς κλέπτης οὕτως ἔρχεται 1 Th 5:2. The word οὕτως can also be omitted ἀσφαλίσασθε ὡς οἴδατε make it as secure as you know how = as you can Mt 27:65. ὡς οὐκ οἶδεν αὐτός (in such a way) as he himself does not know = he himself does not know how, without his knowing (just) how Mk 4:27. ὡς ἀνῆκεν (in such a way) as is fitting Col 3:18. Cp. 4:4; Eph 6:20; Tit 1:5 (cp. Just., A I, 3, 1 ὡς πρέπον ἐστίν). ὡς πᾶσα γυνὴ γεννᾷ GJs 11:2; ὡς ἀπεκαλύφθη AcPlCor 1:8.

ⓑ special uses

α. in ellipses (TestAbr A 12 p. 90, 22 [Stone p. 28] θρόνος … ἐξαστράπτων ὡς πῦρ; TestJob 20:3 χρήσασθαι … ὡς ἐβούλετο; JosAs 12:7 πρὸς σὲ κατέφυγον ὡς παιδίον ἐπὶ τὸν πατέρα) ἐλάλουν ὡς νήπιος I used to speak as a child (is accustomed to speak) 1 Cor 13:11a; cp. bc; Mk 10:15; Eph 6:6a; Phil 2:22; Col 3:22. ὡς τέκνα φωτὸς περιπατεῖτε walk as (is appropriate for) children of light Eph 5:8; cp. 6:6b. ὡς ἐν ἡμέρᾳ as (it is one’s duty to walk) in the daylight Ro 13:13. The Israelites went through the Red Sea ὡς διὰ ξηρᾶς γῆς as (one travels) over dry land Hb 11:29. οὐ λέγει ὡς ἐπὶ πολλῶν ἀλλʼ ὡς ἐφʼ ἑνός he speaks not as one would of a plurality (s. ἐπί 8), but as of a single thing Gal 3:16.—Ro 15:15; 1 Pt 5:3. Also referring back to οὕτως (GrBar 6:16 ὡς γὰρ τὰ δίστομα οὕτως καὶ ὁ ἀλέκτωρ μηνύει τοῖς ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ like articulate beings the rooster informs earth’s inhabitants) οὕτως τρέχω ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως I run as (a person) with a fixed goal 1 Cor 9:26a. Cp. ibid. b; Js 2:12.

β. ὡς and the words that go w. it can be the subj. or obj., of a clause: γενηθήτω σοι ὡς θέλεις let it be done (= it will be done) for you as you wish Mt 15:28. Cp. 8:13; Lk 14:22 v.l. (for ὅ; cp. ὡς τὸ θέλημά σου OdeSol 11:21). The predicate belonging to such a subj. is to be supplied in οὐχ ὡς ἐγὼ θέλω (γενηθήτω) Mt 26:39a.—ἐποίησεν ὡς προσέταξεν αὐτῷ ὁ ἄγγελος he did as (= that which) the angel commanded him (to do) Mt 1:24; cp. 26:19 (on the structure s. RPesch, BZ 10, ’66, 220–45; 11, ’67, 79–95; cp. the formula Job 42:9 and the contrasting negation Ex 1:17; s. also Ex 3:21f); 28:15.—Practically equivalent to ὅ, which is a v.l. for it Mk 14:72 (JBirdsall, NovT 2, ’58, 272–75; cp. Lk 14:22 above).

γ. ἕκαστος ὡς each one as or according to what Ro 12:3; 1 Cor 3:5; 7:17ab; Rv 22:12. ὡς ἦν δυνατὸς ἕκαστος each person interpreted them as best each could Papias (2:16).

δ. in indirect questions (X., Cyr. 1, 5, 11 ἀπαίδευτοι ὡς χρὴ συμμάχοις χρῆσθαι) ἐξηγοῦντο ὡς ἐγνώσθη αὐτοῖς ἐν τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου they told how he had made himself known to them when they broke bread together Lk 24:35. Cp. Mk 12:26 v.l. (for πῶς); Lk 8:47; 23:55; Ac 10:38; 20:20; Ro 11:2; 2 Cor 7:15.

② a conjunction marking a point of comparison, as. This ‘as’ can have a ‘so’ expressly corresponding to it or not, as the case may be; further, both sides of the comparison can be expressed in complete clauses, or one or even both may be abbreviated.

ⓐ ὡς is correlative w. οὕτως=so. οὕτως … ὡς (so, in such a way) … as: οὐδέποτε ἐλάλησεν οὕτως ἄνθρωπος ὡς οὗτος λαλεῖ ὁ ἄνθρωπος J 7:46. ὡς … οὕτως Ac 8:32 (Is 53:7); 23:11; Ro 5:15 (ὡς τὸ παράπτωμα, οὕτως καὶ τὸ χάρισμα, both halves to be completed), 18. ὡς κοινωνοί ἐστε τῶν παθημάτων, οὕτως καὶ τῆς παρακλήσεως as you are comrades in suffering, so (shall you be) in comfort as well 2 Cor 1:7. Cp. 7:14; 11:3 v.l.—ὡς … καί as … so (Plut., Mor. 39e; Ath. 15, 2) Mt 6:10; Ac 7:51; 2 Cor 13:2; Gal 1:9; Phil 1:20.

ⓑ The clause beginning w. ὡς can easily be understood and supplied in many cases; when this occurs, the noun upon which the comparison depends can often stand alone, and in these cases ὡς acts as a particle denoting comparison. οἱ δίκαιοι ἐκλάμψουσιν ὡς ὁ ἥλιος the righteous will shine out as the sun (shines) Mt 13:43. ὡς ἐπὶ λῃστὴν ἐξήλθατε συλλαβεῖν με as (one goes out) against a robber, (so) you have gone out to arrest me 26:55 (Mel., P. 79, 574 ὡς ἐπὶ φόνιον λῄστην). γίνεσθε φρόνιμοι ὡς οἱ ὄφεις be (as) wise as serpents (are) 10:16b. Cp. Lk 12:27; 21:35; 22:31; J 15:6; 2 Ti 2:17; 1 Pt 5:8.

ⓒ Semitic infl. is felt in the manner in which ὡς, combined w. a subst., takes the place of a subst. or an adj.

α. a substantive

א. as subj. (cp. Da 7:13 ὡς υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου ἤρχετο; cp. 10:16, 18) ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου (ἦν) ὡς θάλασσα ὑαλίνη before the throne there was something like a sea of glass Rv 4:6. Cp. 8:8; 9:7a. ἀφʼ ἑνὸς ἐγενήθησαν ὡς ἡ ἄμμος from one man they have come into being as the sand, i.e. countless descendants Hb 11:12.

ב. as obj. (JosAs 17:6 εἶδεν Ἀσενὲθ ὡς ἅρμα πυρός) ᾂδουσιν ὡς ᾠδὴν καινήν they were singing, as it were, a new song Rv 14:3. ἤκουσα ὡς φωνήν I heard what sounded like a shout 19:1, 6abc; cp. 6:1.

β. as adjective, pred. (mostly εἶναι, γίνεσθαι ὡς; the latter also in rendering of ךְּ to express the basic reality of something: GDelling, Jüd. Lehre u. Frömmigkeit ’67, p. 58, on ParJer 9:7) ἐὰν μὴ γένησθε ὡς τὰ παιδία if you do not become child-like Mt 18:3. ὡς ἄγγελοί εἰσιν they are similar to angels 22:30. πᾶσα σὰρξ ὡς χόρτος 1 Pt 1:24. Cp. Mk 6:34; 12:25; Lk 22:26ab; Ro 9:27 (Is 10:22); 29a (Is 1:9a); 1 Cor 4:13; 7:7f, 29–31; 9:20f; 2 Pt 3:8ab (Ps 89:4); Rv 6:12ab al. (cp. GrBar 14:1 ἐγένετο φωνὴ ὡς βροντή). Sim. also ποίησόν με ὡς ἕνα τῶν μισθίων σου treat me like one of your day laborers Lk 15:19.—The adj. or adjectival expr. for which this form stands may be used as an attribute πίστιν ὡς κόκκον σινάπεως faith like a mustard seed=faith no greater than a tiny mustard seed Mt 17:20; Lk 17:6. προφήτης ὡς εἷς τῶν προφητῶν Mk 6:15. Cp. Ac 3:22; 7:37 (both Dt 18:15); 10:11; 11:5. ἐγένετο ὡς εἷς τῶν φευγόντων AcPl Ha 5, 18. ἀρνίον ὡς ἐσφαγμένον a lamb that appeared to have been slaughtered Rv 5:6.—In expressions like τρίχας ὡς τρίχας γυναικῶν 9:8a the second τρίχας can be omitted as self-evident (Ps 54:7 v.l.): ἡ φωνὴ ὡς σάλπιγγος 4:1; cp. 1:10; 9:8b; 13:2a; 14:2c; 16:3.

ⓓ other noteworthy uses

α. ὡς as can introduce an example ὡς καὶ Ἠλίας ἐποίησεν Lk 9:54 v.l.; cp. 1 Pt 3:6; or, in the combination ὡς γέγραπται, a scripture quotation Mk 1:2 v.l.; 7:6; Lk 3:4; Ac 13:33; cp. Ro 9:25; or even an authoritative human opinion Ac 17:28; 22:5; 25:10; or any other decisive reason Mt 5:48; 6:12 (ὡς καί).

β. ὡς introduces short clauses: ὡς εἰώθει as his custom was Mk 10:1. Cp. Hs 5, 1, 2. ὡς λογίζομαι as I think 1 Pt 5:12. ὡς ἐνομίζετο as was supposed Lk 3:23 (Diog. L. 3, 2 ὡς Ἀθήνησιν ἦν λόγος [about Plato’s origin]; TestAbr A 5 p. 82, 32 [Stone p. 12] ὡς ἐμοὶ δοκεῖ; Just., A I, 6, 2 ὡς ἐδιδάχθημεν). ὡς ἦν as he was Mk 4:36. ὡς ἔφην Papias (2:15) (ApcMos 42; cp. Just., A I, 21, 6 ὡς προέφημεν).

γ. The expr. οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ ὡς ἄνθρωπος βάλῃ τὸν σπόρον Mk 4:26 may well exhibit colloquial syntax; but some think that ἄν (so one v.l. [=ἐάν, which is read by many mss.]) once stood before ἄνθρωπος and was lost inadvertently. S. the comm., e.g. EKlostermann, Hdb. z. NT⁴ ’50 ad loc.; s. also Jülicher, Gleichn. 539; B-D-F §380, 4; Mlt. 185 w. notes; Rdm.² 154; Rob. 928; 968.

③ marker introducing the perspective from which a pers., thing, or activity is viewed or understood as to character, function, or role, as

ⓐ w. focus on quality, circumstance, or role

α. as (JosAs 26:7 ἔγνω … Λευὶς … ταῦτα πάντα ὡς προφήτης; Just., A I, 7, 4 ἵνα ὡς ἄδικος κολάζηται) τί ἔτι κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρίνομαι; why am I still being condemned as a sinner? Ro 3:7. ὡς σοφὸς ἀρχιτέκτων 1 Cor 3:10. ὡς ἀρτιγέννητα βρέφη as newborn children (in reference to desire for maternal milk) 1 Pt 2:2. μή τις ὑμῶν πασχέτω ὡς φονεύς 4:15a; cp. b, 16.—1:14; 1 Cor 7:25; 2 Cor 6:4; Eph 5:1; Col 3:12; 1 Th 2:4, 7a.—In the oblique cases, genitive (ApcSed 16:2 ὡς νέου αὐτοῦ ἐπαράβλεπον τὰ πταίσματα αὐτοῦ; Just., A I, 14, 4 ὑμέτερον ἔστω ὡς δυνατῶν βασιλέων): τιμίῳ αἵματι ὡς ἀμνοῦ ἀμώμου Χριστοῦ with the precious blood of Christ, as of a lamb without blemish 1 Pt 1:19. δόξαν ὡς μονογενοῦς παρὰ πατρός glory as of an only-begotten son, coming from the Father J 1:14. Cp. Hb 12:27. Dative (Ath. 14, 2 θύουσιν ὡς θεοῖς; 28, 3 πιστεύειν ὡς μυθοποιῷ; Stephan. Byz. s.v. Κυνόσαργες: Ἡρακλεῖ ὡς θεῷ θύων): λαλῆσαι ὑμῖν ὡς πνευματικοῖς 1 Cor 3:1a; cp. bc; 10:15; 2 Cor 6:13; Hb 12:5; 1 Pt 2:13f; 3:7ab; 2 Pt 1:19. Accusative (JosAs 22:8 ἠγάπα αὐτὸν ὡς ἄνδρα προφήτην; Just., A I, 4, 4 τὸ ὄνομα ὡς ἔλεγχον λαμβάνετε; Tat. 27, 1 ὡς ἀθεωτάτους ἡμᾶς ἐκκηρύσσετε; Ath. 16, 4 οὐ προσκυνῶ αὐτὰ ὡς θεοὺς): οὐχ ὡς θεὸν ἐδόξασαν Ro 1:21; 1 Cor 4:14; 8:7; Tit 1:7; Phlm 16; Hb 6:19; 11:9. παρακαλῶ ὡς παροίκους καὶ παρεπιδήμους 1 Pt 2:11 (from the perspective of their conversion experience the recipients of the letter are compared to temporary residents and disenfranchised foreigners, cp. the imagery 1 Pt 1:19 above and s. παρεπίδημος and πάροικος 2).—This is prob. also the place for ὸ̔ ἐὰν ποιῆτε, ἐργάζεσθε ὡς τῷ κυρίῳ whatever you have to do, do it as work for the Lord Col 3:23. Cp. Eph 5:22. εἴ τις λαλεῖ ὡς λόγια θεοῦ if anyone preaches, (let the pers. do so) as if (engaged in proclaiming the) words of God 1 Pt 4:11a; cp. ibid. b; 2 Cor 2:17bc; Eph 6:5, 7.

β. ὡς w. ptc. gives the reason for an action as one who, because (X., Cyr. 7, 5, 13 κατεγέλων τῆς πολιορκίας ὡς ἔχοντες τὰ ἐπιτήδεια; Appian, Liby. 56 §244 μέμφεσθαι τοῖς θεοῖς ὡς ἐπιβουλεύουσι=as being hostile; Polyaenus 2, 1, 1; 3, 10, 3 ὡς ἔχων=just as if he had; TestAbr B 8 p. 112, 17 [Stone p. 72] ὡς αὐτῷ ὄντι φίλῳ μου (do it for) him [Abraham] as a friend of mine; TestJob 17:5 καθʼ ἡμῶν ὡς τυραννούντων against us as though we were tyrants; ApcMos 23 ὡς νομίζοντες on the assumption that (we would not be discovered); Jos., Ant. 1, 251; Ath. 16, 1 ὁ δὲ κόσμος οὐχ ὡς δεομένου τοῦ θεοῦ γέγονεν; SIG 1168, 35); Paul says: I appealed to the Emperor οὐχ ὡς τοῦ ἔθνους μου ἔχων τι κατηγορεῖν not that I had any charge to bring against my (own) people Ac 28:19 (PCairZen 44, 23 [257 B.C.] οὐχ ὡς μενῶν=not as if it were my purpose to remain there). ὡς foll. by the gen. abs. ὡς τὰ πάντα ἡμῖν τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ δεδωρημένης because his divine power has granted us everything 2 Pt 1:3. Cp. Dg. 5:16.—Only in isolated instances does ὡς show causal force when used w. a finite verb for, seeing that (PLeid 16, 1, 20; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 17, 2, end, Vit. Auct. 25; Aesop, Fab. 109 P.=148 H.; 111 H-H.: ὡς εὐθέως ἐξελεύσομαι=because; Tetrast. Iamb. 1, 6, 3; Nicetas Eugen. 6, 131 H. Cp. Herodas 10, 3: ὡς=because [with the copula ‘is’ to be supplied]) Mt 6:12 (ὡς καί as Mk 7:37 v.l.; TestDan 3:1 v.l.; the parallel Lk 11:4 has γάρ). AcPlCor 1:6 ὡς οὖν ὁ κύριος ἠλέησεν ἡμᾶς inasmuch as the Lord has shown us mercy (by permitting us). So, more oft., καθώς (q.v. 3).

γ. ὡς before the predicate acc. or nom. w. certain verbs functions pleonastically and further contributes to the aspect of perspective ὡς προφήτην ἔχουσιν τὸν Ἰωάννην Mt 21:26. Cp. Lk 16:1. λογίζεσθαί τινα ὡς foll. by acc. look upon someone as 1 Cor 4:1; 2 Cor 10:2 (for this pass. s. also c below). Cp. 2 Th 3:15ab; Phil 2:7; Js 2:9.

ⓑ w. focus on a conclusion existing only in someone’s imagination or based solely on someone’s assertion (PsSol 8:30; Jos., Bell. 3, 346; Just., A I, 27, 5; Mel., P. 58, 422) προσηνέγκατέ μοι τὸν ἄνθρωπον τοῦτον ὡς ἀποστρέφοντα τὸν λαόν, καὶ ἰδοὺ … you have brought this fellow before me as one who (as you claim) is misleading the people, and now … Lk 23:14. τί καυχᾶσαι ὡς μὴ λαβών; why do you boast, as though you (as you think) had not received? 1 Cor 4:7. Cp. Ac 3:12; 23:15, 20; 27:30. ὡς μὴ ἐρχομένου μου as though I were not coming (acc. to their mistaken idea) 1 Cor 4:18. ὡς μελλούσης τῆς πόλεως αἴρεσθαι assuming that the city was being destroyed AcPl Ha 5, 16.

ⓒ w. focus on what is objectively false or erroneous ἐπιστολὴ ὡς διʼ ἡμῶν a letter (falsely) alleged to be from us 2 Th 2:2a (Diod S 33, 5, 5 ἔπεμψαν ὡς παρὰ τῶν πρεσβευτῶν ἐπιστολήν they sent a letter which purported to come from the emissaries; Diog. L. 10:3 falsified ἐπιστολαὶ ὡς Ἐπικούρου; Just., A, II, 5, 5 ὡς ἀπʼ αὐτοῦ σπορᾷ γενομένους υἱούς). τοὺς λογιζομένους ἡμᾶς ὡς κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦντας 2 Cor 10:2 (s. also aγ above). Cp. 11:17; 13:7. Israel wishes to become righteous οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως ἀλλʼ ὡς ἐξ ἔργων not through faith but through deeds (the latter way being objectively wrong) Ro 9:32 (Rdm.² 26f). ὡς ἐκ παραδόσεως ἀγράφου εἰς αὐτὸν ἥκοντα (other matters he recounts) as having reached him through unwritten tradition (Eus. about Papias) Papias (2:11).

④ conj., marker of result in connection with indication of purpose=ὥστε so that (Trag., Hdt.+, though nearly always w. the inf.; so also POxy 1040, 11; PFlor 370, 10; Wsd 5:12; TestJob 39:7; ApcMos 38; Jos., Ant. 12, 229; Just., A I, 56, 2; Tat. 12, 2. W. the indic. X., Cyr. 5, 4, 11 οὕτω μοι ἐβοήθησας ὡς σέσῳσμαι; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. 8, 7 p. 324, 25f; Jos., Bell. 3, 343; Ath. 15, 3; 22, 2) Hb 3:11; 4:3 (both Ps 94:11). ὡς αὐτὸν καθόλου τὸ φῶς μὴ βλέπειν Papias (3:2) (s. φῶς 1a). ὡς πάντας ἄχθεσθαι (s. ἄχθομαι) AcPl Ha 4, 14. ὡς πάντας … ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι 6, 31 al.

⑤ marker of discourse content, that, the fact that after verbs of knowing, saying (even introducing direct discourse: Maximus Tyr. 5:4f), hearing, etc.=ὅτι that (X., An. 1, 3, 5; Menand., Sam. 590 S. [245 Kö.]; Aeneas Tact. 402; 1342; PTebt 10, 6 [119 B.C.]; 1 Km 13:11; EpArist; Philo, Op. M. 9; Jos., Ant. 7, 39; 9, 162; 15, 249 al.; Just., A I, 60, 2; Tat. 39, 2; 41, 1; Ath. 30, 4.—ORiemann, RevPhilol n.s. 6, 1882, 73–75; HKallenberg, RhM n.s. 68, 1913, 465–76; B-D-F §396) ἀναγινώσκειν Mk 12:26 v.l. (for πῶς); Lk 6:4 (w. πῶς as v.l.). μνησθῆναι Lk 24:6 (D ὅσα); cp. 22:61 (=Lat. quomodo, as in ms. c of the Old Itala; cp. Plautus, Poen. 3, 1, 54–56). ἐπίστασθαι (Jos., Ant. 7, 372) Ac 10:28; 20:18b v.l. (for πῶς). εἰδέναι (MAI 37, 1912, 183 [= Kl. T. 110, 81, 10] ἴστε ὡς [131/132 A.D.]) 1 Th 2:11a. μάρτυς ὡς Ro 1:9; Phil 1:8; 1 Th 2:10.—ὡς ὅτι s. ὅτι 5b.

⑥ w. numerals, a degree that approximates a point on a scale of extent, about, approximately, nearly (Hdt., Thu. et al.; PAmh 72, 12; PTebt 381, 4 [VSchuman, ClW 28, ’34/35, 95f: pap]; Jos., Ant. 6, 95; Ruth 1:4; 1 Km 14:2; TestJob 31:2; JosAs 1:6) ὡς δισχίλιοι Mk 5:13. Cp. 8:9; Lk 1:56; 8:42; J 1:39; 4:6; 6:10, 19; 19:14, 39; 21:8; Ac 4:4; 5:7, 36; 13:18, 20; 27:37 v.l. (Hemer, Acts 149 n. 140); Rv 8:1.

⑦ a relatively high point on a scale involving exclamation, how! (X., Cyr. 1, 3, 2 ὦ μῆτερ, ὡς καλός μοι ὁ πάππος! Himerius, Or. 54 [=Or. 15], 1 ὡς ἡδύ μοι τὸ θέατρον=how pleasant … ! Ps 8:2; 72:1; TestJob 7:12) ὡς ὡραῖοι οἱ πόδες τῶν εὐαγγελιζομένων ἀγαθά Ro 10:15 (cp. Is 52:7). Cp. 11:33. ὡς μεγάλη μοι ἡ σήμερον ἡμέρα GJs 19:2.

⑧ temporal conjunction (B-D-F §455, 2; 3; Harnack, SBBerlAk 1908, 392).

ⓐ w. the aor. when, after (Hom., Hdt. et al.; Diod S 14, 80, 1; pap [POxy 1489, 4 al.]; LXX; TestAbr B 3 p. 107, 6 [Stone p. 62]; JosAs 3:2; ParJer 3:1; ApcMos 22; Jos., Bell. 1, 445b; Just., D. 2, 4; 3, 1) ὡς ἐπλήσθησαν αἱ ἡμέραι Lk 1:23. ὡς ἐγεύσατο ὁ ἀρχιτρίκλινος J 2:9.—Lk 1:41, 44; 2:15, 39; 4:25; 5:4; 7:12; 15:25; 19:5; 22:66; 23:26; J 4:1, 40; 6:12, 16; 7:10; 11:6, 20, 29, 32f; 18:6; 19:33; 21:9; Ac 5:24; 10:7, 25; 13:29; 14:5; 16:10, 15; 17:13; 18:5; 19:21; 21:1, 12; 22:25; 27:1, 27; 28:4. AcPl Ha 3, 20.

ⓑ w. pres. or impf. while, when, as long as (Menand., Fgm. 538, 2 K. ὡς ὁδοιπορεῖς; Cyrill. Scyth. [VI A.D.] ed. ESchwartz ’39 p. 143, 1; 207, 22 ὡς ἔτι εἰμί=as long as I live) ὡς ὑπάγεις μετὰ τοῦ ἀντιδίκου σου while you are going with your opponent Lk 12:58. ὡς ἐλάλει ἡμῖν, ὡς διήνοιγεν ἡμῖν τὰς γραφάς while he was talking, while he was opening the scriptures to us 24:32.—J 2:23; 8:7; 12:35f ( as long as; cp. ἕως 2a); Ac 1:10; 7:23; 9:23; 10:17; 13:25; 19:9; 21:27; 25:14; Gal 6:10 ( as long as); 2 Cl 8:1; 9:7; IRo 2:2; ISm 9:1 (all four as long as).—ὡς w. impf., and in the next clause the aor. ind. w. the same subject (Diod S 15, 45, 4 ὡς ἐθεώρουν …, συνεστήσαντο ‘when [or ‘as soon as’] they noticed …, they put together [a fleet]’; SIG 1169, 58 ὡς ἐνεκάθευδε, εἶδε ‘while he was sleeping [or ‘when he went to sleep’] [in the temple] he saw [a dream or vision]’) Mt 28:9 v.l.; J 20:11; Ac 8:36; 16:4; 22:11.— Since (Soph., Oed. R. 115; Thu. 4, 90, 3) ὡς τοῦτο γέγονεν Mk 9:21.

ⓒ ὡς ἄν or ὡς ἐάν w. subjunctive of the time of an event in the future when, as soon as.

α. ὡς ἄν (Hyperid. 2, 43, 4; Herodas 5, 50; Lucian, Cronosolon 11; PHib 59, 1 [c. 245 B.C.] ὡς ἂν λάβῃς; UPZ 71, 18 [152 B.C.]; PTebt 26, 2. Cp. Witkowski 87; Gen 12:12; Josh 2:14; Is 8:21; Da 3:15 Theod.; Ath. 31, 3 [ἐάν Schwartz]) Ro 15:24; 1 Cor 11:34; Phil 2:23.

β. ὡς ἐάν (PFay 111, 16 [95/96 A.D.] ὡς ἐὰν βλέπῃς) 1 Cl 12:5f; Hv 3, 8, 9; 3, 13, 2.

ⓓ w. the superlative ὡς τάχιστα (a bookish usage; s. B-D-F §244, 1; Rob. 669) as quickly as possible Ac 17:15 (s. ταχέως 1c).

⑨ a final particle, expressing intention/purpose, with a view to, in order to

ⓐ w. subjunctive (Hom.+; TestAbr A 4 p. 80, 33 [Stone p. 8]; SibOr 3, 130; Synes., Hymni 3, 44 [NTerzaghi ’39]) ὡς τελειώσω in order that I might finish Ac 20:24 v.l. (s. Mlt. 249).

ⓑ w. inf. (X.; Arrian [very oft.: ABoehner, De Arriani dicendi genere, diss. Erlangen 1885 p. 56]; PGen 28, 12 [II A.D.]; ZPE 8, ’71, 177: letter of M. Ant. 57, cp. 44–46; 3 Macc 1:2; Joseph.; cp. the use of the opt. Just., D. 2, 3) Lk 9:52. ὡς τελειῶσαι Ac 20:24. ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν Hb 7:9 (s. ἔπος).

ⓒ used w. prepositions to indicate the direction intended (Soph., Thu., X. [Kühner-G. I 472 note 1]; Polyb. 1, 29, 1; LRadermacher, Philol 60, 1901, 495f) πορεύεσθαι ὡς ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν Ac 17:14 v.l.—WStählin, Symbolon, ’58, 99–104. S. also ὡσάν, ὡσαύτως, ὡσεί 2, ὥσπερ b, ὡσπερεί, ὥστε 2b. DELG. M-M.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὡς
69 ὄνομα

ὄνομα, ατος, τό (Hom.+).

① proper name of an entity, name

ⓐ gener. τῶν ἀποστόλων τὰ ὀνόματα ἐστιν ταῦτα Mt 10:2; cp. Rv 21:14. τῶν παρθένων τὰ ὀν. Hs 9, 15, 1. τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ πατρός Lk 1:59. ὄν. μοι, sc. ἐστίν, my name is (Od. 9, 366) Mk 5:9b. τί ὄν. σοι; what is your name? vs. 9a; w. copula Lk 8:30.—The expressions ᾧ (ᾗ) ὄν., οὗ τὸ ὄν., καὶ τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ (αὐτῆς), ὄν. αὐτῷ (parenthetic) are almost always without the copula (B-D-F §128, 3; Rob. 395): ᾧ (ᾗ) ὄν. (Sb 7573, 13 [116 A.D.]; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 5 Jac.; Just., A I, 53, 8 ᾧ ὄν. Λώτ) Lk 1:26, 27a; 2:25; 8:41; 24:13, 18 v.l.; Ac 13:6.—οὗ τὸ ὄν. (without a verb as BGU 344, 1) Mk 14:32. Cp. ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα ἐν βίβλῳ ζωῆς Phil 4:3 (ὧν τὰ ὀν. is a formula [Dssm., LO 95=LAE 121]. S. esp. BGU 432 II, 3 ὧν τὰ ὀν. τῷ βιβλιδίῳ δεδήλωται).—καὶ τὸ ὄν. αὐτῆς Lk 1:5b. καὶ τὸ ὄν. τῆς παρθένου Μαριάμ vs. 27b.—ὄν. αὐτῷ (Demosth. 32, 11 Ἀριστοφῶν ὄνομʼ αὐτῷ; Dionys. Hal. 8, 89, 4; Aelian, NA 8, 2 γυνὴ … Ἡρακληὶς ὄν. αὐτῇ; LXX) J 1:6; 3:1. ὁ καθήμενος ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ (i.e. τοῦ ἵππου), ὄν. αὐτῷ (ὁ) θάνατος Rv 6:8; cp. 9:11a.—W. the copula ἦν δὲ ὄν. τῷ δούλῳ Μάλχος J 18:10 (POxy 465, 12 ὁ δὲ κραταιὸς αὐτοῦ, ὄν. αὐτῷ ἐστιν Νεβύ, μηνύει; Jos., Ant. 19, 332). ἄγγελος …, οὗ τὸ ὄν. ἐστιν Θεγρί Hv 4, 2, 4.—The dat. is quite freq. ὀνόματι named, by name (X., Hell. 1, 6, 29 Σάμιος ὀνόματι Ἱππεύς; Tob 6:11 BA; 4 Macc 5:4; Just., D. 85, 6; 115, 3; B-D-F §160; 197; Rob. 487) ἄνθρωπον ὀν. Σίμωνα Mt 27:32; cp. Mk 5:22; Lk 1:5a; 5:27; 10:38; 16:20; 23:50; 24:18; Ac 5:1, 34; 8:9; 9:10–12, 33, 36; 10:1; 11:28; 12:13; 16:1, 14; 17:34; 18:2, 7, 24; 19:24; 20:9; 21:10; 27:1; 28:7; MPol 4. Also the acc. τοὔνομα (on the crasis s. B-D-F §18; Mlt-H. 63; FPreisigke, Griech. Urkunden des ägypt. Mus. zu Kairo [1911] 2, 6 γυνὴ Ταμοῦνις τοὔνομα; Diod S 2, 45, 4 πόλιν τοὔνομα Θ.; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 3; Philo, Leg. All. 1, 68; Jos., Ant. 7, 344, Vi. 382) named, by name (the acc. as X. et al., also 2 Macc 12:13; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 5 Jac. υἱὸν ὄ. Δάν.—B-D-F §160; Rob. 487) Mt 27:57. (Cp. ὄν. gener. as ‘mode of expression’ εἰ καὶ διάφορα ὀνόματα ἐστιν, ἀλλʼ … οἰκείαν … δέχεται τὴν νόησιν although there are various ways of expressing it, it nevertheless has a definite sense Did., Gen. 86, 22 [of various metaphors and images for the soul].)

ⓑ used w. verbs

α. as their obj.: ὄν. ἔχειν Did., Gen. 29, 6 bear the name or as name, be named ὄν. ἔχει Ἀπολλύων Rv 9:11b (in this case the name Ἀ. stands independently in the nom.; B-D-F §143; Rob. 458). καλεῖν τὸ ὄν. τινος w. the name foll. in the acc. (after the Hb.; B-D-F §157, 2; Rob. 459) καλέσεις τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἰησοῦν you are to name him Jesus Mt 1:21; Lk 1:31.—Mt 1:25. καλέσεις τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἰωάννην Lk 1:13. καλέσουσιν τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἐμμανουήλ Mt 1:23 (Is 7:14). διδόναι GJs 6:2. Pass. w. the name in the nom. (cp. GrBar 6:10 Φοῖνιξ καλεῖται τὸ ὄν. μου) ἐκλήθη τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἰησοῦς Lk 2:21; cp. Rv 19:13. Also τὸ ὄν. τοῦ ἀστέρος λέγεται ὁ ῎ Αψινθος Rv 8:11.—ἐπιθεῖναι ὄν. τινι w. acc. of the name Mk 3:16f; cp. 12:8f; κληρονομεῖν ὄν. receive a name Hb 1:4=1 Cl 36:2. κληροῦσθαι τὸ αὐτὸ ὄν. obtain the same name (s. κληρόω 2) MPol 6:2.—τὰ ὀν. ὑμῶν ἐγγέγραπται ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς Lk 10:20.—Rv 13:8; 17:8. ἐξαλείψω τὸ ὄν. αὐτῶν 1 Cl 53:3 (Dt 9:14); Rv 3:5a (perh. to be placed in 4 below); s. ἐξαλείφω.

β. in another way (εἰ δέ τις ὀνόματι καλέσει but if anyone is so named Hippol., Ref. 6, 20, 2): ὸ̔ς καλεῖται τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ who is so named Lk 1:61. ἀνὴρ ὀνόματι καλούμενος Ζακχαῖος a man whose name was Zacchaeus 19:2. καλεῖν τι (i.e. παιδίον) ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί τινος name someone after someone 1:59. Cp. IMg 10:1. This leads to

ⓒ used w. prepositions: ἐξ ὀνόματος (Ctesias, Ind. p. 105 M.: Diod S 13, 15, 1; 37, 15, 2; Appian, Mithrid. 59, §243, Bell. Civ. 3, 21 §77; 4, 73 §310; PGM 4, 2973; Jos., Ant. 2, 275) by name, individually, one by one (so that no one is lost in the crowd) ἐξ ὀν. πάντας ζήτει IPol 4:2. ἀσπάζομαι πάντας ἐξ ὀνόματος 8:2. πάντες ἐξ ὀν. συνέρχεσθε (parallel to κατʼ ἄνδρα) IEph 20:2.—κατʼ ὄν. by name, individually (Diod S 16, 44, 2; Gen 25:13; EpArist 247; Jos., Bell. 7, 14) J 10:3 (New Docs 3, 77f; animals called individually by name: Ps.-Aristot., Mirabil. 118.—HAlmqvist, Plut. u. das NT ’46, 74). Esp. in greetings (BGU 27, 18 [II A.D.] ἀσπάζομαι πάντας τοὺς φιλοῦντάς σε κατʼ ὄν.; POxy 1070, 46; pap in Dssm., LO 160/1, ln. 14f [LAE 193, ln. 15, note 21]; New Docs 3, 77f) 3J 15; ISm 13:2b. ῥάβδους ἐπιγεγραμμένας ἑκάστης φυλῆς κατʼ ὄν. staffs, each one inscribed with the name of a tribe 1 Cl 43:2b.

ⓓ used in combination with God and Jesus. On the significance of the Divine Name in history of religions s. FGiesebrecht, Die atl. Schätzung des Gottesnamens 1901; Bousset, Rel.³ 309ff; ADieterich, Eine Mithrasliturgie 1903, 110ff; FConybeare, JQR 8, 1896; 9, 1897, esp. 9, 581ff; JBoehmer, Das bibl. ‘im Namen’ 1898, BFCT V 6, 1901, 49ff, Studierstube 2, 1904, 324ff; 388ff; 452ff; 516ff; 580ff; BJacob, Im Namen Gottes 1903;WHeitmüller, ‘Im Namen Jesu’ 1903; WBrandt, TT 25, 1891, 565ff; 26, 1892, 193ff; 38, 1904, 355ff; RHirzel, Der Name: ASG 36, 2, 1918; Schürer III⁴ 409–11; HObbink, De magische betekenis van den naam inzonderheid in het oude Egypte 1925; OGrether, Name u. Wort Gottes im AT ’34; HHuffman, Name: 1148–52.—The belief in the efficacy of the name is extremely old; its origin goes back to the most ancient times and the most primitive forms of intellectual and religious life. It has exhibited an extraordinary vitality. The period of our lit. also sees—within as well as without the new community of believers—in the name someth. real, a piece of the very nature of the personality whom it designates, expressing the person’s qualities and powers. Accordingly, names, esp. holy names, are revered and used in customary practices and ritual (σέβεσθαι θεῶν ὀνόματα Theoph. Ant., 1, 9 [p. 76, 7]), including magic. In Israelite tradition the greatest reverence was paid to the holy name of God and to its numerous paraphrases or substitutes; the names of angels and patriarchs occupied a secondary place. The syncretistic practices of the period revered the names of gods, daemons, and heroes, or even magic words that made no sense at all, but had a mysterious sound. The Judeo-Christians revere and use the name of God and, of course, the name of Jesus. On magic in Jewish circles, s. Schürer III 342–79; for the NT period in general s. MSmith, Clement of Alexandria and a Secret Gospel of Mark ’73, 195–230.—The names of God and Jesus

α. in combination w. attributes: διαφορώτερον ὄν. a more excellent name Hb 1:4=1 Cl 36:2 (διάφορος 2). ἅγιον τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Lk 1:49 (cp. Ps 110:9; Lev 18:21; 22:2; PGM 3, 570; 627; 4, 1005; 3071; 5, 77; 13, 561 μέγα κ. ἅγιον). τὸ μεγαλοπρεπὲς καὶ ἅγιον ὄν. αὐτοῦ 1 Cl 64; τὸ μέγα καὶ ἔνδοξον ὄν. Hv 4, 1, 3; 4, 2, 4 (on ἔνδοξον ὄν., cp. EPeterson, Εἷ θεός 1926, 282.—ὄν. μέγα κ. ἅγ. κ. ἔνδ.: PGM 13, 183f; 504f). τὸ μέγα καὶ θαυμαστὸν καὶ ἔνδοξον ὄν. Hs 9, 18, 5; τὸ πανάγιον καὶ ἔνδοξον ὄν. 1 Cl 58:1a; τοῦ παντοκράτορος καὶ ἐνδόξου ὄν. Hv 3, 3, 5; τὸ πανάρετον ὄν. 1 Cl 45:7; τῷ παντοκράτορι καὶ ἐνδόξῳ ὀνόματι 60:4; τὸ ὁσιώτατον τῆς μεγαλωσύνης αὐτοῦ ὄν. 58:1b. τὸ ὄν. μου θαυμαστὸν ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσι D 14:3 (cp. Mal 1:14). The words ὄν. θεοπρεπέστατον IMg 1:2 are difficult to interpret (s. Hdb. ad loc.; θεοπρεπής b).

β. in combination w. verbs: ἁγιάζειν τὸ ὄν. Mt 6:9 (AFridrichsen, Helligt vorde dit naun: DTT 8, 1917, 1–16). Lk 11:2; D 8:2 (ἁγιάζω 3). βλασφημεῖν (q.v. bγ) τὸ ὄν. Rv 13:6; 16:9; pass. βλασφημεῖται τὸ ὄν. (Is 52:5) Ro 2:24; 2 Cl 13:1f, 4; ITr 8:2. βλασφημίας ἐπιφέρεσθαι τῷ ὀν. κυρίου bring blasphemy upon the name of the Lord 1 Cl 47:7. πφοσέθηκαν κατὰ ὄν. τοῦ κυρίου βλασφημίαν Hs 6, 2, 3; βεβηλοῦν τὸ ὄν. 8, 6, 2 (s. βεβηλόω). ἀπαγγελῶ τὸ ὄν. τ. ἀδελφοῖς μου Hb 2:12 (cp. Ps 21:23). ὅπως διαγγελῇ τὸ ὄν. μου ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ Ro 9:17 (Ex 9:16). δοξάζειν τὸ ὄν. (σου, τοῦ κυρίου, τοῦ θεοῦ etc.) Rv 15:4; 1 Cl 43:6; IPhld 10:1; Hv 2, 1, 2; 3, 4, 3; 4, 1, 3; Hs 9, 18, 5 (s. δοξάζω 1; cp. GJs 7:2; 12:1[w. ref. to name of Mary]). ὅπως ἐνδοξασθῇ τὸ ὄν. τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ 2 Th 1:12. ἐλπίζειν τῷ ὀν. Mt 12:21 (vv.ll. ἐν or ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν.; the pass. on which it is based, Is 42:4, has ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν.). ἐπικαλεῖσθαι τὸ ὄν. κυρίου (as PsSol 6:1) or αὐτοῦ, σου etc. (w. ref. to God or Christ) call on the name of the Lord Ac 2:21 (Jo 3:5); 9:14, 21; 22:16; Ro 10:13 (Jo 3:5); 1 Cor 1:2. ψυχὴ ἐπικεκλημένη τὸ μεγαλοπρεπὲς καὶ ἅγιον ὄν. αὐτοῦ a person who calls upon his exalted and holy name 1 Cl 64.—Pass. πάντα τὰ ἔθνη ἐφʼ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄν. μου ἐπʼ αὐτούς Ac 15:17 (Am 9:12). τὸ καλὸν ὄν. τὸ ἐπικληθὲν ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς Js 2:7 (on καλὸν ὄν. cp. Sb 343, 9 and the Pompeian graffito in Dssm., LO 237 [LAE 276]). πάντες οἱ ἐπικαλούμενοι τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ all those who are called by (the Lord’s) name Hs 9, 14, 3; cp. οἱ κεκλημένοι τῷ ὀν. κυρίου those who are called by the name of the Lord 8, 1, 1. ἐπαισχύνεσθαι τὸ ὄν. κυρίου τὸ ἐπικληθὲν ἐπʼ αὐτούς be ashamed of the name that is named over them 8, 6, 4. ὁμολογεῖν τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ praise his name Hb 13:15 (cp. PsSol 15:2 ἐξομολογήσασθαι τῷ ὀνόματι σου). ὀνομάζειν τὸ ὄν. κυρίου 2 Ti 2:19 (Is 26:13). ψάλλειν τῷ ὀν. σου Ro 15:9 (Ps 17:50). οὐ μὴ λάβῃς ἐπὶ ματαίῳ τὸ ὄν. κυρίου 19:5 (Ex 20:7; Dt 5:11).—Although in the preceding examples the name is oft. practically inseparable fr. the being that bears it, this is perh. even more true of the foll. cases, in which the name appears almost as the representation of the Godhead, as a tangible manifestation of the divine nature (Quint. Smyrn. 9, 465 Polidarius, when healing, calls on οὔνομα πατρὸς ἑοῖο ‘the name of his father’ [Asclepius]; τοσοῦτον … δύναται τὸ ὄ. τοῦ Ἰησοῦ κατὰ τῶν δαιμόνων Orig., C. Cels. 1, 56, 11; Dt 18:7; 3 Km 8:16; Ps 68:37; Zech 13:2 ἐξολεθρεύσω τὰ ὀν. τῶν εἰδώλων; Zeph 1:4; PsSol 7:6; Just., D. 121, 3 ὑποτάσσεσθαι αὐτοῦ ὀν.): the ‘name’ of God is ἀρχέγονον πάσης κτίσεως 1 Cl 59:3. Sim. τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ μέγα ἐστὶ καὶ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον βαστάζει Hs 9, 14, 5. λατρεύειν τῷ παναρέτῳ ὀν. αὐτοῦ worship the most excellent name (of the Most High) 1 Cl 45:7. ὑπακούειν τῷ παναγίῳ καὶ ἐνδόξῳ ὀν. αὐτοῦ be obedient to his most holy and glorious name 58:1a. ὑπήκοον γενέσθαι τῷ παντοκρατορικῷ καὶ παναρέτῳ ὀν. 60:4. κηρύσσειν τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ Hs 9, 16, 5. ἐπιγινώσκειν τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ 9, 16, 7. φοβεῖσθαι τὸ ὄν. σου Rv 11:18. φανεροῦν τινι τὸ ὄν. σου J 17:6. γνωρίζειν τινὶ τὸ ὄν. σου vs. 26. πιστεύειν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ believe in the name of (God’s) son 1J 3:23. Also πιστεύειν εἰς τὸ ὄν. (s. γב below and s. πιστεύω 2aβ).—Of the name borne by followers of Jesus Christ (cp. Theoph. Ant. 1, 1 [p. 58, 13]): κρατεῖς τὸ ὄν. μου you cling to my name Rv 2:13. The same mng. also holds for the expressions: λαμβάνειν τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ Hs 9, 12, 4; 8; 9, 13, 2a; 7. τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄν. μου ἐνώπιον ἐθνῶν to bear my name before (the) Gentiles Ac 9:15. τὸ ὄν. ἡδέως βαστάζειν bear the name gladly Hs 8, 10, 3; cp. 9, 28, 5b. τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ φορεῖν 9, 13, 3; 9, 14, 5f; 9, 15, 2; cp. 9, 13, 2b. Christians receive this name at their baptism: πρὶν φορέσαι τὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ νεκρός ἐστιν before a person bears the name of God’s Son (which is given the candidate at baptism), he is dead 9, 16, 3. Of dissemblers and false teachers ὄν. μὲν ἔχουσιν, ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς πίστεως κενοί εἰσιν they have the (Christian) name, but are devoid of faith 9, 19, 2. Of Christians in appearance only ἐν ὑποκρίσει φέροντες τὸ ὄν. τοῦ κυρίου who bear the Lord’s name in pretense Pol 6:3. δόλῳ πονηρῷ τὸ ὄν. περιφέρειν carry the name about in wicked deceit (evidently of wandering preachers) IEph 7:1. τὸ ὄν. ἐπαισχύνονται τοῦ κυρίου αὐτῶν they are ashamed of their Lord’s name Hs 9, 21, 3. More fully: ἐπαισχύνονται τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ φορεῖν 9, 14, 6.

γ. used w. prepositions

א. w. διά and the gen. διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου πιστεύειν PtK 3 p. 15 ln. 12; σωθῆναι διὰ τοῦ μεγάλου καὶ ἐνδόξου ὀν. be saved through the great and glorious name Hv 4, 2, 4. εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν διὰ τοῦ ὀν. τοῦ υἱοῦ (τοῦ θεοῦ) Hs 9, 12, 5. ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν λαβεῖν διὰ τοῦ ὀν. αὐτοῦ Ac 10:43 (cp. Just., D. 11, 4 al.). σημεῖα … γίνεσθαι διὰ τοῦ ὀν. … Ἰησοῦ by the power of the name 4:30. Differently παρακαλεῖν τινα διὰ τοῦ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου appeal to someone by the name (= while calling on the name) of the Lord 1 Cor 1:10.—W. διά and the acc. μισούμενοι … διὰ τὸ ὄν. μου hated on account of my name (i.e., because you bear it) Mt 10:22; 24:9; Mk 13:13; Lk 21:17 (Just., A I, 4, 2 al.). ποιεῖν τι εἴς τινα διὰ τὸ ὄν. μου J 15:21. ἀφέωνται ὑμῖν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι διὰ τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ your sins are forgiven on account of (Jesus’) name 1J 2:12. βαστάζειν διὰ τὸ ὄν. μου bear (hardship) for my name’s sake Rv 2:3 (s. βαστάζω 2bβ). πάσχειν διὰ τὸ ὄν. (also w. a gen. like αὐτοῦ) Pol 8:2; Hv 3, 2, 1b; Hs 9, 28, 3.

ב. w. εἰς: somet. evidently as rendering of rabb. לְשֵׁם with regard to, in thinking of δέχεσθαί τινα εἰς ὄν. Ἰ. Χρ. receive someone in deference to Jesus Christ IRo 9:3. δύο ἢ τρεῖς συνηγμένοι εἰς τὸ ἐμὸν ὄν. two or three gathered and thinking of me, i.e., so that I am the reason for their assembling Mt 18:20; but here the other mng. (s. ג below) has had some influence: ‘while naming’ or ‘calling on my name’. τῆς ἀγάπης ἧς ἐνεδείξασθε εἰς τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ (i.e. θεοῦ) Hb 6:10 is either the love that you have shown with regard to him, i.e. for his sake, or we have here the frequently attested formula of Hellenistic legal and commercial language (s. Mayser II/2 p. 415; Dssm. B 143ff, NB 25, LO 97f [BS 146f; 197; LAE 121]; Heitmüller, op. cit. 100ff; FPreisigke, Girowesen im griech. Ägypt. 1910, 149ff. On the LXX s. Heitmüller 110f; JPsichari, Essai sur le Grec de la Septante 1908, 202f): εἰς (τὸ) ὄν. τινος to the name=to the account (over which the name stands). Then the deeds of love, although shown to humans, are dedicated to God.—The concept of dedication is also highly significant, in all probability, for the understanding of the expr. βαπτίζειν εἰς (τὸ) ὄν. τινος. Through baptism εἰς (τὸ) ὄν. τ. those who are baptized become the possession of and come under the dedicated protection of the one whose name they bear. An additional factor, to a degree, may be the sense of εἰς τὸ ὄν.=‘with mention of the name’ (cp. Herodian 2, 2, 10; 2, 13, 2 ὀμνύναι εἰς τὸ ὄν. τινος; Cyranides p. 57, 1 εἰς ὄν. τινος; 60, 18=εἰς τὸ ὄν. τ.; 62, 13. Another ex. in Heitmüller 107): Mt 28:19; Ac 8:16; 19:5; D 7:1, (3); 9:5; Hv 3, 7, 3; cp. 1 Cor 1:13, 15. S. βαπτίζω 2c and Silva New, Beginn. I/5, ’33, 121–40.—πιστεύειν εἰς τὸ ὄν. τινος believe in the name of someone i.e. have confidence that the person’s name (rather in the sense of a title, cp. Phil 2:9) is rightfully borne and encodes what the person really is J 1:12; 2:23; 3:18; 1J 5:13.

ג. with ἐν: ἐν ὀνόματι of God or Jesus means in the great majority of cases with mention of the name, while naming or calling on the name (PsSol 11:8; JosAs 9:1; Just., D. 35, 2 al.; no corresponding use has been found in gener. Gk. lit.; but cp. ἐν ὀν. τοῦ μεγάλου καὶ ὑψίστου θεοῦ Hippol., Ref. 9, 15, 6.—Heitmüller p. 13ff, esp. 44; 49). In many pass. it seems to be a formula. ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια Mk 9:38; 16:17; Lk 9:49. τὰ δαιμόνια ὑποτάσσεται ἡμῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. σου the demons are subject to us at the mention of your name 10:17. ποιεῖν τι ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ac 4:7; cp. Col 3:17. Perh. J 10:25 (but s. below). ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ … οὗτος παρέστηκεν ὑγιής Ac 4:10. ὄν. … ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς vs. 12. παραγγέλλω σοι ἐν ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. 16:18; cp. 2 Th 3:6; IPol 5:1. σοὶ λέγω ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου Ac 14:10 D. Peter, in performing a healing, says ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ Χρ. περιπάτει 3:6 (s. Heitmüller 60). The elders are to anoint the sick w. oil ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου while calling on the name of the Lord Js 5:14.—Of prophets λαλεῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. κυρίου 5:10. παρρησιάζεσθαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ speak out boldly in proclaiming the name of Jesus Ac 9:27f. βαπτίζεσθαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰ. Χ. be baptized or have oneself baptized while naming the name of Jesus Christ Ac 2:38 v.l.; 10:48. At a baptism ἐν ὀν. χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ AcPl Ha 3, 32. αἰτεῖν τὸν πατέρα ἐν τῷ ὀν. μου (=Ἰησοῦ) ask the Father, using my name J 15:16; cp. 14:13, 14; 16:24, 26. W. the latter pass. belongs vs. 23 (ὁ πατὴρ) δώσει ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. μου (the Father) will give you, when you mention my name. τὸ πνεῦμα ὸ̔ πέμψει ὁ πατὴρ ἐν τῷ ὀν. μου the Spirit, whom the Father will send when my name is used 14:26. To thank God ἐν ὀν. Ἰησοῦ Χρ. while naming the name of Jesus Christ Eph 5:20. ἵνα ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ πᾶν γόνυ κάμψῃ that when the name of Jesus is mentioned every knee should bow Phil 2:10. χαίρετε, υἱοί, ἐν ὀν. κυρίου greetings, my sons, as we call on the Lord’s name 1:1. ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀν. κυρίου whoever comes, naming the Lord’s name (in order thereby to give evidence of being a Christian) D 12:1. ἀσπάζεσθαι ἐν ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. greet, while naming the name of J. Chr. w. acc. of pers. or thing greeted IRo ins; ISm 12:2. Receive a congregation ἐν ὀν. θεοῦ IEph 1:3. συναχθῆναι ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. meet and call on the name of the Lord Jesus=as a Christian congregation 1 Cor 5:4. μόνον ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. only (it is to be) while calling on the name of J. Chr. ISm 4:2.—Not far removed fr. these are the places where we render ἐν τῷ ὀν. with through or by the name (s. ἐν 4c); the effect brought about by the name is caused by its utterance ἀπελούσασθε, ἡγιάσθητε, ἐδικαιώθητε ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. Χρ. 1 Cor 6:11. ζωὴν ἔχειν ἐν τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ (=Ἰησοῦ) J 20:31. τηρεῖν τινα ἐν τῷ ὀν. (θεοῦ) 17:11f.—ἐν τῷ ὀν. at the command (of), commissioned by ἔργα ποιεῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ πατρός J 10:25 (but s. above). ἔρχεσθαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ πατρός 5:43a; in contrast ἔρχ. ἐν τῷ ὀν. τῷ ἰδίῳ vs. 43b. εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀν. κυρίου 12:13 (Ps 117:26). The Ps-passage prob. has the same sense (despite Heitmüller 53f) in Mt 21:9; 23:39; Mk 11:9; Lk 13:35; 19:38.—OMerlier, Ὄνομα et ἐν ὀνόματι dans le quatr. Év.: RevÉtGr 47, ’34, 180–204; RBratcher, BT 14, ’63, 72–80.

ד. w. ἕνεκα (and the other forms of this word; s. ἕνεκα 1): of persecutions for one’s Christian faith ἀπάγεσθαι ἐπὶ βασιλεῖς ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀν. μου Lk 21:12. πάσχειν or ὑποφέρειν εἵνεκα τοῦ ὀνόματος Hv 3, 1, 9; 3, 2, 1; Hs 9, 28, 5. ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀν. (τοῦ) κυρίου v 3, 5, 2; Hs 9, 28, 6. ἀφιέναι οἰκίας … ἕνεκεν τοῦ ἐμοῦ ὀν. for my name’s sake Mt 19:29. ἔκτισας τὰ πάντα ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀν. σου you created all things for your name’s sake, i.e. that God’s name might be praised for the benefits which the works of creation bring to humankind D 10:3.

ה. w. ἐπί and the dat.: ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. τινος when someone’s name is mentioned or called upon, or mentioning someone’s name (LXX; En 10:2; Just., D. 39, 6; Ath. 23, 1; s. Heitmüller 19ff; 43ff; s. also 47ff; 52ff; 87ff) in the NT only of the name of Jesus, and only in the synoptics and Ac. ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου they will come using my name Mt 24:5; Mk 13:6; Lk 21:8. κηρύσσειν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ μετάνοιαν 24:47. λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. τούτῳ to speak using this name Ac 4:17; 5:40. διδάσκειν 4:18; 5:28. ποιεῖν δύναμιν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου Mk 9:39. ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. σου ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια Lk 9:49 v.l. ἐπὶ τῷ σῷ ὀν. τὰς θεραπείας ἐπετέλουν GJs 20:2 (codd.). Of the (spiritual) temple of God: οἰκοδομηθήσεται ναὸς θεοῦ ἐνδόξως ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. κυρίου the temple of God will be gloriously built with the use of the Lord’s name 16:6f, 8 (quot. of uncertain orig.). βαπτίζεσθαι ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. Ac 2:38. Baptism is also referred to in καλεῖσθαι ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ receive a name when the name of God’s son is named Hs 9, 17, 4. The words δέχεσθαι (παιδίον) ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου can also be classed here receive (a child) when my name is confessed, when I am called upon Mt 18:5; Mk 9:37; Lk 9:48 (s. Heitmüller 64); but s. also 3 below.—ἐπί w. acc.: πεποιθέναι ἐπὶ τὸ ὁσιώτατον τῆς μεγαλωσύνης αὐτοῦ ὄν. have confidence in (the Lord’s) most sacred and majestic name 1 Cl 58:1b; ἐλπίζειν ἐπὶ τὸ ὄν. hope in the name (of the Lord) 16:8b.

ו. w. περί and the gen.: εὐαγγελίζεσθαι περὶ τοῦ ὀν. Ἰ. Χ. bring the good news about the name of J. Chr. Ac 8:12.—(W. acc.: ἔχομεν δέος τὸ ὄ. τοῦ θεοῦ Orig., C. Cels. 4, 48, 34).

ז. w. πρός and acc.: πρὸς τὸ ὄν. Ἰησοῦ … πολλὰ ἐναντία πρᾶξαι do many things in opposing the name of Jesus Ac 26:9.

ח. w. ὑπέρ and gen.: ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀν. (Ἰησοῦ) ἀτιμασθῆναι Ac 5:41. πάσχειν 9:16; Hs 9, 28, 2. Cp. Ac 15:26; 21:13. The activity of the apostles takes place ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀν. αὐτοῦ to the honor of (Jesus’) name Ro 1:5. Cp. 3J 7. Of thankful praying at the Lord’s Supper εὐχαριστοῦμεν σοι … ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἁγίου ὀν. σου, οὗ κατεσκήνωσας ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν we thank you … for your holy name, which you caused to dwell in our hearts D 10:2.

δ. ὄν. w. ref. to God or Christ not infreq. stands quite alone, simply the Name: Ac 5:41; Phil 2:9 (cp. Diod S 3, 61, 6); 3J 7; 2 Cl 13:1, 4; IEph 3:1; 7:1; IPhld 10:1; Hv 3, 2, 1; Hs 8, 10, 3; 9, 13, 2; 9, 28, 3; 5.

② a person (Phalaris, Ep. 128; POxy 1188, 8 [13 A.D.]; BGU 113, 11; Jos., Ant. 14, 22; other exx. in Dssm., NB 24f [BS 196f]; LXX) τὸ ποθητόν μοι ὄν. my dear friend: Alce ISm 13:2; IPol 8:3; Crocus IRo 10:1. Pl. (PThéad 41, 10; PSI 27, 22; Num 1:18 al.) people Ac 1:15; Rv 3:4. ὀνόματα ἀνθρώπων 11:13 (cp. Ael. Aristid. 50, 72 K.=26 p. 523 D.: ὀνόματα δέκα ἀνδρῶν). This is prob. the place for περὶ λόγου καὶ ὀνομάτων καὶ νόμου about teaching and persons and (the) law Ac 18:15.

③ the classification under which one belongs, noted by a name or category, title, category (cp. Cass. Dio 38, 44; 42, 24 καὶ ὅτι πολλῷ πλείω ἔν τε τῷ σχήματι καὶ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τῷ τῆς στρατηγίας ὢν καταπράξειν ἤλπιζε=he hoped to effect much more by taking advantage of his praetorial apparel and title; ins: Sb 7541, 5 [II A.D.] Νύμφη ὄνομʼ ἐστί σοι; POxy 37 I, 17 [49 A.D.] βούλεται ὀνόματι ἐλευθέρου τὸ σωμάτιον ἀπενέγκασθαι=she claims to have carried off the infant on the basis of its being free-born; Jos., Ant. 12, 154 φερνῆς ὀνόματι; 11, 40; Just., A II, 6, 4 καὶ ἀνθρώπου καὶ σωτῆρος ὄνομα. Other exx. in Heitmüller 50); the possibility of understanding ὄν. as category made it easier for Greeks to take over rabb. לְשֵׁם (s. 1dγב above) in the sense with regard to a particular characteristic, then simply with regard to, for the sake of ὁ δεχόμενος προφήτην εἰς ὄν. προφήτου whoever receives a prophet within the category ‘prophet’, i.e. because he is a prophet, as a prophet Mt 10:41a; cp. vss. 41b, 42.—ὸ̔ς ἂν ποτίσῃ ὑμᾶς ἐν ὀνόματι, ὄτι Χριστοῦ ἐστε whoever gives you a drink under the category that you belong to Christ, i.e. in your capacity as a follower of Christ Mk 9:41. εἰ ὀνειδίζεσθε ἐν ὀν. Χριστοῦ if you are reviled for the sake of Christ 1 Pt 4:14. δοξαζέτω τὸν θεὸν ἐν τῷ ὀν. τούτῳ let the person praise God in this capacity (=ὡς Χριστιανός) vs. 16. δέδεμαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. I am imprisoned for the sake of the Name IEph 3:1.—δέχεσθαι (παιδίον) ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου for my (name’s) sake Mt 18:5; Mk 9:37; Lk 9:48 (cp. Heitmüller 113. But s. 1dγה above).

④ recognition accorded a person on the basis of performance, (well-known) name, reputation, fame (Hom. et al.; 1 Ch 14:17; 1 Macc 8:12) φανερὸν ἐγένετο τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ his fame was widespread Mk 6:14. ὄν. ἔχειν (Pla., Apol. 38c, Ep. 2, 312c) w. ὅτι foll. have the reputation of Rv 3:1 perh. also 3:5 (s. 1bα; JFuller, JETS 26, ’83, 297–306).

⑤ name in terms of office held, office (POxy 58, 6) στασιαζουσῶν τ. φυλῶν, ὁποία αὐτῶν εἴη τῷ ἐνδόξῳ ὀνόματι κεκοσμημένη when the tribes were quarreling as to which one of them was to be adorned with that glorious office 1 Cl 43:2. τὸ ὄν. τῆς ἐπισκοπῆς the office of supervision 44:1.—B. 1263f. OEANE IV 91–96 on Mesopotamian practices. Schmidt, Syn. I 113–24. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὄνομα
70 εἰ

1
εἰ (Hom.+)

① marker of a condition, existing in fact or hypothetical, if (B-D-F §371f, neg. §428, 1; 2; Rob., indexes; JBoyer, Grace Theological Journal 2, ’81, 75–141, marker of a ‘simple, logical connection between protasis and apodosis’).

ⓐ w. the indic.

α. in all tenses, to express a condition thought of as real or to denote assumptions relating to what has already happened εἰ υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ θεοῦ if you really are the Son of God Mt 4:3; sim. 5:29f; 6:23; 8:31; Ac 5:39. εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος ἐπονομάζῃ if you call yourself a Judean Ro 2:17. εἰ κατακαυχᾶσαι, οὐ σὺ βαστάζεις if you do boast, (remember) you do not support 11:18 al. In Paul the verb is freq. missing, and is to be supplied fr. the context: εἰ Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν (sc. ἐστιν), τὸ μὲν σῶμα νεκρόν (sc. ἐστιν) 8:10. εἰ τέκνα (sc. ἐστέ) if you are children, then … vs. 17, εἰ χάριτι (γέγονεν), οὐκέτι ἐξ ἔργων 11:6 al. The negative in clauses where the reality of the condition is taken for granted is οὐ (earlier Gk. μή [for exception s. Goodwin p. 138f]; s. B-D-F §428, 1): εἰ οὐ δύναται τοῦτο παρελθεῖν Mt 26:42. εἰ δὲ ὑμεῖς οὐκ ἀφίετε Mk 11:25 [26] v.l. εἰ πιστοὶ οὐκ ἐγένεσθε Lk 16:11f; εἰ οὐκ ἀκούουσιν vs. 31. εἰ οὐ φοβοῦμαι Lk 18:4; cp. J 5:47; 10:37; Ro 8:9; 11:21; 1 Cor 7:9; 9:2; 11:6; 15:13ff, 29, 32; 16:22 al. εἰ is rarely found w. the future εἰ πάντες σκανδαλισθήσονται Mt 26:33; Mk 14:29; εἰ ἀρνησόμεθα 2 Ti 2:12 (cp. Just., A I, 31, 6 εἰ μὴ ἀρνοῖντο Ἰησοῦν); εἰ ὑπομενεῖτε 1 Pt 2:20; εἰ καὶ οὐ δώσει (class. ἐὰν καὶ μὴ δῷ B-D-F §372, 3; Rob. 1012) Lk 11:8. W. aor., when events are regarded as having taken place Mt 24:22; Mk 3:26; 13:20.

β. w. the pres., impf., aor., or plpf. indic. to express an unreal (contrary to fact) condition (B-D-F §360; 372; Rob. 1012ff). ἄν is usu. found in the apodosis (regularly in class.) εἰ ἐν Τύρῳ καὶ Σίδωνι ἐγένοντο αἱ δυνάμεις, πάλαι ἂν μετενόησαν if the wonders had been done in T. and S., they would have repented long ago Mt 11:21. εἰ ἤμεθα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν if we had lived in the days of our fathers 23:30. εἰ ᾔδει ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης if the master of the house had known 24:43 (cp. Just., A I, 12, 2 εἰ … ταῦτα ἐγίνωσκον; 18, 1 al.) εἰ ἦν προφήτης, ἐγίνωσκεν ἄν if he were a prophet, he would know Lk 7:39 al. The pres. indic. εἰ ἔχετε (v.l. εἴχετε) πίστιν … ἐλέγετε ἄν if you had faith … you would say Lk 17:6. Somet. ἄν is lacking in the apodosis (Polyaenus 2, 3, 5 εἰ ἐπεποιήκειμεν … νῦν ἐχρῆν=if we had done … it would have been necessary; Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 16, 18 [II B.C.]; PRein I, 7 [II B.C.]; POxy 526, 10; 530, 8 and 17; Just., A I, 10, 6; 11:2 al.—PMelcher, De sermone Epict., diss. Halle 1905, 75; Mlt. 200f) εἰ μὴ ἦν οὗτος παρὰ θεοῦ, οὐκ ἠδύνατο if this man were not from God, he would not have been able to … J 9:33. εἰ μὴ ἦλθον, ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν if I had not come, they would not have sin 15:22; cp. vs. 24. W. the apodosis placed first Mk 9:42 (v.l. περιέκειτο), Lk 17:2; J 19:11.

ⓑ εἰ w. subj., as καὶ εἴ τις θελήσῃ Rv 11:5 (s. 7 below), is unusual, perh. a textual error; B-D-F §372, 3 conjectures κἄν for καὶ εἰ. But εἰ w. subj. is found in the older poets and Hdt. (Kühner-G. II 474), in Aristoph., Equ. 698 et al., in var. dialects (EHermann, Griech. Forschungen I 1912, 277f) and in later times (e.g. Epict., Vett. Val., Lucian [ed. CJacobitz, Index graec. 473a]; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. p. 84, 28; 197, 9; ins [Rdm.² 199]; PRyl 234, 12; POxy 496, 11; Dt 8:5); B-D-F §372, 3; Mlt. 187; Reinhold 107; OSchulthess, AKaegi Festschr. 1919, 161f.

ⓒ εἰ w. the optative is rare: εἰ καὶ πάσχοιτε … μακάριοι even if you should suffer, … you would be blessed 1 Pt 3:14. εἰ θέλοι (v.l. θέλει) τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ if it should be God’s will vs. 17. εἴ τι ἔχοιεν (sc. κατηγορεῖν; cp. Just., A I, 3, 1 εἰ … μηδὲν ἔχοι τις ἐλέγχειν) πρὸς ἐμέ if they should have any charges to bring against me Ac 24:19. εἰ δυνατὸν εἴη (Jos., Ant. 12, 12) if it should be possible 20:16 (but s. B-D-F §385, 2; Just., A II, 15, 2 εἰ δύναιντο). εἰ τύχοι is used as a formula (oft. in later wr., incl. Philo; s. KReik, D. Opt. bei Polyb. u. Philo 1907, 154; Just., A I, 27, 3) it may be, for example, perhaps 1 Cor 15:37; used to tone down an assertion which may be too bold 14:10 (Lucian, Icar. 6 καὶ πολλάκις, εἰ τύχοι, μηδὲ ὁπόσοι στάδιοι Μεγαρόθεν Ἀθήναζέ εἰσιν, ἀκριβῶς ἐπιστάμενοι ‘and many times, so it appears, not even knowing how many stades it is from Megara to Athens’).

② marker of an indirect question as content, that (Kühner-G. II 369, 8; Rob. 965. Cp. Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 67 §283 ἀγανακτέω εἰ=be exasperated that; Sir 23:14 θελήσεις εἰ μὴ ἐγεννήθης; 2 Macc 14:28; 4 Macc 2:1; 4:7. S. on θαυμάζω 1aγ) ἐθαύμασεν εἰ ἤδη τέθνηκεν he was surprised that he was already dead Mk 15:44a. μὴ θαυμάζετε εἰ μισεῖ ὑμᾶς ὁ κόσμος do not wonder that the world hates you 1J 3:13; θαυμαζόντων …, εἰ τοσαύτη σπουδὴ ἦν τοῦ συλληφθῆναι that there was such interest in arresting MPol 7:2; AcPlCor 2:2 (cp. Just., A II, 8, 3 οὐδὲν … θαυμαστόν, εἰ). Sim. also (Procop. Soph., Ep. 123 χάριν ἔχειν εἰ=that) μαρτυρόμενος … εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός testifying … that the Christ was to suffer (s. πάσχω 3aα) Ac 26:23.—οὐ μέγα εἰ it is not surprising that 2 Cor 11:15 (cp. Aeschin., In Ctes. 94 ἐστὶ δεινὸν εἰ; Diod S 23, 15, 5, παράδοξον … εἰ=incredible … that; ibid. θαυμαστὸν εἰ; Gen 45:28 μέγα μοί ἐστιν εἰ).— That is also poss. after verbs of knowing or not knowing, e.g. J 9:25; Ac 19:2b; 1 Cor 1:16; 7:16; so CBurchard, ZNW 52, ’61, 73–82 but s. 5bα.

③ marker in causal clauses, when an actual case is taken as a supposition, where we also can use if instead of since: εἰ τὸν χόρτον … ὁ θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέννυσιν if God so clothes the grass Mt 6:30; Lk 12:28; cp. Mt 7:11; Lk 11:13; J 7:23; 10:35; 13:14, 17, 32; Ac 4:9; 11:17; Ro 6:8; 15:27; Col 2:20; Hb 7:15; 1 Pt 1:17; 1J 4:11.

④ marker of strong or solemn assertion, without apodosis (=in aposiopesis; B-D-F §482; Rob. 1203) εἰ ἔγνως if you only knew Lk 19:42. εἰ βούλει παρενέγκαι if you would only let (this) pass 22:42 v.l. (cp. the letter fr. IV B.C. in Dssm., LO 120, note 5 [LAE 149]).—Hebraistic in oaths, like אִם: may this or that happen to me, if … (cp. 2 Km 3:25; GBuchanan, HTR 58, ’65, 319–24); this amounts to a strong negation certainly not (cp. Ps 7:4f; Gen 14:23) ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν εἰ δοθήσεται truly, I tell you, it will not be given Mk 8:12 (NColeman, JTS 28, 1927, 159–67 interprets this as strongly positive; against him FBurkitt, ibid. 274–76). εἰ εἰσελεύσονται they shall certainly not enter Hb 3:11; 4:3, 5 (all 3 Ps 94:11); B-D-F §372, 4; 454, 5; Mlt-H. 468f; Rob. 94; 1024.

⑤ marker of direct and indirect questions (without particle following)

ⓐ (not in earlier Gk., B-D-F §440, 3; Rob. 916) w. direct questions (Gen 17:17; 44:19; Am 3:3–6; 6:12; TestAbr A 15 p.96, 8 [Stone p. 40]; 18 p. 100, 13 [St. p. 48]): εἰ ἔξεστιν; is it permitted, may one? Mt 12:10; 19:3 (cp. Mk 10:2); Lk 14:3 v.l.; Ac 21:37; 22:25. εἰ ὀλίγοι οἱ σωζόμενοι; are there only a few who will be saved? Lk 13:23; cp. Mk 8:23; Lk 22:49; Ac 1:6; 7:1; 19:2a. Cp. 6aβ.

ⓑ freq. in indir. questions whether (Hom. et al.)

α. w. pres. indic. (Gen 27:21; 42:16; TestJob 31:1; Jos., Ant. 10, 259; 16, 225; Ar 8, 1; Just., A I, 2, 2; A II, 2, 10) εἴπῃς εἰ σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστός whether you are the Christ Mt 26:63. εἰ ἁμαρτωλός ἐστιν whether he is a sinner J 9:25; εἰ πνεῦμα ἅγιον ἔστιν whether there is a holy spirit Ac 19:2b (s. 2 above). ἴδωμεν εἰ ἔρχεται Mt 27:49; Mk 15:36 (Lucian, Dial. Mort. 20, 3 φέρʼ ἴδω εἰ=let me see whether, Merc. Cond. 6); cp. Mk 10:2; Lk 14:31; 1 Cor 3:12; 2 Cor 13:5; 1J 4:1.—W. the fut. indic. (4 Km 1:2; Job 5:1) εἰ θεραπεύσει αὐτόν whether he would heal him Mk 3:2 (v.l. θεραπεύει); Lk 6:7 v.l.; εἰ σώσεις whether you will save 1 Cor 7:16.—W. the aor. indic. (Esth 4:14; w. plpf. Just., D. 56, 2) εἰ πάλαι ἀπέθανεν whether he had already died Mk 15:44b; εἰ ἐβάπτισα 1 Cor 1:16.

β. w. subj. διώκω εἰ καταλάβω I press on (to see) whether I can capture Phil 3:12 (B-D-F §368; 375; Rob. 1017).

γ. w. opt. (X., An. 1, 8, 15; 2, 1, 15; 4 Macc 9:27; 11:13) ἀνακρίνοντες … εἰ ἔχοι ταῦτα examining … to see whether this was really so Ac 17:11. εἰ βούλοιτο πορεύεσθαι 25:20; cp. 17:27.

⑥ In combination w. other particles, w. the other particles foll.

ⓐ εἰ ἄρα

α. expressing possibility if, indeed; if, in fact; whether (perhaps) (X., An. 3, 2, 22; SIG 834, 12; Gen 18:3; s. B-D-F §454, 2) 1 Cor 15:15 (εἴπερ ἄρα); Hv 3, 4, 3; 3, 7, 5; Hs 6, 4, 1; 8, 3, 3; 9, 5, 7; AcPt Ox 849, 6.

β. introducing a direct question εἰ ἄρα ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει; is it (really) so? Ac 7:1 v.l.; indirect qu. on the chance that (PPetr II, 13 [19] 9 ‘should you find it impossible’; Num 22:11) Mk 11:13; Ac 5:8 D; 8:22; in the hope that 17:27 (εἰ ἄρα γε); AcPt Ox 849, 2; 22. Cp. εἰ δέ … ; What if …? Ac 23:9.

ⓑ εἴ γε if indeed, inasmuch as (Kühner-G. II 177c) Eph 3:2; 4:21; Col 1:23. τοσαῦτα ἐπάθετε εἰκῇ; εἴ γε καὶ εἰκῇ have you experienced so many things in vain? If it really was in vain Gal 3:4. εἴ γε καὶ ἐκδυσάμενοι οὐ γυμνοὶ εὑρεθησόμεθα assuming, of course, that having put it off we shall not be found naked 2 Cor 5:3. [εἴ γ]ε οὕτως ὡς [ἔστιν καὶ παρελάβετε τὸν λόγον] AcPl BMM recto, 31f (restoration based on duplicate Ox 1602 verso, 37f and AcPl Ha 8, 24f, which has a slightly difft. text after εἴ γε [s. also the text of Ghent 62, 17 in HSanders, HTR 31, ’38, 79, n. 2]). S. γέ bα.

ⓒ εἰ δὲ καί (Just., D. 110, 1) but if, and if Lk 11:18; 1 Cor 4:7; and even if 2 Cor 4:3 (but s. Lietzmann, Hdb.); 11:6. If, on the other hand, … then AcPlCor 2:28 (εἰ … δέ … καί … μή).

ⓓ εἰ δὲ μή (γε) if not, otherwise

α. after affirmat. clauses, w. the aor. ind, and ἄν in the apodosis J 14:2; or pres. ind. (Demosth., Prooem. 29, 3) and fut. (Gen 30:1; Bel 29 Theod.; PLond 1912, 98) Rv 2:5, 16; or pres. impv. J 14:11.—εἰ δὲ μή γε (μήγε some edd.) otherwise (Pla. et al.; Epict. 3, 22, 27; Jos., Bell. 6, 120, Ant. 17, 113; Just., D. 105, 6; IGR IV, 833; POxy 1159, 6; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 167, 25; PGM 4, 2629; Da 3:15; Bel 8; TestSol 13:3 P): εἰ δὲ μή γε (sc. προσέχετε), μισθὸν οὐκ ἔχετε otherwise you have no reward Mt 6:1; cp. Lk 10:6. Elliptically: κἂν μὲν ποιήσῃ καρπὸν εἰς τὸ μέλλον• εἰ δὲ μή γε, ἐκκόψεις αὐτήν who knows, it may bear fruit next year; if not, fine, then cut it down (= have it cut down) 13:9.

β. after negat. clauses, otherwise (X., An. 7, 1, 8; Diod S 3, 47, 4; Dio Chrys. 10 [11], 100; LBW 1651 μὴ ἀδικεῖν…, εἰ δὲ μή; UPZ 196 I, 33 [119 B.C.]; Job 32:22) Mk 2:21f.—After a negative statement: οὐδὲ βάλλουσιν οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς παλαιούς. εἰ δὲ μή γε, ῥήγνυνται people do not pour new wine into old skins; otherwise they burst Mt 9:17; cp. Lk 5:36. μή τίς με δόξῃ ἄφρονα εἶναι• εἰ δὲ μή γε, κἂν ὡς ἄφρονα δέχασθέ με no one is to consider me foolish; otherwise at least accept me as a fool 2 Cor 11:16.

ⓔ εἰ καί even if, even though, although Lk 11:8; 18:4; 1 Cor 7:21; 2 Cor 4:16; 7:8; 12:11; Phil 2:17; Col 2:5; Hb 6:9; AcPlCor 2:32.

ⓕ εἰ μὲν γάρ for if Ac 25:11 v.l. (for εἰ μὲν οὖν); 2 Cor 11:4; Hb 8:4 v.l. (for εἰ μὲν οὖν).

ⓖ εἰ μὲν οὖν if, then Hb 7:11. W. εἰ δέ foll. (X., Cyr. 8, 7, 22; Ael. Aristid. 28, 156 K.=49 p. 542 D.) Ac 19:38.

ⓗ εἰ μέντοι if, on the other hand Js 2:8.

ⓘ εἰ μή (=πλήν) but 1 Cor 7:17 (= in general) (B-D-F §376).—After negatives

α. except, if not, mostly without a verb depending on εἰ μή (X., An. 2, 1, 12; JosAs 12:11; Just., A I, 29, 1) Mt 11:27; 12:24; 16:4; J 3:13; Ro 7:7; Gal 1:19 (HKoch, Z. Jakobusfrage Gal 1:19: ZNW 33, ’34, 204–9); but also with a verb (Jos., Ant. 8, 316) Mt 5:13; Mk 6:5; Ac 21:25 v.l.

β. but (OGI 201, 20f οὐκ ἀφῶ αὐτοὺς καθεσθῆναι εἰς τὴν σκιάν, εἰ μὴ ὑπὸ ἡλίου ἔξω; in note 33 the ed. gives exx. fr. Aristoph. for this use) without a verb Mt 12:4; w. a verb (Theod. Prodr. 7, 426 H.) Gal 1:7, s. ἄλλος 2b. For ἐκτὸς εἰ μή s. ἐκτός 3a.

ⓙ εἰ μήτι unless indeed, unless perhaps (Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 198 D.; Jos., Ant. 4, 280; Tat. 10, 2) Lk 9:13; 2 Cor 13:5; w. ἄν (Ps.-Clem., Hom. 16, 4) 1 Cor 7:5 (s. Dssm., NB 32, 1 [BS 204 n.]; B-D-F §376; Mlt. 169; 239; Reinhold 35; JTrunk, De Basilio Magno sermonis Attic. imitatore 1911, 56; JWackernagel, Antike Anredeformen 1912, 27f).

ⓚ εἰ οὖν if, therefore Mt 6:23; Lk 11:36; 12:26; J 13:14; 18:8; Col 3:1; Phlm 17.

ⓛ εἴπερ if indeed, if after all, since (X., An. 1, 7, 9; Menand., Epitr. 907 S. [587 Kö.]; PHal 7, 6; UPZ 59, 29 [168 B.C.]; Jdth 6:9; TestJob 3:6; Just., Tat., Ath.) Ro 3:30 (ἐπείπερ v.l.); 8:9, 17; 2 Th 1:6.—if indeed, provided that εἴπερ ἄρα (ἄρα 1a) 1 Cor 15:15. καὶ γὰρ εἴπερ for even if (cp. Od. 1, 167; B-D-F §454, 2) 1 Cor 8:5; on 2 Cor 5:3 s. εἴ γε καί 6b above. Doubtful IEph 6:2; s. ἤ 2aβ.

ⓜ if perchance, if haply εἰ δέ που … τις ἔλθοι if perchance … anyone came Papias (2:4).

ⓝ εἴ πως (the spelling εἴπως is also correct; B-D-F §12) if perhaps, if somehow

α. w. opt. (X., An. 2, 5, 2; 4, 1, 21; POxy 939, 15) εἴ πως δύναιντο παραχειμάσαι in the hope that they could spend the winter Ac 27:12.

β. w. fut. indic. (3 Km 21:31; 4 Km 19:4; Jer 28:8; TestJos 6:6) εἴ πως εὐοδωθήσομαι whether, perhaps, I shall succeed Ro 1:10; cp. 11:14; Phil 3:11.

ⓞ εἴτε … εἴτε (Soph. et al.; ins since 416 B.C. [Meisterhans³-Schw.]; pap [Mayser II/3, 159]; LXX; JosAs 5:9; ApcrEzk [Epiph 70, 11]; Jos., Ant. 16, 33 and 37; Just., Ath. B-D-F §446; 454, 3; Rob. ind.) if … (or) if, whether … or

α. w. a verb in pres. indic. (Herm. Wr. 12, 22 thrice) 1 Cor 12:26; 2 Cor 1:6; or pres. subj. 1 Th 5:10.

β. w. no verb (Just., D. 86, 3 al.) Ro 12:6–8; 1 Cor 3:22; 8:5; 2 Cor 5:10 al. εἴτε only once 1 Cor 14:27. εἴτε ἄρσενα εἴτε θήλειαν (ἤτε … ἤτε pap) GJs 4:1.

⑦ Used w. the indef. pron.: εἴ τις, εἴ τι everyone who or whoever; everything that or whatever Mt 16:24; 18:28; Mk 4:23; 9:35; Lk 9:23; 14:26; 1 Ti 3:1, 5; 5:4, 8, 16 al. Cp. 1 Cor 12:31 v.l. (ADebrunner, ConNeot XI, ’47, 37). W. subj. εἴ τις θελήσῃ Rv 11:5 s. 1b, above.—DELG. M-M.
2
εἰ μήν, more correctly εἶ μήν (B-D-F §24; Rob. 1150) for the older ἦ μήν (Hom. et al. [s. Denniston 350f], but found also Jos., Ant. 13, 76; 17, 42), in Hellenistic-Roman times (SIG 993, 20 [III B.C.]; 736, 27 [92 B.C.]; IG IV, 840, 15 [EHermann, Gr. Forschungen I 1912, 312]; pap since 112 B.C. [Mayser 78]; LXX e.g. Ezk 33:27; 34:8 al.; Num 14:28; Jdth 1:12; Bar 2:29 [Thackeray 83]) formula used in oaths surely, certainly Hb 6:14 (Gen 22:17).—Dssm., NB 33ff (BS 205ff).—M-M.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > εἰ
71 πολύς

πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, gen. πολλοῦ, ῆς, οῦ (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., apolog.) ‘much’.—Comparative πλείων, πλεῖον (18 times in the NT, 4 times in the Apost. Fathers [including Hv 3, 6, 4; Hs 8, 1, 16] and Ath. 12, 3) or πλέον (Lk 3:13 and Ac 15:28 μηδὲν πλέον; otherwise, πλέον in the NT only J 21:15; 14 times in the Apost. Fathers [incl. μηδὲν πλέον Hs 1, 1, 6]; Ar. twice; Just. 6 times; Tat. once; Ath. 7 times), ονος; pl. πλείονες, and acc. πλείονας contracted πλείους, neut. πλείονα and πλείω (the latter Mt 26:53 [πλεῖον, πλείου vv.ll.]; B-D-F §30, 2; Mlt-H. 82; Thackeray p. 81f; Mayser p. 68f) ‘more’ (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX; TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 27=Stone p. 70 [πλείον]; TestJob 35:2; TestGad 7:2 [πλεῖον]; AscIs 3:8; [πλέον]; EpArist; apolog. exc. Mel.).—Superlative πλεῖστος, η, ον ‘most’ (Hom.+).

① pert. to being a large number, many, a great number of

ⓐ positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύ

α. adj., preceding or following a noun (or ptc. or adj. used as a noun) in the pl. many, numerous δυνάμεις πολλαί many mighty deeds Mt 7:22b. δαιμονιζόμενοι πολλοί 8:16. Cp. vs. 30; 9:10; 13:17; 24:11; 27:52, 55; Mk 2:15a; 6:13; 12:41; Lk 4:25, 27; 7:21b; 10:24; J 10:32; 14:2; Ac 1:3; 2:43; 8:7b; 14:22; Ro 4:17f (Gen 17:5); 8:29; 12:4; 1 Cor 8:5ab; 11:30; 12:12a, 20; 1 Ti 6:12; 2 Ti 2:2; Hb 2:10; 1J 4:1; 2J 7; Rv 5:11; 9:9; 10:11; 1 Cl 55:3ab. ἔτη πολλά many years: Lk 12:19b (εἰς ἔτη π.); Ac 24:10 (ἐκ π. ἐτῶν); Ro 15:23 (ἀπὸ π. [v.l. ἱκανῶν] ἐτῶν).—αἱ ἁμαρτίαι αἱ πολλαί Lk 7:47a. αἱ εὐεργεσίαι αἱ π. 1 Cl 21:1.—πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα many serious charges Ac 25:7 (cp. Ps.-Pla., Sisyph. 1, 387a πολλά τε καὶ καλὰ πράγματα; B-D-F §442, 11; Rob. 655). πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα σημεῖα J 20:30 (on the form X., Hell. 5, 4, 1 πολλὰ μὲν οὖν … καὶ ἄλλα λέγειν καὶ Ἑλληνικὰ καὶ βαρβαρικά; Dionys. Hal. 2, 67, 5; Ps.-Demetr. 142 πολλὰς κ. ἄλλας χάριτας; Jos., Ant. 3, 318; Tat. 38, 1. On the subject-matter Bultmann 540, 3; also Porphyr., Vi. Pyth. 28 after a miracle-story: μυρία δʼ ἕτερα θαυμαστότερα κ. θειότερα περὶ τἀνδρὸς … εἴρηται κτλ.).—ἄλλοι πολλοί many others IRo 10:1. ἄλλαι πολλαί Mk 15:41. ἄλλα πολλά (Jos., Bell. 6, 169, Ant. 9, 242; Just., D. 8, 1) J 21:25. ἕτεροι πολλοί Ac 15:35. ἕτερα πολλά (Jos., Vi. 39) Lk 22:65.—Predicative: πολλοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐισερχόμενοι Mt 7:13.—Mk 5:9; 6:31; Gal 4:27 (Is 54:1). AcPl Ha 5, 16.—οὐ πολλοί not many=( only) a few οὐ πολλαὶ ἡμέραι (Jos., Ant. 5, 328, Vi. 309) Lk 15:13; J 2:12; Ac 1:5; AcPl Ha 11, 1. οὐ πολλοὶ σοφοί not many wise (people) 1 Cor 1:26a; cp. bc. οὐ πολλοί πατέρες not many fathers 4:15.

β. subst.

א. πολλοί many i.e. persons—without the art. Mt 7:22; 8:11; 12:15; 20:28; 24:5ab; 26:28; Mk 2:2; 3:10 (Mt 12:15 has ascensive πάντας; other passages to be compared in this connection are Mk 10:45=Mt 20:28 πολλῶν and 1 Ti 2:6 πάντων. Cp. the double tradition of the saying of Bias in Clem. of Alex., Strom. 1, 61, 3 πάντες ἄνθρωποι κακοὶ ἢ οἱ πλεῖστοι τ. ἀνθρώπων κακοί.—On Mk 10:45 s. OCullmann, TZ 4, ’48, 471–73); 6:2; 11:8; Lk 1:1 (cp. Herm. Wr. 11, 1, 1b and see JBauer, NovT 4, ’60, 263–66), 14; J 2:23; 8:30; Ac 9:42; Ro 16:2; 2 Cor 11:18; Gal 3:16 (πολλοί= a plurality); Tit 1:10; Hb 12:15; 2 Pt 2:2. AcPl Ha 5, 8; 7, 5; 11, 3. Opp. ὀλίγοι Mt 22:14; 20:16 v.l. (cp. Pla., Phd. 69c ναρθηκοφόροι μὲν πολλοί, βάκχοι δέ τε παῦροι=the thyrsus-bearers [officials] are many, but the truly inspired are few)—W. a partitive gen. πολλοὶ τῶν Φαρισαίων Mt 3:7. π. πῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ Lk 1:16.—J 4:39; 12:11; Ac 4:4; 8:7a; 13:43; 18:8; 19:18; 2 Cor 12:21; Rv 8:11.—W. ἐκ and gen. (AscIs 3:1; Jos., Ant. 11, 151) πολλοὶ ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν J 6:60, 66.—10:20; 11:19, 45; 12:42; Ac 17:12. ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου πολλοί J 7:31 (Appian, Iber. 78 §337 πολλοὶ ἐκ τοῦ πλήθους).

ב. πολλά—many things, much without the art.: γράφειν write at length B 4:9. διδάσκειν Mk 4:2; 6:34b. λαλεῖν Mt 13:3. μηχανᾶσθαι MPol 3. πάσχειν (Pind., O. 13, 63 al.; Jos., Ant. 13, 268; 403) Mt 16:21; Mk 5:26a; 9:12; Lk 9:22; 17:25; B 7:11; AcPl Ha 8, 19. ποιεῖν Mk 6:20 v.l. United w. another neut. by καί (Lucian, Icar. 20 πολλὰ κ. δεινά; Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 345 D.: πολλὰ κ. καλά; Ps.-Demetr., El. 70 πολλὰ κ. ἄλλα; likew. Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 13 §53; Arrian, Anab. 6, 11, 2) πολλὰ κ. ἕτερα many other things Lk 3:18. πολλὰ ἂν κ. ἄλλα εἰπεῖν ἔχοιμι Dg 2:10 (Eur., Ep. 3, 2, πολλὰ κ. ἕτερα εἰπεῖν ἔχω; Diod S 17, 38, 3 πολλὰ δὲ καὶ ἄλλα … διαλεχθείς). ἐν πολλοῖς in many ways (Diod S 26, 1, 2; OGI 737, 7 [II B.C.]; Just., D. 124, 4 [of line of proof]) 2 Cor 8:22a. ἐπὶ πολλῶν (opp. ἐπὶ ὀλίγα) over many things Mt 25:21, 23.—W. art. (Pla., Apol. 1, 17a) τὰ πολλὰ πράσσειν transact a great deal of business Hs 4:5b.

γ. elliptical δαρήσεται πολλά (sc. πληγάς) will receive many (lashes) Lk 12:47 (B-D-F §154; 241, 6).

ⓑ comparative πλείων, πλεῖον

α. adj. w. a plural (Diod S 14, 6, 1 μισθοφόρους πλείους=many mercenaries) πλείονας πόνους (opp. οὐχ ἕνα οὐδὲ δύο) 1 Cl 5:4. ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους for a (large) number of days, for many days (Jos., Ant. 4, 277; cp. Theophr. in Apollon. Paradox. 29 πλείονας ἡμ.) Ac 13:31.—21:10 (Jos., Ant. 16, 15); 24:17; 25:14; 27:20. οἱ μὲν πλείονές εἰσιν γεγονότες ἱερεῖς the priests of former times existed in greater numbers Hb 7:23. ἑτέροις λόγοις πλείοσιν in many more words (than have been reported) Ac 2:40. ταῦτα καὶ ἕτερα πλείονα MPol 12:1.—W. a gen. of comparison (Just., A I 53, 3; Tat. 3, 2) ἄλλους δούλους πλείονας τῶν πρώτων other slaves, more than (he had sent) at first Mt 21:36. πλείονα σημεῖα ὧν more signs than those which J 7:31. Also w. ἤ: πλείονας μαθητὰς ἤ more disciples than 4:1. After πλείονες (-α) before numerals the word for ‘than’ is omitted (B-D-F §185, 4; Kühner-G. II 311; Rob. 666; Jos., Ant. 14, 96) ἐτῶν ἦν πλειόνων τεσσεράκοντα ὁ ἄνθρωπος the man was more than 40 years old Ac 4:22. πλείους τεσσεράκοντα 23:13, 21. Cp. 24:11; 25:6 (Jos., Ant. 6, 306 δέκα οὐ πλείους ἡμέρας).—The ref. is to relative extent (cp. 2bα) in τὰ ἔργα σου τὰ ἕσχατα πλείονα τῶν πρώτων your deeds, the latter of which are greater than the former Rv 2:19.

β. subst.

א. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους the majority, most (Diog. L. 1, 20; 22; Jos., Ant. 10, 114) Ac 19:32; 27:12. W. ἐξ: ἐξ ὧν οἱ πλείονες most of whom 1 Cor 15:6. W. gen. and a neg. (litotes) οὐκ ἐν τ. πλείοσιν αὐτῶν ηὐδόκησεν ὁ θεός God was pleased with only a few of them 10:5. This is perh. (s. ג below) the place for 1 Cor 9:19; 2 Cor 2:6; 9:2. Phil 1:14; MPol 5:1.

ב. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους (even) more πλείονες in even greater numbers Ac 28:23. πολλῷ πλείους ἐπίστευσαν many more came to believe J 4:41.—διὰ τῶν πλειόνων to more and more people=those who are still to be won for Christ 2 Cor 4:15.

ג. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους. In contrast to a minority οἱ πλείονες can gain the sense the others, the rest (so τὰ πλείονα Soph., Oed. Col. 36; τὸ πλέον Thu. 4, 30, 4; Jos., Ant. 12, 240; B-D-F §244, 3). So perh. (s. א above) ἵνα τ. πλείονας κερδήσω (opp. the apostle himself) 1 Cor 9:19; 2 Cor 2:6 (opp. the one who has been punished too severely.—In this case [s. א above] his punishment would have been determined by a unanimous vote of the Christian assembly rather than by a majority). Cp. 9:2; Phil 1:14; MPol 5:1.

ד. πλείονα (for πλεῖον) more Mt 20:10 v.l.; various things Lk 11:53. ἐκ τοῦ ἑνὸς πλείονα 1 Cl 24:5 (s. as adv. ParJer 7:26).

ⓒ superl. adj. πλείστη w. a plural most of αἱ πλεῖσται δυνάμεις Mt 11:20 (difft. B-D-F §245, 1).

② pert. to being relatively large in quantity or measure, much, extensive

ⓐ positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύ

α. adj. preceding or following a noun (or ptc. or adj. used as a noun)

א. in the sg. much, large, great πολὺς ἀριθμός Ac 11:21. W. words that in themselves denote a plurality (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 80 §338 στρατὸς πολύς) πολὺς ὄχλος (s. ὄχ. 1a) Mt 14:14; 20:29; 26:47; Mk 5:21, 24; 6:34a; 8:1; 9:14; 12:37 (ὁ π. ὄχ.); Lk 5:29; 6:17a; 8:4; J 6:2, 5 (for the expression ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, in which π. follows the noun, J 12:9, 12, cp. Arrian, Anab. 1, 9, 6 ὁ φόνος πολύς); Ac 6:7; Rv 7:9; 19:1, 6. πολὺ πλῆθος (s. pl. 2bα) Mk 3:7f; Lk 5:6; 6:17b; 23:27; Ac 14:1; 17:4; 1 Cl 6:1. λαὸς πολύς many people Ac 18:10. Of money and its value, also used in imagery μισθὸς πολύς Mt 5:12; Lk 6:23, 35 (all three predicative, as Gen 15:1). ἐργασία π. Ac 16:16. π. κεφάλαιον 22:28. χρυσοῦ πολλοῦ … τρυφῆς πολλῆς AcPl Ha 2, 19.—Of things that occur in the mass or in large quantities (Diod S 3, 50, 1 πολλὴ ἄμπελος) γῆ πολλή Mt 13:5; Mk 4:5; θερισμὸς π. Mt 9:37; Lk 10:2 (both pred.). χόρτος π. J 6:10; καρπὸς π. (Cyranides p. 121, 11) 12:24; 15:5, 8.—λόγος π. a long speech (Diod S 13, 1, 2; Just., D. 123, 7) Ac 15:32; 20:2. περὶ οὗ πολὺς ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος about this we have much to say Hb 5:11 (cp. Pla., Phd. 115d).—Of time: πολὺς χρόνος a long time (Hom. et al.; Demetr.(?): 722 Fgm. 7; Jos., Ant. 8, 342; 19, 28; Just., A II, 2, 11) J 5:6 (s. ἔχω 7b); Hs 6, 4, 4 (pred.). μετὰ πολὺν χρόνον (Jos., Ant. 12, 324) Mt 25:19. Differently Mk 6:35ab (s. 3aα).

ב. adj. w. a noun in the pl. many, large, great, extensive, plentiful ὄχλοι πολλοί great crowds or probably better many people (as Diod S 20, 59, 2; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 10, 3. For the corresponding mng. of ὄχλοι s. ὄχλος 1a) Mt 4:25; 8:1; 13:2; 15:30a; 19:2; Lk 5:15; 14:25. κτήματα πολλά a great deal of property Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22 (cp. Da 11:28 χρήματα π.). ὕδατα πολλά much water, many waters (Maximus Tyr. 21, 3g of the Nile ὁ πολὺς ποταμός, likew. Procop. Soph., Ep. 111) J 3:23; Rv 1:15; 14:2; 17:1; 19:6b. θυμιάματα πολλά a great deal of incense 8:3. τὰ πολλὰ γράμματα Ac 26:24. πολλοὶ χρόνοι long periods of time (Plut., Thes. 6, 9). πολλοῖς χρόνοις for long periods of time (SIG 836, 6; pap) Lk 8:29; 1 Cl 44:3. χρόνοις πολλοῖς AcPlCor 2:10. ἐκ πολλῶν χρόνων (Diod S 3, 47, 8; Jos., Ant. 14, 110; 17, 204) 1 Cl 42:5.

β. subst.

א. πολλοί many i.e. pers.—w. the art. οἱ πολλοί the many, of whatever appears in the context Mk 6:2 v.l. (the many people who were present in the synagogue); 9:26b (the whole crowd). Opp. ὁ εἷς Ro 5:15ac, 19ab; the many who form the ἓν σῶμα the one body 12:5; 1 Cor 10:17. Paul pays attention to the interests of the many rather than to his own vs. 33 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 212).—The majority, most (X., An. 5, 6, 19; Appian, Maced. 7, Bell. Civ. 4, 73 §309; 2 Macc 1:36; En 104:10; AscIs 3:26; Jos., Ant. 17, 72; Just., D. 4, 3) Mt 24:12; Hb 12:15 v.l. W. a connotation of disapproval most people, the crowd (Socrat., Ep. 6, 2; Dio Chrys. 15 [32], 8; Epict. 1, 3, 4; 2, 1, 22 al.; Plut., Mor. 33a; 470b; Plotinus, Enn. 2, 9, 9; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 42) 2 Cor 2:17; Pol 2:1; 7:2.—Jeremias, The Eucharistic Words of Jesus³, tr. NPerrin, ’66, 179–82; 226–31, and TW VI 536–45: πολλοί.

ב. πολύ much ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρʼ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ᾧ παρέθεντο πολὺ κτλ. Lk 12:48 (Just., A I, 17, 4 twice πλέον). Cp. 16:10ab; 2 Cl 8:5; καρποφορεῖν π. bear much fruit Hs 2:3. πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον much in every way Ro 3:2 (Ael. Aristid. 34, 43 K.=50 p. 562 D. gives answer to a sim. quest. asked by himself: πολλὰ καὶ παντοῖα).—Js 5:16.—As gen. of price πολλοῦ for a large sum of money (Menand., Fgm. 197 Kö.; PRyl 244, 10. S. στρουθίον.) Mt 26:9.—Of time: ἐπὶ πολύ ( for) a long time (JosAs 19:3; Ar. 65, 3; s. also ἐπί 18cβ) Ac 28:6; AcPl Ha 10, 21. μετʼ οὐ πολύ soon afterward Ac 27:14 (μετά B 2c).—ἐπὶ πολύ more than once, often (Is 55:7) Hm 4, 1, 8.—Before a comp. (as Hom. et al.; B-D-F §246; Rob. 664) in the acc. πολὺ βέλτιον much better Hs 1:9. π. ἐλάττων v 3, 7, 6 (Ar. 6, 2). π. μᾶλλον much more, to a much greater degree (Dio Chrys. 2, 10; 17; 64 al.; Ael. Aristid. 34, 9 K.=50 p. 549 D.; Just., A II, 8, 3; D. 95, 1 al.) Hb 12:9, 25 (by means of a negative it acquires the mng. much less; cp. Diod S 7, 14, 6 πολὺ μᾶλλον μὴ … =even much less); Dg 2:7b. π. πλέον 2:7a (Ar. 11, 7). π. σπουδαιότερος 2 Cor 8:22b. Cp. π. τιμώτερον 1 Pt 1:7 v.l.; in the dat. of degree of difference πολλῷ μᾶλλον (Thu. 2, 51, 4; UPZ 42, 48 [162 B.C.]; EpArist 7; 24 al.; Sir prol. ln. 14; Jos., Ant. 18, 184; Just., A I, 68, 9; Tat. 17, 4) Mt 6:30; Mk 10:48b; Lk 18:39; Ro 5:9f, 15b, 17; 1 Cor 12:22; 2 Cor 3:9, 11; Phil 2:12. πολλῷ μᾶλλον κρείσσον 1:23 (v.l. without μᾶλλον). πολλῷ πλείους J 4:41. πολλῷ στρουθίων as v.l. Mt 20:31 and Lk 12:7 (both N.²⁵ app.; on the strong ms. support for this rdg. s. RBorger, TRu 52, ’87, 21–24).—W. the art. τὸ πολύ (opp. τὸ ὀλίγον as X., An. 7, 7, 36) 2 Cor 8:15 (cp. Ex 16:18).

ג. πολύς (Diod S 14, 107, 4 πολὺς ἦν ἐπὶ τῇ τιμωρίᾳ=he was strongly inclined toward punishing) μὴ πολὺς ἐν ῥήμασιν γίνου do not be profuse in speech, do not gossip 1 Cl 30:5 (Job 11:3).—Παπίας ὁ πολύς Papias (7), prob. to be understood as ὁ πάνυ; s. πάνυ d.

ⓑ comp. πλείων, πλεῖον; adv. πλειόνως

α. adj., w. a singular (TestJob 35:2 διὰ πλείονος εὐωδίας) καρπὸν πλείονα more fruit J 15:2, 8 P⁶⁶; Hs 5, 2, 4. τὸ πλεῖον μέρος τοῦ ὄχλου the greater part of the throng 8, 1, 16. ἐπὶ πλείονα χρόνον for a longer time (PTebt 6:31 [II B.C.]) Ac 18:20. Foll. by gen. of comparison: πλείονα τιμήν more honor Hb 3:3b.—IPol 1:3a. Foll. by παρά τινα for comparison Hb 3:3a; 11:4; Hs 9, 18, 2. ὅσῳ πλείονος κατηξιώθημεν γνώσεως, τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον 1 Cl 41:4.—τὸ πλεῖον μέρος as adv. acc. for the greater part Hv 3, 6, 4a.

β. as subst. πλεῖον, πλέον more τὸ πλεῖον the greater sum (cp. Diod S 1, 82, 2=the greater part; Ps 89:10) Lk 7:43. πλεῖον λαμβάνειν receive a larger sum Mt 20:10. W. partitive gen. ἐπὶ πλεῖον προκόψουσιν ἀσεβείας they will arrive at an ever greater measure of impiety=become more and more deeply involved in impiety 2 Ti 2:16. W. a gen. of comparison πλεῖον τῆς τροφῆς someth. greater (more important) than food Mt 6:25; Lk 12:23. πλεῖον Ἰωνᾶ Mt 12:41; cp. vs. 42; Lk 11:31, 32. ἡ χήρα πλεῖον πάντων ἔβαλεν the widow put in more than all the rest Mk 12:43; Lk 21:3. μηδὲν πλέον nothing more (Jos., Bell. 1, 43; cp. Just., D. 2, 3 οὐδὲν πλέον); the words than, except following are expressed by παρά and the acc. Lk 3:13 or by πλήν w. gen. Ac 15:28, w. εἰ μή Hs 1:6.—The acc. is used as an adv. more, in greater measure, to a greater degree (Herm. Wr. 13, 21 Nock after the mss.) Lk 7:42; IRo 1:1; IEph 6:2; w. a gen. of comparison Mt 5:20 (περισσεύω 1aβ); J 21:15; IPol 5:2 (s. Ad’Alès, RSR 25, ’35, 489–92). τριετίαν ἢ καὶ πλεῖον for three years or even more Ac 20:18 D (cp. TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 27 [Stone p. 70, 27]).—ἐπὶ πλεῖον any farther (of place) Ac 4:17 (TestGad 7:2; Ath. 12 [ἐπί 4bβ]); (of time) at length Ac 20:9 (ἐπί 18cβ) or any longer, too long 24:4; 1 Cl 55:1 (ἐπί 18cβ); any more, even more (ἐπί 13) 2 Ti 3:9; 1 Cl 18:3 (Ps 50:4). Strengthened πολὺ πλέον much more, much rather (4 Macc 1:8; cp. X., An. 7, 5, 15; BGU 180, 12f [172 A.D.] πολλῷ πλεῖον; Ar. 11, 7 πολλῷ πλεῖον) Dg 2:7; 4:5.—Also w. indications of number (s. 1bα) πλεῖον ἢ ἄρτοι πέντε Lk 9:13 (the words πλ. ἤ outside the constr. as X., An. 1, 2, 11). In πλείω δώδεκα λεγιῶνας ἀγγέλων more than twelve legions of angels Mt 26:53 the text is uncertain (B-D-F §185, 4; s. Rob. 666).—The adv. can also be expressed by πλειόνως (Aeneas Tact. 237; Jos., Ant. 17, 2; Leontios 24, p. 52, 10) more ὅσον … πλειόνως the more … the more IEph 6:1.

ⓒ superl. πλεῖστος, ον

α. adj.

א. superlative proper τὸ πλεῖστον μέρος the greatest part w. partitive gen. Hs 8, 2, 9; 9, 7, 4. As adv. acc. for the greatest part 8, 5, 6; 8, 10, 1 (s. μέρος 1d).

ב. elative (s. Mayser II/1, 1926, 53) very great, very large (ὁ) πλεῖστος ὄχλος Mt 21:8 (ὁ πλεῖστος ὄχλος could also be the greatest part of the crowd, as Thu. 7, 78, 2; Pla., Rep. 3, 397d); Mk 4:1.

β. subst. οἱ πλεῖστοι the majority, most Ac 19:32 D (Just., D. 1, 4; cp. D. 48, 4 πλεῖστοι).

③ pert. to being high on a scale of extent

ⓐ positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύ

α. as simple adj., to denote degree much, great, strong, severe, hard, deep, profound (Diod S 13, 7, 4 πολὺς φόβος; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 4, 57; 58 p. 265, 3 πολλὴ δικαιοσύνη; Eccl 5:16 θυμὸς π.; Sir 15:18 σοφία; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 4 [Stone p. 54] ἀθυμία; Just., D. 3, 1 ἠρεμία) ἀγάπη Eph 2:4. ἀγών 1 Th 2:2. ἄθλησις Hb 10:32. ἁπλότης Hv 3, 9, 1. ἀσιτία Ac 27:21. βία 24:6 [7] v.l. γογγυσμός J 7:12. διακονία Lk 10:40. δοκιμή 2 Cor 8:2. δόξα Mt 24:30; Hv 1, 3, 4; 2, 2, 6. δύναμις Mk 13:26. ἐγκράτεια strict self-control Hv 2, 3, 2. εἰρήνη complete or undisturbed peace (Diod S 3, 64, 7; 11, 38, 1) Ac 24:2. ἔλεος 1 Pt 1:3. ἐπιθυμία 1 Th 2:17. ζημία Ac 27:10. ζήτησις 15:7. θλῖψις 2 Cor 2:4a; 1 Th 1:6. καύχησις 2 Cor 7:4b (pred.). μακροθυμία Ro 9:22. ὀδυρμός Mt 2:18. παράκλησις 2 Cor 8:4. παρρησία (Wsd 5:1) 3:12; 7:4a (pred.); 1 Ti 3:13; Phlm 8. πεποίθησις 2 Cor 8:22c. πλάνη 2 Cl 1:7. πληροφορία 1 Th 1:5. πόνος Col 4:13. σιγή a great or general hush (X., Cyr. 7, 1, 25; Arrian, Anab. 5, 28, 4) Ac 21:40. στάσις 23:10. τρόμος 1 Cor 2:3. φαντασία Ac 25:23. χαρά 8:8; Phlm 7. ὥρα πολλή late hour (Polyb. 5, 8, 3; Dionys. Hal. 2, 54; Jos., Ant. 8, 118) Mk 6:35ab.

β. subst. πολλά in the acc. used as adv. greatly, earnestly, strictly, loudly, often etc. (X., Cyr. 1, 5, 14; Diod S 13, 41, 5; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 19, 2; Aelian, VH 1, 23; 4 Km 10:18; Is 23:16; TestSol 1:1; GrBar; ApcMos; Jos., Ant. 14, 348) ἀλαλάζειν πολλά Mk 5:38 (s. ἀλαλάζω). πολλὰ ἁμαρτάνειν Hs 4:5c (ApcMos 32). π. ἀνακρίνειν Ac 28:18 v.l. π. ἀπορεῖν Mk 6:20 (Field, Notes 29). π. ἀσπάζεσθαι 1 Cor 16:19 (s. ἀσπάζομαι 1a). δεηθῆναι π. (GrBar 4:14; Jos., Vi. 173; 343) Hs 5, 4, 1. διαστέλλεσθαι Mk 5:43 (s. διαστέλλω). π. ἐπιτιμᾶν 3:12. π. ἐρωτᾶν earnestly pray Hv 2, 2, 1. κατηγορεῖν π. Mk 15:3 (s. κατηγορέω 1a). κηρύσσειν π. talk freely 1:45. κλαίειν bitterly Ac 8:24 D (ApcMos 39). κοπιᾶν (ApcMos 24; CIG IV 9552, 5 … μοι πολλὰ ἐκοπίασεν, cp. Dssm., LO 266, 5 [LAE 317]) work hard Ro 16:6, 12; 2 Cl 7:1b. νηστεύειν π. fast often Mt 9:14a. ὀμνύναι π. Mk 6:23. παρακαλεῖν Mk 5:10, 23; Ac 20:1 D; 1 Cor 16:12. π. πταίειν make many mistakes Js 3:2. π. σπαράσσειν convulse violently Mk 9:26a.—W. the art. ἐνεκοπτόμην τὰ πολλά I have been hindered these many times (cp. Ro 1:13 πολλάκις) Ro 15:22 (v.l. πολλάκις here too).

γ. subst. πολύ in the acc. used as adv. greatly, very much, strongly (Da 6:15, 24 Theod.) ἀγαπᾶν πολύ show much affection, love greatly Lk 7:47b. κλαίειν π. weep loudly Rv 5:4.—Mk 12:27; Ac 18:27.

ⓑ superlative, the neut. acc. πλεῖστον, α as adv. (sing. Hom. et al.; pl. Pind. et al.)

α. pl. πλεῖστα in the formula of greeting at the beginning of a letter πλεῖστα χαίρειν (POxy 742; 744; 1061 [all three I B.C.]; PTebt 314, 2 [II A.D.] and very oft. in pap.—Griech. pap ed. Ltzm.: Kl. Texte 14², 1910, p. 4, 5, 6, 7 al.; Preis. II s.v. πλεῖστος) heartiest greeting(s) IEph ins; IMg ins; ITr ins; IRo ins; ISm ins; IPol ins.

β. sing. τὸ πλεῖστον at the most (Aristoph., Vesp. 260; Diod S 14, 71, 3 πεμπταῖοι ἢ τὸ πλ. ἑκταῖοι; POxy 58, 17; PGiss 65:9) κατὰ δύο ἢ τὸ πλ. τρεῖς (word for word like Περὶ ὕψους 32, 1) 1 Cor 14:27.—B. 922f. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πολύς
72 ζάω

ζάω contr. ζῶ (Hom.+) impf. ἔζων (Ro 7:9 B ἔζην; on this form s. Schwyzer I 675; B-D-F §88; Mlt-H. 194, both w. ref.); fut. ζήσω (uniformly attested Ro 6:2; Hb 12:9); the later (since Hippocr. VII p. 536 L.; LXX; AscIs 3:9; Jos., Ant. 1, 193 al.) form ζήσομαι (B-D-F §77; Rob. 356) is more common (on the fut. forms s. JLee, NovT 22, ’80, 289–98; GKilpatrick, ibid. 25, ’83, 146–51); 1 aor. ἔζησα. On the LXX usage s. Thackeray 269; for forms in pap, Gignac II 370.

① to be alive physically, live

ⓐ of physical life in contrast to death

α. gener. Ac 22:22; Ro 7:1, 2, 3; 14:8ac; 1 Cor 7:39; 2 Cor 5:15a; 6:9; Hb 9:17. ψυχὴ ζῶσα a living soul (Gen 1:20 al.; Just., D. 6, 1 ζῇ ψυχῇ) 1 Cor 15:45 (Gen 2:7); Rv 16:3 v.l. ὅσα ἔτη ζῇ as many years as he lives B 10:6 (cp. SIG 663, 6; Sb 173, 6 Αὐρήλιος ζήσας ἔτη νε´; En 10:10). τὸ ζῆν life (Attic wr., ins, pap, LXX) ὥστε ἐξαπορηθῆναι ἡμᾶς καὶ τοῦ ζῆν so that we even despaired of life 2 Cor 1:8. διὰ παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν during the whole lifetime Hb 2:15 (cp. Diod S 1, 74, 3 διατελεῖν πάντα τὸν τοῦ ζῆν χρόνον; 4, 46, 4). ἔτι ζῶν while he was still living= before his death Mt 27:63 (CB I/2 660 no. 618 Ζώσιμος ἔτι ζῶν κατεσκεύασεν; 3 Km 12:6). ζῶντες ἐβλήθησαν … εἰς τὴν λίμνην τοῦ πυρός they were thrown alive into the lake of fire Rv 19:20. ζῶσα τέθνηκεν though alive she is dead 1 Ti 5:6 (cp. Sextus 7). ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες we during our (earthly) life 2 Cor 4:11; the same phrase= we who are still living 1 Th 4:15, 17. Here the opp. is νεκροί, as in Mt 22:32; Mk 12:27; Lk 20:38a. ζῶντες καὶ νεκροί the living and the dead Ac 10:42; Ro 14:9b; 2 Ti 4:1; 1 Pt 4:5; 2 Cl 1:1; B 7:2.—Occasionally the contrast betw. νεκρός and ζῆν is used fig. with ref. to the realm of religion and ethics Lk 15:24 v.l., 32.

β. of dead persons who return to life become alive again: of humans in general (3 Km 17:23) Mt 9:18; Ac 9:41; 20:12; Rv 20:4, 5; AcPl Ha 11, 7. Of Jesus Mk 16:11; Lk 24:5, 23; Ac 1:3; 25:19; Ro 14:9a; 2 Cor 13:4a; Rv 1:18b; 2:8 (Just., D. 69, 6 νεκροὺς … ζῆν ποιήσας).

γ. of sick persons, if their illness terminates not in death but in recovery be well, recover (Artem. 4, 4 ἔζησεν ὁ παῖς=became well; 5, 71; 72; PGM 1, 188; 4 Km 1:2; 8:8 εἰ ζήσομαι ἐκ τῆς ἀρρωστίας μου ταύτης; Jos., Vi. 421) Mk 5:23; J 4:50, 51, 53.—Of removal of anxiety 1 Th 3:8.

δ. also of healthy persons live on, remain alive (X., An. 3, 2, 39 ὅστις δὲ ζῆν ἐπιθυμεῖ πειράσθω νικᾶν; Ep. 56 of Apollonius of Tyana [Philostrat. I 359, 14]; ApcMos 31 διὰ τί σὺ ἀποθνῄσκεις καγὼ ζῶ;) Ac 25:24; 28:4. ἐὰν ὁ κύριος θελήσῃ ζήσομεν Js 4:15. ὸ̓ς ἔχει τὴν πληγὴν τῆς μαχαίρης καὶ ἔζησεν Rv 13:14.

ε. of beings that in reality, or as they are portrayed, are not subject to death: of Melchizedek Hb 7:8 (opp. ἀποθνῄσκοντες ἄνθρωποι). Jesus as everlasting high priest πάντοτε ζῶν 7:25.—In this sense it is most comprehensively applied to God (s. CBurchard, Untersuch. zu JosAs p. 103) (ὁ) θεὸς (ὁ) ζῶν (cp. 4 Km 19:4, 16; Is 37:4, 17; Hos 2:1; Da 6:21 Theod.; 3 Macc 6:28; TestAbr A 17 p. 99, 10 [Stone p. 46]; TestJob 37:2; JosAs 49:3 al.; SibOr 3, 763; POxy 924, 11 [IV A.D., Gnostic]; PGM 4, 1038 ὁ μέγας ζῶν θεός; 7, 823; 12, 79; Philo, Decal. 67 ὁ ζῶν ἀεὶ θεός; Orig., C. Cels. 8, 59, 18.—The phrase ‘the living God’ is not found in Joseph.) Mt 16:16; 26:63; J 6:69 v.l.; Ac 14:15; Ro 9:26 (Hos 2:1); 2 Cor 3:3; 6:16; 1 Th 1:9; 1 Ti 3:15; 4:10; 6:17 v.l.; Hb 3:12; 9:14; 10:31; 12:22; Rv 1:18a; 4:10; 7:2; 10:6; 2 Cl 20:2; GJs 20:1; AcPl Ha 2, 32; also ὁ ζῶν πατήρ J 6:57. W. the addition εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων Rv 15:7; cp. 4:9 (cp. Tob 13:2; Sir 18:1). God takes a sovereign oath in the words ζῶ ἐγώ as surely as I live (Num 14:28 al.) Ro 14:11 (Is 49:18; classical parallels GStählin, NovT 5, ’62, 142 n. 2). ζῇ κύριος ὁ θεός [μου] as surely as the Lord my God lives GJs 4:1; 6:1; 13:3; 15:3; 19:3 (Judg 8:19; 1 Km 25:34 al; GrBar 1:7; cp. ApcEsdr 2:7); in expanded form καὶ ζῇ ὁ Χριστὸς αὐτοῦ 15:4 (s. deStrycker ad loc.).—Christ lives διὰ τὸν πατέρα because of the Father J 6:57b (s. Bultmann, comm. ad loc.).

ⓑ w. mention of that upon which life depends ἐπί τινι on the basis of someth. (Andoc. 1, 100; Isocr. 10, 18; Ael. Aristid. 28, 103 K.=49 p. 525 D.) ζ. ἐπʼ ἄρτῳ live on bread Mt 4:4; Lk 4:4 (both Dt 8:3). ζ. ἔκ τινος obtain one’s living fr. someth. (Aristoph., Eccl. 591; Demosth. 57, 36; POxy 1117, 19; 1557, 12; TestJob 47:1f) 1 Cor 9:14.

ⓒ w. more precise mention of the sphere (Artem. 3, 62 ἐν ἀγορᾷ ζ.=spend his life in the marketplace) ζ. ἐν σαρκί live in the flesh in contrast to the heavenly life Phil 1:22; Gal 2:20c; ζ. ἐν κόσμῳ live in the world Col 2:20. ζ. ἐν θεῷ, live in God (as the Being who penetrates and embraces everything) Ac 17:28 (s. κινέω 3). For AcPl Ha 1, 15 s. 2a end.

② to live in a transcendent sense, live, of the sanctified life of a child of God (ζῆν in the sense of a higher type of life than the animal: X., Mem. 3, 3, 11; Cass. Dio 69, 19: after years of public service, Similis retires and prepares this epitaph: Σίμιλις ἐνταύθα κεῖται βιοὺς μὲν ἔτη τόσα, ζήσας δὲ ἔτη ἑπτά=Here lies Similis, existing for so many years, but alive for only seven.).

ⓐ in the world ἐγὼ ἔζων χωρὶς νόμου ποτέ I was once (truly) alive without law (this has been interpr. to mean when no law existed; Paul is then regarded as speaking fr. the viewpoint of humanity in paradise before the command Gen 2:16 f; 3:3. Another interpr. thinks of Paul as referring to the period in his life when he was not conscious of the existence and significance of the law. In view of Paul’s climactic affirmation in Ro 7:25, Paul probably illustrates in the first person the perils of a Christian who succumbs to the illusion that moral action is connected with law rather than with the ‘spirit of life in Christ’ Ro 8:2) Ro 7:9. Even now those who listen to the voice of the Son of God enjoy this life J 5:25; cp. 11:26; likew. those who receive him into their being ὁ τρώγων τὸν ἄρτον 6:57c; cp. Ro 6:11, 13 (ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας); Gal 2:19; Rv 3:1. This heavenly life on earth is a ζ. πνεύματι Gal 5:25 or a life not of mere human achievement, but of Christ who lives in Christians 2:20ab. Also of the superhuman power of the apostle ζήσομεν σὺν αὐτῷ ἐκ δυνάμεως θεοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς we shall live with him (Christ) through God’s power in our dealings with you 2 Cor 13:4. ὁ κύριος βούλεται ζῆν ἡμᾶς ἐν θεῷ=the Lord wills that we live under God’s direction AcPl Ha 1, 15 (opp. ἀποθανεῖν ἐν ἁμαρτίαις; s. 1c end)

ⓑ in the glory of the life to come (Sir 48:11; cp. Dt 4:1; 8:1; 30:16).

α. abs. Lk 10:28; J 11:25; 14:19; Ro 8:13b; Hb 12:9. ἐμοὶ τ. ζῆν Χριστός= life is possible for me only where Christ is (hence death is gain) Phil 1:21 (s. OSchmitz, GHeinrici Festschr. 1914, 155–69). Another common interpr. is for me to live is Christ, i.e. while I am alive I experience real life in connection with Christ; w. death comes life in all fullness in the presence of Jesus.

β. More specifically εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα have eternal life (Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 17 ζῆν εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα; PsSol 14:2) J 6:51, 58 (in J the blessed life which the follower of Jesus enjoys here and now in the body is simply continued in the heavenly life of the future. In other respects also the dividing line betw. the present and the future life is somet. nonexistent or at least not discernible); B 6:3; 8:5; 9:2; 11:10f; ἅμα σὺν αὐτῷ (i.e. Χριστῷ) ζ. live together with Christ 1 Th 5:10; ζ. διʼ αὐτοῦ (i.e. Chr.) 1J 4:9; ζ. κατὰ θεὸν πνεύματι live, as God (lives), in the Spirit 1 Pt 4:6. ὁ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται (cp. Hab 2:4) he that is just through faith will have life Ro 1:17 (AFeuillet, NTS 6, ’59, 52–80; but s. Fitzmyer, Ro [AB] ad loc.); Gal 3:11; Hb 10:38. This life is τὸ ἀληθινὸν ζῆν ITr 9:2; IEph 11:1. Christ is called τὸ ἀδιάκριτον ἡμῶν ζῆν our unshakable or inseparable life 3:2. τὸ διὰ παντὸς ἡμῶν ζῆν our total life 1 Mg 1:2—The law-directed pers. believes concerning legal performance: ὁ ποιήσας αὐτὰ ζήσεται ἐν αὐτοῖς (Lev 18:5) Gal 3:12; cp. Ro 10:5 (cp. Dio Chrys. 58 [75], 1 οἱ τοῦτον [= τ. νόμον] φυλάττοντες ἔχονται τῆς σωτηρίας=those who observe law have a firm grip on security).

③ to conduct oneself in a pattern of behavior, live (Hom. et al.)

ⓐ used w. adverbs or other modifiers: adv. (Sallust. 19 p. 34, 25 κακῶς ζῆν [Just., A I, 4, 7]; SIG 889, 13ff; Wsd 14:28; Philo; Jos., Ant. 12, 198; Ath. 3, 1 δίκην θηρίων) ἀσώτως Lk 15:13. ἐθνικῶς and ἰουδαϊκῶς Gal 2:14. εὐσεβῶς 2 Ti 3:12. πανούργως Hm 3, 3. σωφρόνως κ. δικαίως κ. εὐσεβῶς Tit 2:12 (Plut., Mor. 1108c ζῆν σωφρόνως κ. δικαίως; cp. Diog. L. 10, 132; 140; Ar. 15, 10).—Φαρισαῖος live as a Pharisee Ac 26:5. ἐν πίστει Gal 2:20d. ἐν ἁμαρτίᾳ Ro 6:2; ζ. ἐν τούτοις live in these (sins) Col 3:7. κατὰ ἀλήθειαν in keeping w. the truth IEph 6:2 (cp. Philo, Post. Cai. 73 κατὰ βούλημα τὸ τοῦ θεοῦ ζ.; Jos., Ant. 4, 302 κατὰ τ. νόμους ζ.; Just., D. 47, 4 κατὰ τὸν νόμον; Orig., C. Cels. 7, 12, 7 κατὰ τὰς θείας γραφάς). κατὰ θεόν 8:1 (cp. SIG 910 A and B). κατὰ Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν IPhld 3:2. κατὰ Χριστιανισμόν live in accordance w. (our) commitment to Christ IMg 10:1. κατὰ σάρκα Ro 8:12f; Dg 5:8; κατὰ κυριακὴν ζ. (opp. σαββατίζειν) include the observance of the Lord’s day in one’s life IMg 9:1. Of a married woman ζ. μετὰ ἀνδρός live w. her husband Lk 2:36 (for the added acc. of extent of time cp. Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 332 D.; Pr 28:16; ἥτις ἔζησεν καλῶς μετʼ ἐμοῦ ἔτη 28, μῆνας 4, ἡμέρας 5: SEG II, 384, 6–8 [restored]; s. also FDanker, Jesus and the New Age ’88, 71).

ⓑ τινί live for someone or someth., for the other’s benefit (Hom. et al.; Demosth. 7, 17 οἳ οὐκ αἰσχύνονται Φιλίππῳ ζῶντες καὶ οὐ τῇ ἑαυτῶν πατρίδι; Dionys. Hal. 3, 17 … παῖδες, τῷ πατρὶ ζῶντες) ζ. τῷ θεῷ (4 Macc 7:19; 16:25; Philo, Mut. Nom. 13, Rer. Div. Her. 111; s. SAalen, NTS 13, ’67, 10) Lk 20:38b (cp. Soph., Ajax 970); Ro 6:10, 11; Gal 2:19; Hm 3:5; AcPl Ha 10, 7; τῷ κυρίῳ Ro 14:8b (cp. Plut., Cleom. 819 [31, 5]). For Christ 2 Cor 5:15; τῷ ἐμῷ βασιλεῖ AcPl Ha 9, 26 (restored after Aa I 112, 14) τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ ζ. 1 Pt 2:24; ἑαυτῷ ζ. live for oneself (Menand., Fgm. 646 Kö. οὐχ ἑαυτῷ ζῆν μόνον; Diod S 10, 33, 2 ζ. ἑαυτοῖς=live for themselves) Ro 14:7.

④ to be full of vitality, be lively the ptc. is used fig. w. respect to things (cp. τῶν δένδρων τῶν ζῶντων ParJer 9:3), of spring water in contrast w. cistern water ὕδωρ ζῶν (Gen 26:19; Lev 14:5; Jer 2:13 v.l.; Zech 14:8.—Stagnant water is called ὕ. νεκρόν: Synes., Ep. 114, 254d) J 4:10f (Hdb. exc. on J 4:14); 7:38; D 7:1f (Wengst p. 77 n. 57). ζώσας πηγάς Rv 7:17 v.l.

⑤ to be life-productive, offer life ptc. used w. respect to things (SIG 1173 [138 A.D.], 5 ζῶσαι ἀρεταὶ ἐγένοντο=miracles full of divine life occurred) λόγια ζῶντα words that meant life Ac 7:38. λόγος ζῶν θεοῦ 1 Pt 1:23; cp. Hb 4:12. ὁδὸς ζῶσα a living way 10:20. ἐλπὶς ζῶσα a living hope 1 Pt 1:3.—ζ. is also used of things which serve as descriptions of pers. who communicate divine life: of Christ ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ζῶν J 6:51a. λίθος ζῶν 1 Pt 2:4. Of Christians: θυσία ζῶσα a living sacrifice Ro 12:1. λίθοι ζῶντες 1 Pt 2:5.—τὰ παρὰ ζώσης φωνῆς καὶ μενούσης the (words) of a living and abiding voice Papias (2:4) (opp. ἐκ τῶν βιβλίων).—Lit. s. ζωή end. DELG s.v. ζώω.M-M. TW.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ζάω
73 πνεῦμα

πνεῦμα, ατος, τό (πνέω; Aeschyl., Pre-Socr., Hdt.+. On the history of the word s. Rtzst., Mysterienrel.³ 308ff).

① air in movement, blowing, breathing (even the glowing exhalations of a volcanic crater: Diod S 5, 7, 3)

ⓐ wind (Aeschyl. et al.; LXX, EpArist, Philo; Jos., Ant. 2, 343; 349; SibOr 8, 297) in wordplay τὸ πνεῦμα πνεῖ the wind blows J 3:8a (EpJer 60 πνεῦμα ἐν πάσῃ χώρᾳ πνεῖ. But s. TDonn, ET 66, ’54f, 32; JThomas, Restoration Qtrly 24, ’81, 219–24). ὀθόνη πλοίου ὑπὸ πνεύματος πληρουμένη MPol 15:2. Of God ὁ ποιῶν τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ πνεύματα who makes his angels winds Hb 1:7; 1 Cl 36:3 (both Ps 103:4).

ⓑ the breathing out of air, blowing, breath (Aeschyl. et al.; Pla., Tim. 79b; LXX) ὁ ἄνομος, ὅν ὁ κύριος Ἰησοῦς ἀνελεῖ τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 2 Th 2:8 (cp. Is 11:4; Ps 32:6).

② that which animates or gives life to the body, breath, (life-)spirit (Aeschyl. et al.; Phoenix of Colophon 1, 16 [Coll. Alex. p. 231] πν.=a breathing entity [in contrast to becoming earth in death]; Polyb. 31, 10, 4; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 4 p. 394b, 8ff; PHib 5, 54 [III B.C.]; PGM 4, 538; 658; 2499; LXX; TestAbr A 17 p. 98, 19 [Stone p. 44] al.; JosAs 19:3; SibOr 4, 46; Tat. 4:2) ἀφιέναι τὸ πνεῦμα give up one’s spirit, breathe one’s last (Eur., Hec. 571; Porphyr., Vi. Plotini 2) Mt 27:50. J says for this παραδιδόναι τὸ πν. 19:3 (cp. ApcMos 31 ἀποδῶ τὸ πν.; Just., D. 105, 5). Of the return of the (life-)spirit of a deceased person into her dead body ἐπέστρεψεν τὸ πν. αὐτῆς Lk 8:55 (cp. Jdg 15:19). εἰς χεῖράς σου παρατίθεμαι τὸ πν. μου into your hands I entrust my spirit 23:46 (Ps 30:6; for alleged focus on ἐλπίζειν s. EBons, BZ 38, ’94, 93–101). κύριε Ἰησοῦ, δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου Ac 7:59; composite of both passages AcPl Ha 10, 23 (cp. ApcMos 42). τὸ πν. μου ὁ δεσπότης δέξεται GJs 23:3 (on the pneuma flying upward after death cp. Epicharm. in Vorsokrat. 23 [=13, 4th ed.], B 9 and 22; Eur., Suppl. 533 πνεῦμα μὲν πρὸς αἰθέρα, τὸ σῶμα δʼ ἐς γῆν; PGM 1, 177ff τελευτήσαντός σου τὸ σῶμα περιστελεῖ, σοῦ δὲ τὸ πνεῦμα … εἰς ἀέρα ἄξει σὺν αὑτῷ ‘when you are dead [the angel] will wrap your body … and take your spirit with him into the sky’). τὸ σῶμα χωρὶς πν. νεκρόν ἐστιν Js 2:26. πν. ζωῆς ἐκ τ. θεοῦ εἰσῆλθεν ἐν αὐτοῖς (i.e. the prophet-witnesses who have been martyred) Rv 11:11 (cp. Ezk 37:10 v.l. εἰσῆλθεν εἰς αὐτοὺς πνεῦμα ζωῆς; vs. 5). Of the spirit that animated the image of a beast, and enabled it to speak and to have Christians put to death 13:15.—After a person’s death, the πν. lives on as an independent being, in heaven πνεύματα δικαὶων τετελειωμένων Hb 12:23 (cp. Da 3:86 εὐλογεῖτε, πνεύματα καὶ ψυχαὶ δικαίων, τὸν κύριον). According to non-biblical sources, the πν. are in the netherworld (cp. En 22:3–13; Sib Or 7, 127) or in the air (PGM 1, 178), where evil spirits can prevent them from ascending higher (s. ἀήρ2b). τοῖς ἐν φυλακῇ πνεύμασιν πορευθεὶς ἐκήρυξεν 1 Pt 3:19 belongs here if it refers to Jesus’ preaching to the spirits of the dead confined in Hades (so Usteri et al.; s. also JMcCulloch, The Harrowing of Hell, 1930), whether it be when he descended into Hades, or when he returned to heaven (so RBultmann, Bekenntnis u. Liedfragmente im 1 Pt: ConNeot11, ’47, 1–14).—CClemen, Niedergefahren zu den Toten 1900; JTurmel, La Descente du Christ aux enfers 1905; JMonnier, La Descente aux enfers 1906; HHoltzmann, ARW 11, 1908, 285–97; KGschwind, Die Niederfahrt Christi in die Unterwelt 1911; DPlooij, De Descensus in 1 Pt 3:19 en 4:6: TT 47, 1913, 145–62; JBernard, The Descent into Hades a Christian Baptism (on 1 Pt 3:19ff): Exp. 8th ser., 11, 1916, 241–74; CSchmidt, Gespräche Jesu mit seinen Jüngern: TU 43, 1919, 452ff; JFrings, BZ 17, 1926, 75–88; JKroll, Gott u. Hölle ’32; RGanschinietz, Katabasis: Pauly-W. X/2, 1919, 2359–449; Clemen² 89–96; WBieder, Die Vorstellung v. d. Höllenfahrt Jesu Chr. ’49; SJohnson, JBL 79, ’60, 48–51; WDalton, Christ’s Proclamation to the Spirits ’65. S. also the lit. in Windisch, Hdb.² 1930, exc. on 1 Pt 3:20; ESelwyn, The First Ep. of St. Peter ’46 and 4c below.—This is prob. also the place for θανατωθεὶς μὲν σαρκὶ ζωοποιηθεὶς δὲ πνεύματι• ἐν ᾧ καὶ … 1 Pt 3:18f (some mss. read πνεύματι instead of πνεύμασιν in vs. 19, evidently in ref. to the manner of Jesus’ movement; πνεῦμα is that part of Christ which, in contrast to σάρξ, did not pass away in death, but survived as an individual entity after death; s. ἐν 7). Likew. the contrast κατὰ σάρκα … κατὰ πνεῦμα Ro 1:3f. Cp. 1 Ti 3:16.

③ a part of human personality, spirit

ⓐ when used with σάρξ, the flesh, it denotes the immaterial part 2 Cor 7:1; Col 2:5. Flesh and spirit=the whole personality, in its outer and inner aspects, oft. in Ign.: IMg 1:2; 13:1a; ITr ins; 12:1; IRo ins; ISm 1:1; IPol 5:1; AcPl Ant 13, 18 (=Aa I 237, 3).—In the same sense beside σῶμα, the body (Simplicius, In Epict. p. 50, 1; Ps.-Phoc. 106f; PGM 1, 178) 1 Cor 5:3–5; 7:34.—The inner life of humans is divided into ψυχὴ καὶ πνεῦμα (cp. Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 10 p. 370c τὶ θεῖον ὄντως ἐνῆν πνεῦμα τῇ ψυχῇ=a divine spirit was actually in the soul; Wsd 15:11; Jos., Ant. 1, 34; Tat. 13, 2; 15, 1 et al.; Ath. 27, 1. S. also Herm. Wr. 10, 13; 16f; PGM 4, 627; 630. ἐκ τριῶν συνεστάναι λέγουσι τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐκ ψυχῆς καὶ σώματος καὶ πνεύματος Did., Gen. 55, 14) Hb 4:12. Cp. Phil 1:27. τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ καὶ τὸ σῶμα 1 Th 5:23 (s. GMilligan, Thess. 1908, 78f; EvDobschütz in Meyer X⁷ 1909, 230ff; EBurton, Spirit, Soul, and Flesh 1918; AFestugière, La Trichotomie des 1 Th 5:23 et la Philos. gr.: RSR 20, 1930, 385–415; CMasson, RTP 33, ’45, 97–102; FGrant, An Introd. to NT Thought ’50, 161–66). σαρκί, ψυχῇ, πνεύματι IPhld 11:2.

ⓑ as the source and seat of insight, feeling, and will, gener. as the representative part of human inner life (cp. PGM 4, 627; 3 Km 20:5; Sir 9:9 al.; Just., D. 30, 1; Did., Gen. 232, 5) ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πν. αὐτοῦ Mk 2:8. ἀναστενάξας τῷ πν. αὐτοῦ λέγει 8:12 (s. ἀναστενάζω). ἠγαλλίασεν τὸ πν. μου Lk 1:47 (in parallelism w. ψυχή vs. 46, as Sir 9:9). ἠγαλλιάσατο τῷ πν. 10:21 v.l., Ἰησοῦς ἐνεβριμήσατο τῷ πν. J 11:33 (s. ἐμβριμάομαι 3); Ἰης. ἐταράχθη τῷ πν. 13:21. παρωξύνετο τὸ πν. αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ Ac 17:16; ζέων τῷ πν. with spirit-fervor 18:25 (s. ζέω). τὸ παιδίον ἐκραταιοῦτο πνεύματι Lk 1:80; 2:40 v.l.; ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ πν. Paul made up his mind Ac 19:21 (some would put this pass. in 6c, but cp. Lk 1:66 and analogous formulations Hom. et al. in L-S-J-M s.v. τίθημι A6). προσκυνήσουσιν τῷ πατρὶ ἐν πνεύματι of the spiritual, i.e. the pure, inner worship of God, that has nothing to do w. holy times, places, appurtenances, or ceremonies J 4:23; cp. vs. 24b. πν. συντετριμμένον (Ps 50:19) 1 Cl 18:17; 52:4.—2 Cl 20:4; Hv 3, 12, 2; 3, 13, 2.—This usage is also found in Paul. His conviction (s. 5 below) that the Christian possesses the (divine) πνεῦμα and thus is different fr. all other people, leads him to choose this word in preference to others, in order to characterize a believer’s inner being gener. ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πν. μου Ro 1:9. οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πν. μου 2 Cor 2:13. Cp. 7:13. As a matter of fact, it can mean simply a person’s very self or ego: τὸ πνεῦμα συμμαρτυρεῖ τῷ πνεύματι ἡμῶν the Spirit (of God) bears witness to our very self Ro 8:16 (cp. PGM 12, 327 ἠκούσθη μου τὸ πνεῦμα ὑπὸ πνεύματος οὐρανοῦ). ἀνέπαυσαν τὸ ἐμὸν πν. καὶ τὸ ὑμῶν they have refreshed both me and you 1 Cor 16:18. ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χρ. μετά τοῦ πν. (ὑμῶν) Gal 6:18; Phil 4:23; Phlm 25. Cp. 2 Ti 4:22. Likew. in Ign. τὸ ἐμὸν πν. my (unworthy) self IEph 18:1; IRo 9:3; cp. 1 Cor 2:11a—On the relation of the divine Spirit to the believer’s spiritual self, s. SWollenweider, Der Geist Gottes als Selbst der Glaubenden: ZTK 93, ’96, 163–92.—Only a part of the inner life, i.e. that which concerns the will, is meant in τὸ μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ ἀσθενής Mt 26:41; Mk 14:38; Pol 7:2. That which is inferior, anxiety, fear of suffering, etc. is attributed to the σάρξ.—The mng. of the expr. οἱ πτωχοὶ τῷ πνεύματι Mt 5:3 is difficult to determine w. certainty (cp. Pla., Ep. 7, 335a πένης ἀνὴρ τὴν ψυχήν. The dat. as τῇ ψυχῇ M. Ant. 6, 52; 8, 51). The sense is prob. those who are poor in their inner life, because they do not have a misdirected pride in their own spiritual riches (s. AKlöpper, Über den Sinn u. die ursprgl. Form der ersten Seligpreisung der Bergpredigt bei Mt: ZWT 37, 1894, 175–91; RKabisch, Die erste Seligpreisung: StKr 69, 1896, 195–215; KKöhler, Die ursprgl. Form der Seligpreisungen: StKr 91, 1918, 157–92; JBoehmer, De Schatkamer 17, 1923, 11–16, TT [Copenhagen] 4, 1924, 195–207, JBL 45, 1926, 298–304; WMacgregor, ET 39, 1928, 293–97; VMacchioro, JR 12, ’32, 40–49; EEvans, Theology 47, ’44, 55–60; HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 134ff; Betz, SM 116 n. 178 for Qumran reff.).

ⓒ spiritual state, state of mind, disposition ἐν ἀγάπῃ πνεύματί τε πραΰτητος with love and a gentle spirit 1 Cor 4:21; cp. Gal 6:1. τὸ πν. τοῦ νοὸς ὑμῶν Eph 4:23 (s. νοῦς 2a). ἐν τῷ ἀφθάρτῳ τοῦ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος with the imperishable (gift) of a quiet disposition 1 Pt 3:4.

④ an independent noncorporeal being, in contrast to a being that can be perceived by the physical senses, spirit (ELangton, Good and Evil Spirits ’42).

ⓐ God personally: πνεῦμα ὁ θεός J 4:24a (Ath. 16, 2; on God as a spirit, esp. in the Stoa, s. MPohlenz, D. Stoa ’48/49. Hdb. ad loc. Also Celsus 6, 71 [Stoic]; Herm. Wr. 18, 3 ἀκάματον μέν ἐστι πνεῦμα ὁ θεός).

ⓑ good, or at least not expressly evil spirits or spirit-beings (cp. CIG III, 5858b δαίμονες καὶ πνεύματα; Proclus on Pla., Cratyl. p. 69, 6; 12 Pasqu.; En 15:4; 6; 8; 10; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 15f [Stone p. 10, 15f] πάντα τὰ ἐπουράνια πνεύματα; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 26 [Stone p. 82] ὑψηλὸν πν.; PGM 3, 8 ἐπικαλοῦμαί σε, ἱερὸν πνεῦμα; 4, 1448; 3080; 12, 249) πνεῦμα w. ἄγγελος (cp. Jos., Ant. 4, 108; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 3, 33; 8, 12) Ac 23:8f. God is ὁ παντὸς πνεύματος κτίστης καὶ ἐπίσκοπος 1 Cl 59:3b.—Pl., God the μόνος εὐεργέτης πνεύματων 1 Cl 59:3a. Cp. 64 (s. on this Num 16:22; 27:16. Prayers for vengeance fr. Rheneia [Dssm., LO 351–55=LAE 423ff=SIG 1181, 2] τὸν θεὸν τὸν κύριον τῶν πνευμάτων; PGM 5, 467 θεὸς θεῶν, ὁ κύριος τῶν πν.; sim. the magic pap PWarr 21, 24; 26 [III A.D.]); the πατὴρ τῶν πνευμάτων Hb 12:9. Intermediary beings (in polytheistic terminology: δαίμονες) that serve God are called λειτουργικὰ πνεύματα Hb 1:14. In Rv we read of the ἑπτὰ πνεύματα (τοῦ θεοῦ) 1:4; 3:1; 4:5; 5:6; s. ASkrinjar, Biblica 16, ’35, 1–24; 113–40.— Ghost Lk 24:37, 39.

ⓒ evil spirits (PGM 13, 798; 36, 160; TestJob 27, 2; ApcSed [both Satan]; AscIs 3:28; Just., D. 39, 6 al.; Ath. 25, 3), esp. in accounts of healing in the Synoptics: (τὸ) πνεῦμα (τὸ) ἀκάθαρτον (Just., D. 82, 3) Mt 12:43; Mk 1:23, 26; 3:30; 5:2, 8; 7:25; 9:25a; Lk 8:29; 9:42; 11:24; Rv 18:2. Pl. (TestBenj 5:2) Mt 10:1; Mk 1:27; 3:11; 5:13; 6:7; Lk 4:36; 6:18; Ac 5:16; 8:7; Rv 16:13; ending of Mk in the Freer ms.—τὸ πν. τὸ πονηρόν Ac 19:15f. Pl. (En 99:7; TestSim 4:9; 6:6, TestJud 16:1; Just., D. 76, 6) Lk 7:21; 8:2; Ac 19:12f.—πν. ἄλαλον Mk 9:17; cp. vs. 25b (s. ἄλαλος). πν. πύθων Ac 16:16 (s. πύθων). πν. ἀσθενείας Lk 13:11. Cp. 1 Ti 4:1b. πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου (s. δαιμόνιον 2) Lk 4:33. πνεύματα δαιμονίων Rv 16:14 (in effect = personified ‘exhalations’ of evil powers; for the combination of πν. and δαιμ. cp. the love spell Sb 4324, 16f τὰ πνεύματα τῶν δαιμόνων τούτων).—Abs. of a harmful spirit Mk 9:20; Lk 9:39; Ac 16:18. Pl. Mt 8:16; 12:45; Lk 10:20; 11:26.—1 Pt 3:19 (s. 2 above) belongs here if the πνεύματα refer to hostile spirit-powers, evil spirits, fallen angels (so FSpitta, Christi Predigt an die Geister 1890; HGunkel, Zum religionsgesch. Verständnis des NT 1903, 72f; WBousset, ZNW 19, 1920, 50–66; Rtzst., Herr der Grösse 1919, 25ff; Knopf, Windisch, FHauck ad loc.; BReicke, The Disobedient Spirits and Christian Baptism ’46, esp. 54–56, 69).—Hermas also has the concept of evil spirits that lead an independent existence, and live and reign within the inner life of a pers.; the Holy Spirit, who also lives or would like to live there, is forced out by them (cp. TestDan 4) Hm 5, 1, 2–4; 5, 2, 5–8; 10, 1, 2. τὸ πν. τὸ ἅγιον … ἕτερον πονηρὸν πν. 5, 1, 2. These πνεύματα are ὀξυχολία 5, 1, 3; 5, 2, 8 (τὸ πονηρότατον πν.); 10, 1, 2; διψυχία 9:11 (ἐπίγειον πν. ἐστι παρὰ τοῦ διαβόλου); 10, 1, 2; λύπη 10, 1, 2 (πάντων τῶν πνευμάτων πονηροτέρα) and other vices. On the complicated pneuma-concept of the Mandates of Hermas s. MDibelius, Hdb. exc. on Hm 5, 2, 7; cp. Leutzsch, Hermas 453f n. 133.

⑤ God’s being as controlling influence, with focus on association with humans, Spirit, spirit as that which differentiates God fr. everything that is not God, as the divine power that produces all divine existence, as the divine element in which all divine life is carried on, as the bearer of every application of the divine will. All those who belong to God possess or receive this spirit and hence have a share in God’s life. This spirit also serves to distinguish Christians fr. all unbelievers (cp. PGM 4, 1121ff, where the spirit is greeted as one who enters devotees and, in accordance w. God’s will, separates them fr. themselves, i.e. fr. the purely human part of their nature); for this latter aspect s. esp. 6 below.

ⓐ the Spirit of God, of the Lord (=God) etc. (LXX; TestSim 4:4; JosAs 8:11; ApcSed 14:6; 15:6; ApcMos 43; SibOr 3, 701; Ps.-Phoc. 106; Philo; Joseph. [s. c below]; apolog. Cp. Plut., Numa 4, 6 πνεῦμα θεοῦ, capable of begetting children; s. παρθένος a) τὸ πν. τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:11b, 14; 3:16; 6:11; 1J 4:2a (Just., D. 49, 3; Tat. 13, 3; Ath. 22, 3). τὸ τοῦ θεοῦ πν. 1 Pt 4:14 (Just., A I, 60, 6). τὸ πν. τὸ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:12b. τὸ πν. κυρίου Ac 5:9; B 6:14; B 9:2 (cp. Mel., P. 32, 222). τὸ πνεῦμά μου or αὐτοῦ: Mt 12:18 (Is 42:1); Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f.—Cp. 1QS 4:21); 1 Cor 2:10a v.l.; Eph 3:16; 1 Th 4:8 (where τὸ ἅγιον is added); 1J 4:13.—τὸ πν. τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν Mt 10:20. τὸ πν. τοῦ ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν Ro 8:11a.—Without the art. πν. θεοῦ (JosAs 4:9; Tat. 15:3; Theoph. Ant. 1, 5 [p. 66, 18]) the Spirit of God Mt 3:16; 12:28; Ro 8:9b, 14, 19; 1 Cor 7:40; 12:3a; 2 Cor 3:3 (πν. θεοῦ ζῶντος); Phil 3:3. πν. κυρίου Lk 4:18 (Is 61:1); Ac 8:39 (like J 3:8; 20:22; Ac 2:4, this pass. belongs on the borderline betw. the mngs. ‘wind’ and ‘spirit’; cp. Diod S 3, 60, 3 Ἕσπερον ἐξαίφνης ὑπὸ πνευμάτων συναρπαγέντα μεγάλων ἄφαντον γενέσθαι ‘Hesperus [a son of Atlas] was suddenly snatched by strong winds and vanished fr. sight’. S. HLeisegang, Der Hl. Geist I 1, 1919, 19ff; OCullmann, TZ. 4, ’48, 364); 1 Cl 21:2.

ⓑ the Spirit of Christ, of the Lord (=Christ) etc. τὸ πν. Ἰησοῦ Ac 16:7. τὸ πν. Χριστοῦ AcPlCor 2:32. τὸ ἐν αὐτοῖς πν. Χριστοῦ 1 Pt 1:11. πν. Χριστοῦ Ro 8:9c. πν. τοῦ Χριστοῦ AcPl Ha 8, 18. ἀπὸ τοῦ πν. τοῦ χριστοῦ AcPlCor 2:10. τὸ πν. Ἰης. Χριστοῦ Phil 1:19. τὸ πν. κυρίου 2 Cor 3:17b (JHermann, Kyrios und Pneuma, ’61). τὸ πν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ (=θεοῦ) Gal 4:6. As possessor of the divine Spirit, and at the same time controlling its distribution among humans, Christ is called κύριος πνεύματος Lord of the Spirit 2 Cor 3:18 (s. Windisch ad loc.); but many prefer to transl. from the Lord who is the Spirit.—CMoule, OCullmann Festschr., ’72, 231–37.

ⓒ Because of its heavenly origin and nature this Spirit is called (the) Holy Spirit (cp. PGM 4, 510 ἵνα πνεύσῃ ἐν ἐμοὶ τὸ ἱερὸν πνεῦμα.—Neither Philo nor Josephus called the Spirit πν. ἅγιον; the former used θεῖον or θεοῦ πν., the latter πν. θεῖον: Ant. 4, 118; 8, 408; 10, 239; but ἅγιον πνεῦμα Orig. C. Cels 1, 40, 16).

α. w. the art. τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον (Is 63:10f; Ps 50:13; 142:10 v.l.; cp. Sus 45 Theod.; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 10 [Stone p. 10]; JosAs 8:11 [codd. ADE]; AscIs 3, 15, 26; Just., D. 36, 6 al.) Mt 12:32 = Mk 3:29 = Lk 12:10 (τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα; on the ‘sin against the Holy Spirit’ s. HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 96–112; AFridrichsen, Le péché contre le Saint-Esprit: RHPR 3, 1923, 367–72). Mk 12:36; 13:11; Lk 2:26; 3:22; 10:21; J 14:26; Ac 1:16; 2:33; 5:3, 32; 7:51; 8:18 v.l.; 10:44, 47; 11:15; 13:2; 15:8, 28; 19:6; 20:23, 28; 21:11; 28:25; Eph 1:13 (τὸ πν. τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τὸ ἅγιον); 4:30 (τὸ πν. τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ); Hb 3:7; 9:8; 10:15; 1 Cl 13:1; 16:2; 18:11 (Ps 50:13); 22:1; IEph 9:1; Hs 5, 5, 2; 5, 6, 5–7 (on the relationship of the Holy Spirit to the Son in Hermas s. ALink, Christi Person u. Werk im Hirten des Hermas 1886; JvWalter, ZNW 14, 1913, 133–44; MDibelius, Hdb. exc. following Hs 5, 6, 8 p. 572–76).—τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα (Wsd 9:17; OdeSol 11:2; TestJob 51:2; ApcEsdr 7:16; Just. D. 25, 1 al.) Mt 28:19; Lk 12:10 (s. above), 12; Ac 1:8; 2:38 (epexegetic gen.); 4:31; 9:31; 10:45; 13:4; 16:6; 1 Cor 6:19; 2 Cor 13:13; 1J 5:7 v.l. (on the Comma Johanneum s. λόγο 3); GJs 24:4 (s. χρηματίζω 1bα). As the mother of Jesus GHb 20, 61 (HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 64ff; SHirsch, D. Vorstellg. v. e. weibl. πνεῦμα ἅγ. im NT u. in d. ältesten christl. Lit. 1927. Also WBousset, Hauptprobleme der Gnosis 1907, 9ff).

β. without the art. (s. B-D-F §257, 2; Rob. 761; 795) πνεῦμα ἅγιον (PGM 3, 289; Da 5:12 LXX; PsSol 17:37; AssMos Fgm. b; Just., D. 4, 1 al.; Ath. 24, 1. S. also Da Theod. 4:8, 9, 18 θεοῦ πνεῦμα ἅγιον or πνεῦμα θεοῦ ἅγιον) Mk 1:8; Lk 1:15, 35, 41, 67; 2:25; 4:1; 11:13; J 20:22 (Cassien, La pentecôte johannique [J 20:19–23] ’39.—See also 1QS 4:20f); Ac 2:4a; 4:8; 7:55; 8:15, 17, 19; 9:17; 10:38; 11:24; 13:9; 19:2ab; Hb 2:4; 6:4; 1 Pt 1:12 v.l.; 1 Cl 2:2; AcPl 6:18; 9:4 (restored after Aa I 110, 11); AcPlCor 2:5.—So oft. in combination w. a prep.: διὰ πνεύματος ἁγίου Ac 1:2; 4:25; Ro 5:5; 2 Ti 1:14; 1 Cl 8:1 (cp. διὰ πν. αἰωνίου Hb 9:14). διὰ φωνῆς πν. ἁγίου AcPl Ha 11, 6. ἐκ πνεύματος ἁγίου (Eus., PE 3, 12, 3 of the Egyptians: ἐκ τ. πνεύματος οἴονται συλλαμβάνειν τὸν γῦπα. Here πνεῦμα= ‘wind’; s. Horapollo 1, 11 p. 14f. The same of other birds since Aristot.—On the neut. πνεῦμα as a masc. principle cp. Aristoxenus, Fgm. 13 of the two original principles: πατέρα μὲν φῶς, μητέρα δὲ σκότος) Mt 1:18, 20; IEph 18:2; GJs 14:2; 19:1 (pap). ἐν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ (PsSol 17:37; ApcZeph; Ar. 15, 1) Mt 3:11; Mk 1:8 v.l.; Lk 3:16; J 1:33b; Ac 1:5 (cp. 1QS 3:7f); 11:16; Ro 9:1; 14:17; 15:16; 1 Cor 12:3b; 2 Cor 6:6; 1 Th 1:5; 1 Pt 1:12 (without ἐν v.l.); Jd 20. ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου 2 Pt 1:21. Cp. ἐν δυνάμει πνεύματος ἁγίου Ro 15:13, 19 v.l. (for πνεύματος θεοῦ). μετὰ χαρᾶς πνεύματος ἁγίου 1 Th 1:6. διὰ ἀνακαινώσεως πνεύματος ἁγίου Tit 3:5.

ⓓ abs.

α. w. the art. τὸ πνεῦμα. In this connection the art. is perh. used anaphorically at times, w. the second mention of a word (s. B-D-F §252; Rob. 762); perh. Mt 12:31 (looking back to vs. 28 πν. θεοῦ); Mk 1:10, 12 (cp. vs. 8 πν. ἅγιον); Lk 4:1b, 14 (cp. vs. 1a); Ac 2:4b (cp. vs. 4a).—As a rule it is not possible to assume that anaphora is present: Mt 4:1; J 1:32, 33a; 3:6a, 8b (in wordplay), 34; 7:39a; Ac 8:29; 10:19; 11:12, 28; 19:1 D; 20:3 D, 22; 21:4; Ro 8:23 (ἀπαρχή 1bβ; 2), 26a, 27; 12:11; 15:30; 2 Cor 1:22 and 5:5 (KErlemann, ZNW 83, ’92, 202–23, and s. ἀρραβών); 12:18 (τῷ αὐτῷ πν.); Gal 3:2, 5, 14 (ἐπαγγελία 1bβ); Eph 4:3 (gen. of the author); 6:17 (perh. epexegetic gen.); 1 Ti 4:1a; Js 4:5; 1J 3:24; 5:6ab (some mss. add καὶ πνεύματος to the words διʼ ὕδατος κ. αἵματος at the beg. of the verse; this is approved by HvSoden, Moffatt, Vogels, Merk, and w. reservations by CDodd, The Joh. Epistles ’46, TManson, JTS 48, ’47, 25–33), vs. 8; Rv 2:7, 11, 17, 29; 3:6, 13, 22; 14:13; 22:17; B 19:2, B 7= D 4:10 (s. ἐτοιμάζω b). ἐν τῷ πνεύματι (led) by the Spirit Lk 2:27.—Paul links this Spirit of God, known to every Christian, with Christ as liberating agent in contrast to legal constraint ὁ κύριος τὸ πνεῦμα ἐστιν the Lord means Spirit 2 Cor 3:17a (UHolzmeister, 2 Cor 3:17 Dominus autem Spiritus est 1908; JNisius, Zur Erklärung v. 2 Cor 3:16ff: ZKT 40, 1916, 617–75; JKögel, Ὁ κύριος τὸ πνεῦμά ἐστιν: ASchlatter Festschr. 1922, 35–46; C Guignebert, Congr. d’Hist. du Christ. II 1928, 7–22; EFuchs, Christus u. d. Geist b. Pls ’32; HHughes, ET 45, ’34, 235f; CLattey, Verb. Dom. 20, ’40, 187–89; DGriffiths ET 55, ’43, 81–83; HIngo, Kyrios und Pneuma, ’61 [Paul]; JDunn, JTS 21, ’70, 309–20).

β. without the art. πνεῦμα B 1:3. κοινωνία πνεύματος Phil 2:1 (κοινωνία 1 and 2). πνεύματι in the Spirit or through the Spirit Gal 3:3; 5:5, 16, 18; 1 Pt 4:6. εἰ ζῶμεν πνεύματι, πνεύματι καὶ στοιχῶμεν if we live by the Spirit, let us also walk by the Spirit Gal 5:25. Freq. used w. a prep.: διὰ πνεύματος 1 Pt 1:22 v.l. ἐξ (ὕδατος καὶ) πνεύματος J 3:5. ἐν πνεύματι in, by, through the Spirit Mt 22:43; Eph 2:22; 3:5; 5:18; 6:18; Col 1:8 (ἀγάπη ἐν πνεύματι love called forth by the Spirit); B 9:7. κατὰ πνεῦμα Ro 8:4f; Gal 4:29. ἐν ἁγιασμῷ πνεύματος 2 Th 2:13; 1 Pt 1:2 (s. ἁγιασμός).—In neg. expressions: οὔπω ἧν πνεῦμα the Spirit had not yet come J 7:39b. ψυχικοὶ πνεῦμα μὴ ἔχοντες worldly people, who do not have the Spirit Jd 19.—ἓν πνεῦμα one and the same Spirit 1 Cor 12:13; Eph 2:18; 4:4; one (in) Spirit 1 Cor 6:17.

ⓔ The Spirit is more closely defined by a gen. of thing: τὸ πν. τῆς ἀληθείας (TestJud 20:5) J 14:17; 15:26; 16:13 (in these three places the Spirit of Truth is the Paraclete promised by Jesus upon his departure); 1J 4:6 (opp. τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πλάνης, as TestJud 20:1; PsSol 8:14 πλ. πλανήσεως; Just., D. 7, 3 πλάνου καὶ ἀκαθάρτου πνεύματος; cp. 1QS 4:23); τὸ τῆς δόξης πν. 1 Pt 4:14. τὸ πν. τῆς ζωῆς the Spirit of life Ro 8:2. το πν. τῆς πίστεως 2 Cor 4:13. πν. σοφίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως Eph 1:17 (cp. Just., D. 87, 4). πν. υἱοθεσίας Ro 8:15b (opp. πν. δουλείας vs. 15a). πν. δυνάμεως AcPl Ha 8, 25. πν. δυνάμεως καὶ ἀγάπης καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 2 Ti 1:7 (opp. πν. δειλίας). τὸ πν. τῆς χάριτος (s. TestJud 24:2) Hb 10:29 (Zech 12:10); cp. 1 Cl 46:6.

ⓕ Of Christ ‘it is written’ in Scripture: (ἐγένετο) ὁ ἔσχατος Ἀδὰμ εἰς πνεῦμα ζῳοποιοῦν 1 Cor 15:45. The scripture pass. upon which the first part of this verse is based is Gen 2:7, where Wsd 15:11 also substitutes the words πνεῦμα ζωτικόν for πνοὴν ζωῆς (cp. Just., D. 6, 2). On the other hand, s. Philo, Leg. All. 1, 42 and s. the lit. s.v. Ἀδάμ ad loc.

ⓖ The (divine) Pneuma stands in contrast to everything that characterizes this age or the finite world gener.: οὐ τὸ πν. τοῦ κόσμου ἀλλὰ τὸ πν. τὸ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:12; cp. Eph 2:2 and 1 Ti 4:1ab.

α. in contrast to σάρξ, which is more closely connected w. sin than any other earthly material (Just., D. 135, 6): J 3:6; Ro 8:4–6, 9a, 13; Gal 3:3; 5:17ab; 6:8. Cp. B 10:9. πᾶσα ἐπιθυμία κατὰ τοῦ πνεύματος στρατεύεται Pol 5:3.

β. in contrast to σῶμα (=σάρξ) Ro 8:10 and to σάρξ (=σῶμα, as many hold) J 6:63a (for τὸ πν. ἐστιν τὸ ζῳοποιοῦν cp. Philo, Op. Mund. 30; Herm. Wr. in Cyrill., C. Jul. I 556c=542, 24 Sc. the pneuma τὰ πάντα ζῳοποιεῖ καὶ τρέφει. S. also f above). Cp. Ro 8:11b.

γ. in contrast to γράμμα, which is the characteristic quality of God’s older declaration of the divine will in the law: Ro 2:29; 7:6; 2 Cor 3:6ab, 8 (cp. vs. 7).

δ. in contrast to the wisdom of humans 1 Cor 2:13.

⑥ the Spirit of God as exhibited in the character or activity of God’s people or selected agents, Spirit, spirit (s. HPreisker, Geist u. Leben ’33).

ⓐ πνεῦμα is accompanied by another noun, which characterizes the working of the Spirit more definitely: πνεῦμα καὶ δύναμις spirit and power Lk 1:17; 1 Cor 2:4. Cp. Ac 10:38; 1 Th 1:5. πνεῦμα καὶ ζωή J 6:63b. πνεῦμα κ. σοφία Ac 6:3; cp. vs. 10 (cp. TestReub 2:6 πνεῦμα λαλίας). πίστις κ. πνεῦμα ἅγιον 6:5 (cp. Just., D. 135, 6). χαρὰ καὶ πνεῦμα ἅγ. 13:52.

ⓑ Unless frustrated by humans in their natural condition, the Spirit of God produces a spiritual type of conduct Gal 5:16, 25 and produces the καρπὸς τοῦ πνεύματος vs. 22 (s. Vögtle under πλεονεξία).

ⓒ The Spirit inspires certain people of God B 12:2; B 13:5, above all, in their capacity as proclaimers of a divine revelation (Strabo 9, 3, 5 the πνεῦμα ἐνθουσιαστικόν, that inspired the Pythia; Περὶ ὕψους 13, 2; 33, 5 of the divine πν. that impels prophets and poets to express themselves; schol. on Pla. 856e of a μάντις: ἄνωθεν λαμβάνειν τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ πληροῦσθαι τοῦ θεοῦ; Aristobulus in Eus., PE 8, 10, 4 [=Fgm. 2, 4 p. 136 Holladay] τὸ θεῖον πν., καθʼ ὸ̔ καὶ προφήτης ἀνακεκήρυκται ‘[Moses possessed] the Divine Spirit with the result that he was proclaimed a prophet’; AscIs 1:7 τὸ πν. τὸ λαλοῦν ἐν ἐμοί; AssMos Fgm. f εἶδεν πνεύματι ἐπαρθείς; Just., A I, 38, 1 al.; Ath. 10, 3 τὸ προφητικὸν πν. Cp. Marinus, Vi. Procli 23 of Proclus: οὐ γὰρ ἄνευ θείας ἐπινοίας … διαλέγεσθαι; Orig., C. Cels. 3, 28, 23). προφητεία came into being only as ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου φερόμενοι ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι 2 Pt 1:21; cp. Ac 15:29 v.l.; cp. 1 Cl 8:1. David Mt 22:43; Mk 12:36; cp. Ac 1:16; 4:25. Isaiah Ac 28:25. Moses B 10:2, B 9; the Spirit was also active in giving the tables of the law to Moses 14:2. Christ himself spoke in the OT διὰ τοῦ πνεύματος τοῦ ἁγίου 1 Cl 22:1. The ἱεραὶ γραφαί are called αἱ διὰ τοῦ πν. τοῦ ἁγίου 45:2.—The Christian prophet Agabus also ἐσήμαινεν διὰ τοῦ πν. Ac 11:28; cp. Ac 21:11. Likew. Ign. IPhld 7:2. In general the Spirit reveals the most profound secrets to those who believe 1 Cor 2:10ab.—1 Cl claims to be written διὰ τοῦ ἁγ. πν. 63:2. On Ac 19:21 s. 3b.

ⓓ The Spirit of God, being one, shows the variety and richness of its life in the different kinds of spiritual gifts which are granted to certain Christians 1 Cor 12:4, 7, 11; cp. vs. 13ab.—Vss. 8–10 enumerate the individual gifts of the Spirit, using various prepositions: διὰ τοὺ πν. vs. 8a; κατὰ τὸ πν. vs. 8b; ἐν τῷ πν. vs. 9ab. τὸ πν. μὴ σβέννυτε do not quench the Spirit 1 Th 5:19 refers to the gift of prophecy, acc. to vs. 20.—The use of the pl. πνεύματα is explained in 1 Cor 14:12 by the varied nature of the Spirit’s working; in vs. 32 by the number of persons who possess the prophetic spirit; on the latter s. Rv 22:6 and 19:10.

ⓔ One special type of spiritual gift is represented by ecstatic speaking. Of those who ‘speak in tongues’ that no earthly person can understand: πνεύματι λαλεῖ μυστήρια expresses secret things in a spiritual way 1 Cor 14:2. Cp. vss. 14–16 and s. νοῦς 1b. τὸ πνεῦμα ὑπερεντυγχάνει στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις the Spirit pleads in our behalf with groans beyond words Ro 8:26b. Of speech that is ecstatic, but expressed in words that can be understood λαλεῖν ἐν πνεύματι D 11:7, 8; cp. vs. 9 (on the subject-matter 1 Cor 12:3; Jos., Ant. 4, 118f; TestJob 43:2 ἀναλαβὼν Ἐλιφᾶς πν. εἶπεν ὕμνον). Of the state of mind of the seer of the Apocalypse: ἐν πνεύματι Rv 17:3; 21:10; γενέσθαι ἐν πν. 1:10; 4:2 (s. γίνομαι 5c, ἐν 4c and EMoering, StKr 92, 1920, 148–54; RJeske, NTS 31, ’85, 452–66); AcPl Ha 6, 27. On the Spirit at Pentecost Ac 2:4 s. KLake: Beginn. I 5, ’33, 111–21. κατασταλέντος τοῦ πν. τοῦ ἐν Μύρτῃ when the Spirit (of prophecy) that was in Myrta ceased speaking AcPl Ha 7, 9.

ⓕ The Spirit leads and directs Christian missionaries in their journeys (Aelian, NA 11, 16 the young women are led blindfolded to the cave of the holy serpent; they are guided by a πνεῦμα θεῖον) Ac 16:6, 7 (by dreams, among other methods; cp. vs. 9f and s. Marinus, Vi. Procli 27: Proclus ἔφασκεν προθυμηθῆναι μὲν πολλάκις γράψαι, κωλυθῆναι δὲ ἐναργῶς ἔκ τινων ἐνυπνίων). In Ac 16:6–7 τὸ ἅγιον πν. and τὸ πν. Ἰησοῦ are distinguished.

⑦ an activating spirit that is not fr. God, spirit: πν. ἔτερον a different (kind of) spirit 2 Cor 11:4. Cp. 2 Th 2:2; 1J 4:1–3. Because there are persons activated by such spirits, it is necessary to test the var. kinds of spirits (the same problem Artem. 3, 20 περὶ διαφορᾶς μάντεων, οἷς δεῖ προσέχειν καὶ οἷς μή) 1 Cor 12:10; 1J 4:1b. ὁ διάβολος πληροῖ αὐτὸν αὐτοῦ πν. Hm 11:3. Also οὐκ οἴδατε ποίου πνεύματός ἐστε Lk 9:55 v.l. distinguishes betw. the spirit shown by Jesus’ disciples, and another kind of spirit.—Even more rarely a spirit divinely given that is not God’s own; so (in a quot. fr. Is 29:10) a πνεῦμα κατανύξεως Ro 11:8.

⑧ an independent transcendent personality, the Spirit, which appears in formulas that became more and more fixed and distinct (cp. Ath. 12, 2; Hippol., Ref. 7, 26, 2.—Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 12 θεόν, υἱόν πατρός, πνεῦμα ἐκ πατρὸς ἐκπορευόμενον ἓν ἐκ τριῶν καὶ ἐξ ἑνὸς τρία, ταῦτα νόμιζε Ζῆνα, τόνδʼ ἡγοῦ θεόν=‘God, son of the father, spirit proceeding from the father, one from three and three from one, consider these as Zeus, think of this one as God’. The entire context bears a Christian impress.—As Aion in gnostic speculation Iren. 1, 2, 5 [Harv. I 21, 2]): βαπτίζοντες αὐτοὺς εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ πατρὸς καὶ τοῦ υἱοῦ καὶ τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος Mt 28:19 (on the text s. βαπτίζω 2c; on the subject-matter GWalther, Die Entstehung des Taufsymbols aus dem Taufritus: StKr 95, 1924, 256ff); D 7:1, 3. Cp. 2 Cor 13:13; 1 Cl 58:2; IEph 9:1; IMg 13:1b, 2; MPol 14:3; 22:1, 3; Epil Mosq 5. On this s. HUsener, Dreiheit: RhM 58, 1903, 1ff; 161ff; 321ff; esp. 36ff; EvDobschütz, Zwei-u. dreigliedrige Formeln: JBL 50, ’31, 116–47 (also Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 92–100); Norden, Agn. Th. 228ff; JMainz, Die Bed. der Dreizahl im Judentum 1922; Clemen² 125–28; NSöderblom, Vater, Sohn u. Geist 1909; DNielsen, Der dreieinige Gott I 1922; GKrüger, Das Dogma v. der Dreieinigkeit 1905, 46ff; AHarnack, Entstehung u. Entwicklung der Kirchenverfassung 1910, 187ff; JHaussleiter, Trinitarischer Glaube u. Christusbekenntnis in der alten Kirche: BFCT XXV 4, 1920; JLebreton, Histoire du dogme de la Trinité I: Les origines⁶ 1927; RBlümel, Pls u. d. dreieinige Gott 1929.—On the whole word FRüsche, D. Seelenpneuma ’33; HLeisegang, Der Hl. Geist I 1, 1919; EBurton, ICC Gal 1921, 486–95; PVolz, Der Geist Gottes u. d. verwandten Erscheinungen im AT 1910; JHehn, Zum Problem des Geistes im alten Orient u. im AT: ZAW n.s. 2, 1925, 210–25; SLinder, Studier till Gamla Testamentets föreställningar om anden 1926; AMarmorstein, Der Hl. Geist in der rabb. Legende: ARW 28, 1930, 286–303; NSnaith, The Distinctive Ideas of the OT ’46, 229–37; FDillistone, Bibl. Doctrine of the Holy Spirit: Theology Today 3, ’46/47, 486–97; TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 341–46; ESchweizer, CDodd Festschr., ’56, 482–508; DLys, Rûach, Le Souffle dans l’AT, ’62; DHill, Gk. Words and Hebr. Mngs. ’67, 202–93.—HGunkel, Die Wirkungen des Hl. Geistes² 1899; HWeinel, Die Wirkungen des Geistes u. der Geister im nachap. Zeitalter 1899; EWinstanley, The Spirit in the NT 1908; HSwete, The Holy Spirit in the NT 1909, The Holy Spirit in the Ancient Church 1912; EScott, The Spirit in the NT 1923; FBüchsel, Der Geist Gottes im NT 1926; EvDobschütz, Der Geistbesitz des Christen im Urchristentum: Monatsschr. für Pastoral-theol. 20, 1924, 228ff; FBadcock, ‘The Spirit’ and Spirit in the NT: ET 45, ’34, 218–21; RBultmann, Theologie des NT ’48, 151–62 (Eng. tr. KGrobel, ’51, I 153–64); ESchweizer, Geist u. Gemeinde im NT ’52, Int 6, ’52, 259–78.—WTosetti, Der Hl. Geist als göttliche Pers. in den Evangelien 1918; HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion. Der Ursprung des Geistbegriffs der Syn. Ev. aus der griech. Mystik 1922; AFrövig, Das Sendungsbewusstsein Jesu u. der Geist 1924; HWindisch, Jes. u. d. Geist nach Syn. Überl.: Studies in Early Christianity, presented to FCPorter and BWBacon 1928, 209–36; FSynge, The Holy Spirit in the Gospels and Acts: CQR 120, ’35, 205–17; CBarrett, The Holy Spirit and the Gospel Trad. ’47.—ESokolowski, Die Begriffe Geist u. Leben bei Pls 1903; KDeissner, Auferstehungshoffnung u. Pneumagedanke bei Pls 1912; GVos, The Eschatological Aspect of the Pauline Conception of the Spirit: Bibl. and Theol. Studies by the Faculty of Princeton Theol. Sem. 1912, 209–59; HBertrams, Das Wesen des Geistes nach d. Anschauung des Ap. Pls 1913; WReinhard, Das Wirken des Hl. Geistes im Menschen nach den Briefen des Ap. Pls 1918; HHoyle, The Holy Spirit in St. Paul 1928; PGächter, Z. Pneumabegriff des hl. Pls: ZKT 53, 1929, 345–408; ASchweitzer, D. Mystik des Ap. Pls 1930, 159–74 al. [Mysticism of Paul the Apostle, tr. WMontgomery ’31, 160–76 al.]; E-BAllo, RB 43, ’34, 321–46 [1 Cor]; Ltzm., Hdb. exc. after Ro 8:11; Synge [s. above], CQR 119, ’35, 79–93 [Pauline epp.]; NWaaning, Onderzoek naar het gebruik van πνεῦμα bij Pls, diss. Amsterd. ’39; RJewett, Paul’s Anthropological Terms, ’71, 167–200.—HvBaer, Der Hl. Geist in den Lukasschriften 1926; MGoguel, La Notion joh. de l’Esprit 1902; JSimpson, The Holy Spirit in the Fourth Gospel: Exp., 9th ser., 4, 1925, 292–99; HWindisch, Jes. u. d. Geist im J.: Amicitiae Corolla (RHarris Festschr.) ’33, 303–18; WLofthouse, The Holy Spirit in Ac and J: ET 52, ’40/41, 334–36; CBarrett, The Holy Spirit in the Fourth Gospel: JTS 1 n.s., ’50, 1–15; FCrump, Pneuma in the Gospels, diss. Catholic Univ. of America, ’54; GLampe, Studies in the Gospels (RHLightfoot memorial vol.) ’55, 159–200; NHamilton, The Holy Spirit and Eschatology in Paul, ’57; WDavies, Paul and the Dead Sea Scrolls, Flesh and Spirit: The Scrolls and the NT, ed. KStendahl, ’57, 157–82.—GJohnston, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Holy Spirit’ in the Qumran Lit.: NT Sidelights (ACPurdy Festschr.) ’60, 27–42; JPryke, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Flesh’ in Qumran and NT, RevQ 5, ’65, 346–60; HBraun, Qumran und d. NT II, ’66, 150–64; DHill, Greek Words and Hebrew Meanings, ’67, 202–93; WBieder, Pneumatolog. Aspekte im Hb, OCullmann Festschr. ’72, 251–59; KEasley, The Pauline Usage of πνεύματι as a Reference to the Spirit of God: JETS 27, ’84, 299–313 (statistics).—B. 260; 1087. Pauly-W. XIV 387–412. BHHW I 534–37. Schmidt, Syn. II 218–50. New Docs 4, 38f. DELG s.v. πνέω. M-M. Dict. de la Bible XI 126–398. EDNT. TW. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πνεῦμα
74 εἰμί

εἰμί (

A sum), [dialect] Aeol. [full] ἔμμι Sapph.2.15, Theoc.20.32; Cret. [full] ἠμί GDI 4959a; [ per.] 2sg. εἶ, [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion. εἰς Od.17.388
, al., [dialect] Aeol. ἔσσι, [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Dor. ἐσσί Il.1.176
, Pi.O.6.90, Sophr.134; ἐσί GDI4959a
; [ per.] 3sg. ἐστί, [dialect] Dor. ἐντί IG12(1).677
([place name] Rhodes), Theoc.1.17, etc.; [ per.] 3 dual ἐστόν Th.3.112
; [ per.] 1pl. ἐσμέν, [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion. εἰμέν (also in Pi.P.3.60), ἐμέν Call.Fr. 294
, [dialect] Dor. εἰμές Theoc.15.73
, but ἠμέν GDI5178.34
; [ per.] 3pl. εἰσί ([etym.] - ίν), [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion. ἔασι ([etym.] - ιν) Il.7.73, Xenoph.8.1, Antim.29, Herod.4.84, [dialect] Dor. ἐντί Pi.N.1.24
, Theoc.11.45, IG9(1).32.22 ([place name] Phocis), etc.: imper. ἴσθι ( ἔσθι Hecat.361
J.), [dialect] Ep. and Lyr. also in [voice] Med. form ἔσσο Od.3.200
, Sapph.1.28, Maced.Pae.31, late Prose ἔσο Plu.2.241d
, M.Ant.3.5, Hld.5.12, Porph.Marc.34; [ per.] 3sg. ἔστω ( ἤτω LXXPs.103.31
, and late Inscrr., CIG2664, al.; but in Pl.R. 361c leg. ἴτω), [dialect] Dor. εἴτω, ἤτω, Heraclid. ap. Eust.1411.21, Elean ἤστω Schwyzer 424
; [ per.] 3pl. ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων Hom.
, Pl.R. 502a, ὄντων Id.Lg. 879b
, and early [dialect] Att. Inscrr., IG12.22, etc. ( ἔστωσαν first in ii B. C., ib.22.1328), [dialect] Dor. ἐόντων ib.1126: subj. ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, [dialect] Ep. ἔω Od.9.18
; [ per.] 3sg. ἔῃ Il.12.300
,al. (also ἔῃσι 2.366
, al., ᾖσι ([etym.] ν) 19.202, Hes.Op. 294), also [dialect] Boeot. ἔνθω IG7.3172.165
, μετείω Il.23.47
and perh. εἴῃ 9.245
, etc.; [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 3pl. ὦντι SIG940.3
([place name] Crete), ἔωντι GDI5040.14
([place name] Hierapytna), [dialect] Boeot. ἴωνθι IG7.3171.46
(iii B. C.): opt. εἴην, -ης ( εἴησθα Thgn.715
), -η, also ἔοις, ἔοι, Il.9.284, 142, al., cf. Hdt.7.6; [ per.] 3pl. εἴοισαν Ἀρχ. Ἐφ. 1911.133
([place name] Gonni); [ per.] 3 dual εἴτην Pl. Prm. 149e
, Sph. 243e; [ per.] 1pl. εἶμεν E.Alc. 921
(lyr.), Pl.; [ per.] 2pl. εἶτε Od. 21.195
; [ per.] 3pl. εἶεν Il.2.372
, etc., εἴησαν Hdt.1.2
, etc.; Elean ἔα, = εἴη, SIG9 (vi B. C.), and σύν-εαν, = συνεῖεν, GDI 1149 (vi B. C.): inf. εἶναι, Arc. ἦναι SIG306.9
(Tegea, iv B. C.); [dialect] Ep. ἔμμεναι (also [dialect] Aeol. ἔμμεν' Sapph.34
), ἔμμεν (also Pi.P.6.42, S.Ant. 623 (lyr.)), ἔμεναι, ἔμεν, also ἔμειν SIG1166
([place name] Dodona); [dialect] Dor. εἶμεν Foed. ap. Th.5.77,79, IG7.1.7 ([place name] Megara), ἦμεν Test.Epict.5.16
, Tab.Heracl.1.75, Cret. ἦμεν or ἤμην Leg.Gort.1.15
, al., GDI4998i 2, al., Megar. εἴμεναι Ar.Ach. 775
, εἴμειν IG12(1).155.100
([place name] Rhodes), 14.952 ([place name] Agrigentum); εἶν ib. 12(9).211.10 ([place name] Eretria), SIG135.4 ([place name] Olynthus), etc.: part. ὤν, [dialect] Ep. ἐών, ἐοῦσα, ἐόν, Cypr. ἰών Inscr.Cypr.135.23
H.; [dialect] Boeot. fem. ἰῶσα IG 7.3172.116
(Orchom.), [dialect] Aeol. and [dialect] Dor. fem. ἔσσα Sapph.75.4
, IG4.952.2 (Epid.), Theoc.28.16, ἐοῖσα Pi.P.4.265
, ἔασσα Lyr.Alex.Adesp. 9
, Diotog. ap. Stob.4.7.62, εὖσα Erinn.5.5
(also [dialect] Ion., Herod.5.16, εὔντων 2.85
), ἐᾶσα Ti.Locr.96d
, IG5(1).1470.8 ([place name] Messene), ἴαττα Leg.Gort.8.47
; acc. sg. εὖντα Theoc.2.3
; nom. sg. εἴς in Heraclid. ap. Eust.1756.13, pl. ἔντες Tab.Heracl.1.117
; dat. pl. ἔντασσι ib.104; gen. pl. παρ-έντων Alcm. 64
: [tense] impf. ἦν Il.2.77
, etc., [dialect] Ep. ἔον (also [dialect] Aeol., Alc.127, Sapph.Oxy. 1787 Fr.3 ii 21), in [dialect] Att. ἦ (dub. in [dialect] Aeol., Alc. Supp.14.9), Ar.Pl.77, Pl.Phd. 61b, etc., but usu. altered to ἦν in codd. (and ἦν is required by metre in E. Ion 280), [var] contr. from [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion. ἦα (Il.5.808, al., IG12(8).449.2 ([place name] Thasos), whence Hom.and later [dialect] Ion. ἔᾱ Il.4.321
, al., ἔας Hdt.1.187
, ἔατε Id.4.119
); [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3sg. ἦεν, always with ν in Hom.; ἔην as [ per.] 1sg., only Il.11.762 (s. v.l., al. ἔον), freq. as [ per.] 3sg. (generally before a consonant, so that ἔεν is possible), sts. also ἤην; [ per.] 2sg. ἦσθα, later ἦς (wh. is v.l. in Pi.I.1.26), sts. in LXX (Jd. 11.35, Ru.3.2,al.), cf. Pl.Ax. 365e, Erinn.4.4, Ev.Matt.25.21, al., ἦσθας Men.Epit. 156
, [dialect] Ep. ἔησθα; [ per.] 3sg. ἦν, [dialect] Ep. ἔην, ἤην, ἦεν (v. supr.), [dialect] Dor. and [dialect] Aeol. ἦς Alc.Supp.30.1
, Epich.102, Sophr.59, Theoc.2.90, SIG241.145 (Delph.); [ per.] 3 dual ἤστην Il.5.10
, E.Hipp. 387, Ar.Eq. 982, Pl.Euthd. 272a, al.; [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 1pl. ἦμες Plu.Lyc.21
; [ per.] 2pl. ἦτε Pl.Euthd. 276c
, ἦστε Ar. Pax 821
, Ec. 1086; [ per.] 3pl. ἦσαν, [dialect] Ion. and Poet. ἔσαν (in Hes.Th. 321, 825, ἦν is not pl. for ἦσαν, but is rather a peculiarity of syntax, v. infr. v, but is [ per.] 3pl. in Epich.46, al., SIG560.15 (Epidamnus, iii B. C.)); [dialect] Aeol. ἔον Schwyzer 644.12
; later ἤμην PSI4.362.21
(iii B. C.), SIG527.46 (Crete, iii B. C.), IGRom.4.1740 ([place name] Cyme), always in LXX as Ba.1.19, cf. Ev.Matt.23.30, Plu.2.174a, etc., and sts. in codd. of earlier writers, Lys.7.34, Trag.Adesp. 124 (cited from E. Hel. 931 by Choerob. and from Id.Tr. 474 by Aps.), X.Cyr.6.1.9, Hyp.Ath.26, [ per.] 2sg. ἦσο Epigr.Gr.379
([place name] Aezani), [ per.] 3sg. ἦστο Supp.Epigr. 1.455.7
([place name] Phrygia), [ per.] 1pl. ἤμεθα PPetr.2p.11
(iii B. C.), LXX Ba.1.19, 1 Ki.25.16, Ep.Eph.2.3; subj. ὦμαι PBaden 48.12
(ii B. C.), ἦται GDI 1696, ἦνται prob. in IG5(1).1390.83 ([place name] Andania); [dialect] Ion. and [dialect] Ep. also ἔσκον, used by A.Pers. 656 (lyr.): [tense] fut. ἔσομαι, ἔσται, [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Aeol. also ἔσσομαι, ἔσεται, ἔσσεται; [dialect] Aeol. [ per.] 2sg. ἔσσῃ prob. in Alc.67,87; [dialect] Dor. 2 and [ per.] 3sg. ἐσσῇ, ἐσσεῖται, Il.2.393, 13.317, Theoc.10.5, [ per.] 3pl. ἐσσοῦνται Foed. ap. Th.5.77 codd. (but ἔσσονται Tab.Heracl.1.113
), inf. ἐσσεῖσθαι Sophr.57
.—All forms of the [tense] pres.ind. are enclitic (exc. [ per.] 2sg. εἶ and [ per.] 3pl. ἔασι); but [ per.] 3sg. is written ἔστι when it begins a sentence or verse, or when it immediately follows οὐκ, καί, εἰ, ὡς, ἀλλά, or τοῦτ', Hdn.Gr.1.553 (also μή acc. to EM301.3); later Gramm. wrote ἔστι as Subst. Verb, Phot., Eust.880.22.

A as the Subst. Verb,

I of persons, exist, οὐκ ἔσθ' οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ' ἔσσεται Od.16.437
; ἔτ' εἰσί they are still in being, 15.433, cf. S.Ph. 445, etc.; τεθνηῶτος.. μηδ' ἔτ' ἐόντος Od.1.289
; οὐκέτ' ἐστί he is no more, E.Hipp. 1162; οὐδὲ δὴν ἦν he was not long- lived, Il.6.131; ὁ οὐκ ὤν, οἱ οὐκ ὄντες, of those who are no more, Th.2.45,44; οἱ ὄντες the living, Plb.9.29.2; ὁ ὤν the Eternal, LXX Ex.3.14, al., Ph.1.289; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.1.290
; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, 2.119; κἀγὼ γὰρ ἦ ποτ', ἀλλὰ νῦν οὐκ εἴμ' ἔτι E.Hec. 284
; ὡς ἂν εἶεν ἅνθρωποι might continue in being, Pl.Smp. 190c; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων D.18.72
, cf. Arist.GC 318b25; of things, εἰ ἔστι ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.3.17, etc.; of cities, ὄλωλεν, οὐδ' ἔτ' ἐστὶ Τροία E.Tr. 1292
, cf. Heracl. 491; δοκεῖ μοι Καρχηδόνα μὴ εἶναι censeo Carthaginem esse delendam, Plu.Cat.Ma.27; ἂν ᾖ τὸ στράτευμα be in existence, D.8.17; of money, to be in hand, τῶν ὄντων χρημάτων καὶ τῶν προσιόντων IG12.91.25
; τὰ ὄντα property, Pl.Grg. 511a, Plu.Ant.24, etc.; τὸ ἐσόμενον ἐκ .. future revenue from.., BCH46.420 (Olymos, i B. C.); of place, τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν the local church, Act.Ap.13.1; of time, τοῦ ὄντος μηνός in the current month, BGU146.4, etc.; in office, ἱερέων τῶν ὄντων PPar.5.4
(ii B. C.); αἱ οὖσαι [ἐξουσίαι] the powers that be, Ep. Rom.13.1.

II of the real world, be, opp. become, γίγνεται πάντα ἃ δή φαμεν εἶναι Pl.Tht. 152d
, etc.; τὸ ὄν Being, Parm.8.35, Protag.2, Pl.Ti. 27d, etc.; opp. τὸ μὴ ὄν, Gorg.Fr.3 D., etc.; οὐδὲν γίνεται ἐκ τοῦ μὴ ὄντος Epicur.Ep. 1p.5U.
; ἐξ οὐκ ὄντων ἐποίησεν αὐτὰ ὁ θεός LXX 2 Ma.7.28
; τὰ ὄντα the world of things, Heraclit.7, Emp.129.5, etc.; ὄνindecl., τῶν ὂν εἰδῶν species of Being, Plot.6.2.10.

2 of circumstances, events, etc., to happen, τά τ' ἐόντα, τά τ' ἐσσόμενα, πρό τ' ἐόντα Il.1.70
; ἡ ἐσβολὴ ἔμελλεν ἔσεσθαι Th.2.13
, etc.; τῆς προδοσίας οὔσης since treachery was there, Id.4.103; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ᾖ so long as it last, Id.1.58; αἱ σπονδαὶ ἐνιαυτὸν ἔσονται Id.4.118
; τί ἐστιν; what is it? what's the matter? Ar.Th. 193; τί οὖν ἦν τοῦτο; how came it to pass? Pl.Phd. 58a: repeated with a relat. to avoid a positive assertion, ἔστι δ' ὅπῃ νῦν ἔ. things are as they are, i.e. are ill, A.Ag.67.

III be the fact or the case, διπλασίαν ἂν τὴν δύναμιν εἰκάζεσθαι ἤ ἐστιν twice as large as it really is, Th.1.10; αὐτὸ ὅ ἐστι καλόν beauty in its essence, Pl.Smp. 211c, cf. Phd. 74b; freq. in part., τὸν ἐόντα λόγον λέγειν or φαίνειν the true story, Hdt.1.95, 116; τῷ ἐόντι χρήσασθαι tell the truth, ib. 30; τὰ ὄντα ἀπαγγέλλειν Th.7.8
; σκῆψιν οὐκ οὖσαν, λόγον οὐκ ὄντα, S.El. 584, Ar.Ra. 1052; τῷ ὄντι in reality, in fact, Pl.Prt. 328d, etc.; to apply a quotation to a case in point, τῷ ὄντι κλαυσίγελως real 'smiles through tears' (with allusion to Il.6.484), X.HG7.2.9, cf. Pl. La. 196d; κατὰ τὸ ἐόν according to the fact, rightly, Hdt.1.97; πᾶν τὸ ἐόν the whole truth, Id.9.11; τοῦ ἐόντος ἀποτεύξεται Hp.VM 2
.

IV folld. by the relat., οὐκ ἔστιν ὅς or ὅστις no one, οὐκ ἔσθ' ὃς.. ἀπαλάλκοι Il.22.348
; οὐκ ἔ. οὐδεὶς ὅς E.El. 903
; οὐκ ἔ. ὅτῳ, = οὐδενί, A.Pr. 293 (anap.), cf. 989: freq. in pl., εἰσὶν οἵ, = Lat. sunt qui, used exactly like ἔνιοι, Th.6.88, 7.44, Pl.Men. 77d, Grg. 503a, etc. ( εἰσί τινες οἵ .. Th.3.24); ἐστὶν ἃ χωρία, πολίσματα, Id.1.12,65; ἐστὶν ἃ εἰπεῖν Id.2.67
; ἦσαν οἵ X.An.5.2.14
; the sg. Verb is used even with masc. and fem. pl., ἐστὶν οἵ, αἵ, Hp.Fract.1, VC4, X.Cyr.2.3.16; more freq. in oblique cases, ποταμῶν ἐστὶ ὧν Hdt.7.187
; ἐστὶν ἀφ' ὧν Th.8.65
; ἐστὶ παρ' οἷς, ἐστὶν ἐν οἷς, Id.1.23, 5.25: in questions ὅστις is used, ἔστιν ἥντινα δόξαν.. ἀπεκρίνατο; Pl.Men. 85b: with relat. Particles, ἐστὶν ἔνθα, = Lat. est ubi, X.Cyr.7.4.15, etc.; ἐ. ὅπῃ, ἔσθ' ὅπου, somehow, somewhere, Pl.Prt. 331d, A.Eu. 517, S.OT 448, etc.; in questions expecting a neg. answer, ἐ. ὁπόθεν, ὅπως; Pl.Phlb. 35a, R. 493e, etc.; οὐ γάρ ἐσθ' ὅπως Pi.Fr.61
, cf. Hdt.7.102, A.Ag. 620; οὐκ ἔ. ὅπως οὐ in any case, necessarily, Ar. Pax 188; οὐκ ἔ. ὡς Pl. Men. 76e
, etc.; ἐ. ὅτε, ἔσθ' ὅτε, sometimes, Pi.Fr.180.2, S.Aj.56, Th. 7.21, etc.

V ἦν is sts. used with pl. masc. and fem., usu. at the beginning of a sentence, there was, τῆς δ' ἦν τρεῖς κεφαλαί Hes.Th. 321
; (but in ἦν δ' ἐρῳδιοί τε πολλοί Epich.46
, cf. 59, al., it may be taken as [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 3pl.); ἦν δ' ἀμφίπλεκτοι κλίμακες S.Tr. 520
(lyr.); ἦν ἄρα κἀκεῖνοι ταλακάρδιοι Epigr. ap. Aeschin.3.184; less freq. ἔστι, ἔστι δὲ μεταξὺ.. ἑπτὰ στάδιοι Hdt.1.26
, cf. 7.34; ἔστι.. ἄρχοντές τε καὶ δῆμος Pl.R. 463a
; before dual Nouns, Ar.V.58, Pl.Grg. 500d.

VI ἔστι impers., c. inf., it is possible, ἔστι γὰρ ἀμφοτέροισιν ὀνείδεα μυθήσασθαι Il.20.246
; ἔστι μὲν εὕδειν, ἔστι δὲ τερπομένοισιν ἀκούειν Od. 15.392
; εἴ τί πού ἐστι (sc. πιθέσθαι) 4.193; τοιάδε.. ἐστὶν ἀκοῦσαι A. Pr. 1055
(anap.); ἔστι τεκμήρια ὁρᾶν X.An.3.2.13
, cf. Ar.Ra. 1163, Aeschin.3.105, D.18.272, Arist.Ath.53.6, etc.; so in imper., opt., and subj., ἔστω ἀποφέρεσθαι τῷ βουλομένῳ IG12.10.7
; μυρία ἂν εἴη λέγειν Pl.Plt. 271e
; ὅπως ἂν ᾖ δρᾶν IG2.1054.91
: more freq. in neg. clauses, Il.6.267, etc.; folld. by ὥστε c. inf., S.Ph. 656: c. acc. et inf., ἁδόντα δ' εἴη με τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς ὁμιλεῖν Pi.P.2.96
; ἔστιν ἐκπεσεῖν ἀρχῆς Δία A.Pr. 757
: sts. not impers. in this sense, θάλασσα δ' οὐκέτ' ἦν ἰδεῖν Id.Pers. 419
.

b ἔστω in argument, let it be granted, ἔστω τοῦτο ἀληθὲς εἶναι D.H.Comp.25
; ἔστω σοι τοῦθ' οὕτως Plu.2.987b
; ἔστω εἶναί τινα τοιοῦτον D.
Chr.74.24.

B most freq., to be, the Copula connecting the predicate with the Subject, both being in the same case: hence, signify, import, τὸ γὰρ εἴρειν λέγειν ἐστίν Pl.Cra. 398d
; esp. in the phrase τοῦτ' ἔστι, hoc est; Σκαιόλαν, ὅπερ ἐστὶ Λαϊόν Plu.Publ.17
: with numerals, τὰ δὶς πέντε δέκα ἐστίν twice five are ten, X.Mem.4.4.7; εἶναί τις or τι, to be somebody, something, be of some consequence, v. τις; οὐδὲν εἶναι Pl.R. 562d, etc.

2 periphr. with the Participle to represent the finite Verb: with [tense] pf. part. once in Hom., τετληότες εἰμέν, for τετλήκαμεν, Il.5.873; so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., ἦν τεθνηκώς, for ἐτεθνήκει, A. Ag. 869; ἔσται δεδορκώς ib. 1179; εἰμὶ γεγώς S.Aj. 1299
; πεφυκός ἐστι Ar.Av. 1473
; δεδρακότες εἰσίν Th.3.68
; κατακεκονότες ἔσεσθε X.An.7.6.36
: with [tense] aor. part., once in Hom., βλήμενος ἦν Il.4.211
; so προδείσας εἰμί, οὐ σιωπήσας ἔσει; S.OT90, 1146, cf. A.Supp. 460: with [tense] pres. part., ἦν προκείμενον Id.Pers. 371
; φεύγων Ὀρέστης ἐστίν Id.Ch. 136
; εἴην οὐκ ἂν εὖ φρονῶν S.Aj. 1330
; τί δ' ἐστί.. φέρον; Id.OT 991, cf. 274, 708; λέγων ἐστίν τις E.Hec. 1179
; ἦν τίς σ' ὑβρίζων Id.HF 313
; πόρρω ἤδη εἶ πορευόμενος Pl.Ly. 204b
; βαδίζων εἰμί Ar.Ra. 36
; freq. in Hdt., ἦσαν ἱέντες 1.57
, al.; even εἰσὶ διάφοροι ἐόντες 3.49
(s.v.l.):— if the Art. is joined with the Part., the noun is made emphatic, Κᾶρές εἰσι οἱ καταδέξαντες the persons who showed her were Carians, Id.1.171; αὐτὸς ἦν ὁ μαρτυρῶν A.Eu. 798
; δόλος ἦν ὁ φράσας S.El. 197
(anap.).

C εἶναι is freq. modified in sense by the addition of Advbs., or the cases of Nouns without or with Preps.:

I εἶναι with Advbs., where the Adv. often merely represents a Noun and stands as the predicate, ἅλις δέ οἱ ἦσαν ἄρουραι Il.14.122
, etc.; ἀκέων, ἀκήν εἶναι, to be silent, 4.22, Od.2.82; σῖγα πᾶς ἔστω λεώς E.Hec. 532
; διαγνῶναι χαλεπῶς ἦν ἄνδρα ἕκαστον Il.7.424
; ἀσφαλέως ἡ κομιδὴ ἔσται will go on safely, Hdt.4.134; ἐγγύς, πόρρω εἶναι, Th.6.88, Pl.Prt. 356e: freq. impers. with words implying good or ill fortune, Κουρήτεσσι κακῶς ἦν it fared ill with them, Il.9.551; εὖ γὰρ ἔσται E.Med.89
, cf. Ar.Pl. 1188, etc.; ἡδέως ἂν αὐτοῖς εἴη D.59.30
.

II c. gen., to express descent or extraction, πατρὸς δ' εἴμ' ἀγαθοῖο Il.21.109
; αἵματός εἰς ἀγαθοῖο Od. 4.611
, cf. Hdt.3.71, Th.2.71, etc.; πόλεως μεγίστης εἶ X.An.7.3.19
.

b to express the material of which a thing is made, ἡ κρηπίς ἐστι λίθων μεγάλων consists of.., Hdt.1.93; τῆς πόλιος ἐούσης δύο φαρσέων ib. 186; τοιούτων ἔργων ἐστὶ ἡ τυραννίς is made up of.., Id.5.92.ή, etc.

c to express the class to which a person or thing belongs, εἶ γὰρ τῶν φίλων you are one of them, Ar.Pl. 345; ἐτύγχανε βουλῆς ὤν Th.3.70
; ὅσοι ἦσαν τῶν προτέρων στρατιωτῶν Id.7.44
; Κριτίας τῶν τριάκοντα ὤν X.Mem.1.2.31
; ἔστι τῶν αἰσχρῶν it is in the class of disgraceful things, i. e. it is disgraceful, D.2.2.

d to express that a thing belongs to another, Τροίαν Ἀχαιῶν οὖσαν A.Ag. 269
; τὸ πεδίον ἦν μέν κοτε Χορασμίων Hdt.3.117
, etc.: hence, to be of the party of, ἦσαν.. τινὲς μὲν φιλίππου, τινὲς δὲ τοῦ βελτίστου D.9.56
, cf. 37.53; to be de pendent upon, S.Ant. 737, etc.; to be at the mercy of, ἔστι τοῦ λέγοντος, ἢν φόβους λέγῃ Id.OT 917
.

e to express one's duty, business, custom, nature, and the like , οὔτοι γυναικός ἐστι 'tis not a woman's part, A.Ag. 940; τὸ ἐπιτιμᾶν παντὸς εἶναι D.1.16
; τὸ δὲ ναυτικὸν τέχνης ἐστίν is matter of art, requires art, Th.1.142, cf.83.

f in LXX, to be occupied about, ἦσαν τοῦ θύειν 2 Ch.30.17
; ἔσεσθαι, c. gen., to be about to, ἐσόμεθα τοῦ σῶσαί σε 2 Ki.10.11
.

III with the dat., ἐστί μοι I have, freq. in Hom., etc.

2 with two dats., σφίσι τε καὶ Ἀθηναίοισι εἶναι οὐδὲν πρῆγμα that they and the Athenians have nothing to do one with another, Hdt.5.84; μηδὲν εἶναι σοὶ καὶ φιλίππῳ πρᾶγμα D.18.283
; more shortly, σοί τε καὶ τούτοισι πρήγμασι τί ἐστι; Hdt.5.33; τί τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τῇ βασάνῳ; D.29.36; τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί; Lat. quid tecum est mihi? Ev.Marc.5.7, etc.; also ἐμοὶ οὐδὲν πρὸς τοὺς τοιούτους (sc. ἐστίν) Isoc.4.12; ἐν οἷς πρὸς τοὺς ἐναντίους ἐστὶ τῷ δήμῳ D.18.278
; ἔσται αὐτῳ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, in tomb inscriptions, JHS18.113, etc.

3 with ἄσμενος, βουλόμενος, etc., added, ἐμοὶ δέ κεν ἀσμένῳ εἴη 'twould be to my delight, Il.14.108; οὐκ ἂν σφίσι βουλομένοις εἶναι Th.7.35
; προσδεχομένῳ Id.6.46
; θέλοντι S.OT 1356
(lyr.); ἡδομένοις Pl.La. 187c
.

IV with Preps., εἶναι ἀπό τινος, = εἶναί τινος (supr. 11.a), X.Mem.1.6.9; εἰσὶν ἀπ' ἐναντίων αὗται πραγμάτων Pl.Phlb. 12d
; but εἶναι ἀπ' οἴκου to be away from.., Th.1.99.

2 εἶναι ἔκ τινος to be sprung from, εἴμ' ἐκ Παιονίης, Μυρμιδόνων ἔξ εἰμι, Il.21.154, 24.397, etc.; ἔστιν ἐξ ἀνάγκης it is of necessity, i. e. necessary, Pl.Sph. 256d.

3 εἶναι ἐν .. to be in a certain state, ἐν εὐπαθείῃσι Hdt.1.22
; ἐν ἀθυμία, etc., Th.6.46, etc.; ἐν ταραχαῖς D.18.218
; εἶναι ἐν ἀξιώματι to be in esteem, Th.1.130; οἱ ἐν τέλεϊ ἐόντες those in office, Hdt.3.18, etc.; but εἶναι ἐν τέχνῃ, ἐν φιλοσοφία to be engaged in.., S.OT 562, Pl.Phd. 59a.

b ἐν σοί ἐστι it depends on thee, Hdt.6.109, S.Ph. 963; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Id.OT 314
; so also ἐπί τινι Id.Ph. 1003
, X.Cyr.1.6.2, etc.

4 εἶναι διά .., much like εἶναι ἐν .., εἶναι διὰ φόβου, = φοβεῖσθαι, Th.6.34; εἶναι δι' ὄχλου, = ὀχληρὸν εἶναι, Id.1.73; εἶναι διὰ μόχθων X.Cyr.1.6.25
; εἶναι δι' αἰτίας, = αἰτιᾶσθαι, D.H.1.70; Geom., pass through, διὰ τᾶς ἑτέρας διαμέτρου ἐόντος τοῦ ἐπιπέδου Archim.Con.Sph.20
.

5 εἶναι ἐφ' ἑαυτῆς to be by oneself, D.25.23; εἶναι ἐπὶ ὀνόματος to bear a name, Id.39.21; εἶναι ἐπὶ τοῖς πράγμασιν to be engaged in.., Id.2.12; εἶναι ἐπί τινα to be against him, Id.6.33; εἶναι ἐφ' ἑξήκοντα στάδια to reach sixty stadia, X.An.4.6.11; εἶναι ἐπὶ τὰς ἁφάς pass through the points of contact, Apollon. Perg.Con.4.1; εἶναι ἐπί τινι, v. supr. 3 b.

6 εἶναι πρός τινος to be in one's favour, Th.4.10,29, etc.; to suit, X.An. 1.2.11, etc.; εἶναι πρός τινι engaged in, Pl.Phd. 84c, Philostr.VA5.31; πρὸς τοῖς ἰδίοις mind one's own affairs, Arist.Pol. 1309a6, Ath.16.3; εἶναι πρὸς τὸ κωλύειν Plb.1.26.3
; πρὸς τὸ πονεῖν Telesp.46 H.; εἶναι περί τι X.An.3.5.7
, etc.

7 εἶναι παρά τινι or τινα, = παρειναι, Id.Cyr.6.2.15, Hdt.8.140.ά (s.v.l.).

8 εἶναι ὑπό τινα or τινι to be subject to.., X.HG5.2.17 (s.v.l.), 6.2.4.

9 περὶ τούτων ἐστίν that is the question, Men.Epit.30.

10 εἶναι ἀπό .., in Geom., to be constructed upon, Archim.Sph.Cyl.2.9, Con.Sph.7.

D ἐστί is very freq. omitted, mostly in the [tense] pres. ind. before certain predicates, as ἀνάγκη, ἄξιον, δυνατόν, εἰκός, ἕτοιμον, οἷόν τε, ῥᾴδιον, χρεών, etc., and after the neut. of Verbals in - τέος, and such forms as θαυμαστὸν ὅσον: less freq. with other persons and moods, εἰμί omitted, S.OT92, Aj. 813; εἶ, Od.4.206; ἐσμέν, S.Ant. 634; ἐστέ, Od.10.463; εἰσί, S.OT 499 (lyr.), IG2.778 B; subj. ᾖ, Il.14.376, E.Hipp. 659, Antipho 5.32; opt. εἴη, IG22.1183.12; [tense] impf. ἦν, ib.2.778 B; [tense] fut. ἔσονται, Od.14.394.

E the Inf. freq. seems redundant,

1 in phrases implying power or will to do a thing, ἑκὼν εἶναι (v. ἑκών) κατὰ δύναμιν εἶναι Is.2.32
; εἰς δύναμιν εἶναι Pl.Plt. 300c
; τὸ ἐπ' ἐκείνοις εἶναι, quantum in illis esset, Th.8.48, X.HG3.5.9, cf. Lys.13.58; τὸ ἐπὶ σφᾶς εἶναι Th.4.28
; τὸ κατὰ τοῦτον εἶναι X.An.1.6.9
; κατὰ τοῦτο εἶναι Pl.Prt. 317a
; τὸ τήμερον, τὸ νῦν εἶναι, Id.Cra. 396e, La. 201c, Theopomp. Com.98, Decr. ap. Arist.Ath.31.2, etc.

2 after Verbs of naming or choosing, σοφιστὴν ὀνομάζουσι τὸν ἄνδρα εἶναι Pl.Prt. 311e
; σύμμαχόν μιν εἵλοντο εἶναι Hdt.8.134
; of giving, δῶκε ξεινήϊον εἶναι Il. 11.20
.

F [tense] impf. ἦνissts. used where other languages take the [tense] pres.,

1 after ἄρα, to express a fact which is and has always been the same, δέρμα δὲ ἀνθρώπου.. ἦν ἄρα σχεδὸν δερμάτων πάντων λαμπρότατον human skin then it appears is.., Hdt.4.64; Κύπρις οὐκ ἄρ' ἦν θεός E. Hipp. 359
; ὡς ἄρ' ἦσθ' ἐμὸς πατὴρ ὀρθῶς ib. 1169; ἦ πολύμοχθον ἄρ' ἦν γένος.. ἁμερίων Id.IA 1330
; ἦ στωμύλος ἦσθα Theoc.5.79
; so also when there is reference to a past thought, τουτὶ τί ἦν; what is this? Ar.Ach. 157, cf. Pl.Cra. 387c: so in the Aristotelian formula τὸ τί ἦν εἶναι (APo.82b38, al.), used to express the essential nature of a thing, where τί ἦν (for ἐστί) takes the place of the dat. in such phrases as τὸ ἀγαθῷ εἶναι, τὸ μεγέθει εἶναι, APr.67b12, de An.429b10.

G ἐγώ εἰμι, in LXX, pleonastic for ἐγώ, ἐγώ εἰμι οὐχ ἥμαρτον Jd. 11.27
, cf. 6.18; also ἔσται πᾶς ἀποκτενεῖ με Ge.4.14
.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > εἰμί
75 ἐπί

ἐπί prep. w. gen., dat., or acc.; s. the lit. on ἀνά, beg. (Hom.+). The basic idea is ‘upon’ (opp. ὑπό) Kühner-G. I 495; s. also Rob 600–605. (In the foll. classifications case use is presented seriatim; in earlier editions of this lexicon all sections, except 13, 17, and 18 [of time], were included under the general rubric ‘Place’.)

① marker of location or surface, answering the question ‘where?’ on, upon, near

ⓐ w. gen., marking a position on a surface ἐ. (τῆς) γῆς on (the) earth (cp. En 9:1; 98:1; ἐ. γῆς 25:6; PsSol 17:2) Mt 6:10, 19; 9:6; 23:9; Mk 6:47 al. (Ar. 12, 1; Just., A I, 54, 7 al.). ἐ. τῆς θαλάσσης on the sea (cp. Job 9:8; Dio Chrys. 10 [11], 129 βαδίζειν ἐ. τῆς θαλ.; Lucian, Philops. 13 βαδίζειν ἐφʼ ὕδατος, VH 2, 4; Artem. 3, 16 ἐ. τ. θαλάσσης περιπατεῖν; schol. on Nicander, Ther. 15 p. 5, 26ff relying on the testimony of Hesiod: Orion was given a gift [δωρεά] by the gods καὶ ἐ. κυμάτων πορεύεσθαι καὶ ἐ. τῆς γῆς) Mt 14:26; Mk 6:48f; J 6:19 (w. acc. P⁷⁵; s. 4bβ below). ἐ. τῶν νεφελῶν on the clouds Mt 24:30; 26:64 (Da 7:13; cp. Philo, Praem. 8). ἐ. κλίνης 9:2; Lk 17:34. ἐ. τοῦ δώματος on the roof vs. 31; Mt 24:17; 10:27 foll. by pl. W. verbs: κάθημαι ἐ. τινος sit on someth. (Job 2:8; ἐ. τοῦ ἅρματος GrBar 6:2; cp. JosAs 27:1 ἐ. τοῦ ὀχήματος καθεζόμενος; Just., D. 90, 5 ἐ. λίθου καθεζόμενος) Mt 24:3; 27:19; Ac 8:28; Rv 6:16; 9:17 (the same prep. used in Rv w. κάθημαι and dat. s. bα below, and w. acc. cα). ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τινος stand on someth. Ac 21:40; Rv 10:5, 8 (Just., D. 86, 2 ἐστηρίχθαι). With parts of the body: ἐ. χειρῶν αἴρειν carry on (i.e. in/with) their hands Mt 4:6; Lk 4:11 (both Ps 90:12). ἐ. κεφαλῆς on the head (Hdt. 5, 12, 4) J 20:7; 1 Cor 11:10; Rv 12:1. ἐ. τοῦ μετώπου Rv 7:3; 9:4. ἐ. γυμνοῦ on the naked body Mk 14:51. Cp. use of ἐπί w. καθίζω and gen., and ἐπί w. κάθημαι and acc. Mt 19:28.—In a gener. and fig. sense Ac 21:23.

ⓑ w. dat., gener. suggesting contiguity on, in, above.

α. answering the question ‘where?’ (Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX; Just., D. 105, 5 ἐ. τῷ σταυρῷ; Tat., 9:1 ἐ. τοῖς ὄρεσι; Ath. 20, 1 ἐ. τῷ μετώπῳ; Mel., P. 19, 131 ἐ. σάκκῳ καὶ σποδῷ) ἐ. πίνακι on a platter Mt 14:8, 11; Mk 6:25, 28. ἀνακλῖναι ἐ. τῷ χλωρῷ χόρτῳ on the green grass 6:39. ἐ. τοῖς κραβάττοις vs. 55. ἐπέκειτο ἐπʼ αὐτῷ lay on it (or before it) J 11:38. καθήμενος ἐ. τῷ θρόνῳ Rv 4:9 (cp. gen. w. καθ. 1a above, and acc. cα below) 5:13; 7:10 and oft. ἐφʼ ἵπποις λευκοῖς on white horses 19:14. ἐ. σανίσιν on planks Ac 27:44. ἐ. τῇ στοᾷ in the colonnade 3:11. τὰ ἐ. τοῖς οὐρανοῖς what is above (or in) the heavens Eph 1:10. ἐπʼ αὐτῷ above him, at his head Lk 23:38 (=Mt 27:37 ἐπάνω τ. κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ).

β. answering the question ‘whither?’ on, upon (Hom. et al.) w. verbs that indicate a direction: οἰκοδομεῖν ἐ. τινι build upon someth. Mt 16:18. ἐποικοδομεῖν Eph 2:20. ἐπιβάλλειν ἐπίβλημα ἐ. ἱματίῳ παλαιῷ put a patch on an old garment Mt 9:16. ἐπιπίπτειν ἐ. τινι Ac 8:16. ἐκάθισεν ἐ. τῷ θρόνῳ he sat down on the throne GJs 11:1. λίθον ἐπʼ αὐτῇ βαλέτω J 8:7 v.l. (cp. 12a below).

ⓒ w. acc., answering the question ‘where?’ (Hom. et al.; LXX; JosAs 29:2 φορῶν ἐ. τὸν μηρὸν αὐτοῦ ῥομφαίαν; Just., D. 53, 1 ζυγὸν ἐ. αὐχένα μὴ ἔχων)

α. on, over someth. καθεύδειν ἐ. τι sleep on someth. Mk 4:38. καθῆσθαι ἐ. τι sit on someth. Mt 19:28 (in the same vs. καθίζω w. gen., s. a above) J 12:15; Rv 4:4; 6:2; 11:16 al.; cp. Lk 21:35b; κεῖσθαι ἐ. τι lie upon someth. 2 Cor 3:15. κατακεῖσθαι Lk 5:25. ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τὸν αἰγιαλόν stand on the shore Mt 13:2; cp. Rv 14:1. ἑστῶτας ἐ. τὴν θάλασσαν standing beside the sea 15:2. ἔστη ἐ. τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ παιδίου (the star) remained stationary over the head of the child GJs 21:3. σκηνοῦν ἐ. τινα spread a tent over someone Rv 7:15. ἐ. τὴν δεξιάν at the right hand 5:1. λίθος ἐ. λίθον stone upon stone Mt 24:2.

β. ἐ. τὸ αὐτό at the same place, together (Ps.-X., Respublica Athen. [The Old Oligarch] 2, 2; Pla., Rep. 329a; SIG 736, 66 [92 B.C.]. In pap=‘in all’: PTebt 14, 20 [114 B.C.]; PFay 102, 6.—2 Km 2:13; En 100:2) εἶναι ἐ. τὸ αὐτό be together Lk 17:35; Ac 1:15; 2:1, 44. In 1 Cor 7:5 it is a euphemistic expr. for sexual union. κατοικεῖν ἐ. τὸ αὐτό live in the same place (Dt 25:5) Hm 5, 1, 4. Also w. verbs of motion (Sus 14 Theod.) συνέρχεσθαι ἐ. τὸ αὐτό come together to the same place 1 Cor 11:20; 14:23; cp. B 4:10 (Just., A I, 67, 3 συνέλευσις γίνεται). συνάγεσθαι (Phlegon of Tralles [Hadr.]: 257 Fgm. 36 III 9 Jac.; PsSol 2:2; TestJob 28:5 Jos., Bell. 2, 346) Mt 22:34; Ac 4:26 (Ps 2:2); 1 Cl 34:7. ἐ. τὸ αὐτὸ μίγνυσθαι be mixed together Hm 10, 3, 3. προσετίθει ἐ. τὸ αὐτό added to their number Ac 2:47.

γ. at, by, near someone or someth. καθῆσθαι ἐ. τὸ τελώνιον sit at the tax-office Mt 9:9 (ἐ. τὰς ὡραίας πύλας GrBar prol. 2); Mk 2:14. ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τὴν θύραν stand at the door Rv 3:20. σὺ ἔστης ἐ. τὸ θυσιαστήριον you are standing (ἕστηκας deStrycker) as priest at the altar GJs 8:2. ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς among you 2 Th 1:10; cp. Ac 1:21.—Of pers., over whom someth. is done ὀνομάζειν τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ ἐ. τινα speak the name of Jesus over someone Ac 19:13. ἐπικαλεῖν τὸ ὄνομά τινος ἐ. τινα=to claim someone for one’s own (Jer 14:9; 2 Ch 7:14; 2 Macc 8:15) Ac 15:17 (Am 9:12); Js 2:7; Hs 8, 6, 4. προσεύχεσθαι ἐ. τινα pray over someone Js 5:14.

② marker of presence or occurrence near an object or area, at, near

ⓐ w. gen., of immediate proximity to things at, near (Hdt. 7, 115; X., An. 4, 3, 28 al.; LXX, Just.) ἐ. τ. θυρῶν at the gates (Plut., C. Gracch. 841 [14, 3]; PRyl 127, 8f [29 A.D.] κοιμωμένου μου ἐ. τῆς θύρας; 1 Macc 1:55; Just., D. 111, 4) Ac 5:23 (s. b below for dat. in 5:9). ἐ. τῆς θαλάσσης near the sea (Polyb. 1, 44, 4; Ex 14:2; Dt 1:40; 1 Macc 14:34) J 21:1. ἐ. τῆς ὁδοῦ by the road Mt 21:19. ἐσθίειν ἐ. τῆς πραπέζης τινός eat at someone’s table Lk 22:30 (cp. POxy 99, 14 [55 A.D.] τράπεζα, ἐφʼ ἧς Σαραπίων καὶ μέτοχοι; Da 11:27 LXX ἐ. μιᾶς τραπέζης). ἐ. τοῦ (τῆς) βάτου at the thornbush = in the passage about the thornbush (i.e. Ex 3:1ff) Mk 12:26; Lk 20:37.

ⓑ with dat., of immediate proximity at, near by (Hom.+) ἦν ἔτι ἐ. τῷ τόπῳ ὅπου was still at the place, where J 11:30 v.l. (for ἐν; cp. Just., D. 402). ἐ. τῇ θύρᾳ (ἐ. θύραις) at the door (Hom. et al.; Wsd 19:17; Jos., Ant. 17, 90; Just., D. 32, 3) Mt 24:33; Mk 13:29; Ac 5:9 (s. a above). ἐ. τοῖς πυλῶσιν Rv 21:12. ἐ. τῇ πηγῇ J 4:6 (Jos., Ant. 5, 58 ἐ. τινι πηγῇ; Just., A I, 64, 1 ἐ. ταῖς … πηγαῖς). ἐ. τῇ προβατικῇ (sc. πύλῃ) near the sheepgate 5:2; cp. Ac 3:10. ἐ. τῷ ποταμῷ near the river (since Il. 7, 133; Jos., Ant. 4, 176 ἐ. τ. Ἰορδάνῳ) Rv 9:14.—Of pers. (Diod S 14, 113, 6; Just., A I, 40, 7) ἐφʼ ὑμῖν among you 2 Cor 7:7; cp. Ac 28:14 v.l.

③ marker of involvement in an official proceeding, before, w. gen., of pers., esp. in the language of lawsuits (Pla., Leg. 12, 943d; Isaeus 5, 1 al.; UPZ 71, 15; 16 [152 B.C.]; POxy 38, 11; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 382, 23=BGU 909, 23; Jos., Vi. 258; Just., A II, 1, 1 ἐ. Οὐρβίκου). ἐ. τοῦ ἡγεμόνος in the governor’s presence Mt 28:14. ἐ. ἡγεμόνων καὶ βασιλέων Mk 13:9. ἐ. σου before you (the procurator) Ac 23:30. ἐ. Τερτούλλου Phlm subscr. v.l.; στάντος μου ἐ. τοῦ συνεδρίου Ac 24:20 (cp. Diod S 11, 55, 4 ἐ. τοῦ κοινοῦ συνεδρίου τ. Ἑλλήνων). γυναικὸς … διαβληθείσης ἐ. τοῦ κυρίου Papias (2:17). κρίνεσθαι ἐ. τῶν ἀδίκων go to law before the unrighteous 1 Cor 6:1. κριθήσεται ἐφʼ ὑμῶν before your tribunal D 11:11. μαρτυρεῖν ἐ. Ποντίου Πιλάτου testify before Pontius Pilate 1 Ti 6:13 (s. μαρτυρέω 1c). ἐ. τοῦ βήματος (POxy 37 I, 3 [49 A.D.]) ἑστὼς ἐ. τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρός εἰμι I am standing before Caesar’s tribunal Ac 25:10 (Appian says Prooem. c. 15 §62 of himself: δίκαις ἐν Ῥώμῃ συναγορεύσας ἐ. τῶν βασιλέων=I acted as attorney in lawsuits in Rome before the emperors).—Gener. in someone’s presence (Appian, Syr. 61 §324 ἐφʼ ὑμῶν=in your presence) ἐ. Τίτου before Titus 2 Cor 7:14. Cp.10 below.

④ marker of movement to or contact w. a goal, toward, in direction of, on

ⓐ w. gen., marking contact with the goal that is reached, answering the question ‘whither?’ toward, on, at w. verbs of motion (Appian, Iber. 98 §427 ἀπέπλευσεν ἐπʼ οἴκου=he sailed [toward] home; PGM 4, 2468f ἀναβὰς ἐ. δώματος; JosAs 27:1 ἀνέδραμε … ἐ. πέτρας; Jos., Ant. 4, 91 ἔφευγον ἐ. τ. πόλεων; Tat. 33:3 Εὐρώπην ἐ. τοῦ ταύρου καθιδρύσαντος) βάλλειν τὸν σπόρον ἐ. τῆς γῆς Mk 4:26; also σπείρειν vs. 31. πίπτειν (Wsd 18:23; TestAbr A 3 p. 80, 11 [Stone p. 8]; JosAs 9:1) 9:20; 14:35. καθιέναι Ac 10:11. τιθέναι (Sir 17:4) Lk 8:16; J 19:19; Ac 5:15. ἔρχεσθαι Hb 6:7; Rv 3:10; γίνεσθαι ἐ. reach, be at J 6:21. γενόμενος ἐ. τοῦ τόπου when he reached the place Lk 22:40. καθίζειν take one’s seat ἐ. θρόνου (JosAs 7:1 al.) Mt 19:28 (s. 1a end); 23:2; 25:31; J 19:13 (ἐ. βήματος of Pilate as Jos., Bell. 2, 172; of Jesus Just., A I, 35, 6). κρεμαννύναι ἐ. ξύλου hang on a tree (i.e. cross) (Gen 40:19; cp. Just., D. 86, 6 σταυρωθῆναι ἐ. τοῦ ξύλου) Ac 5:30; 10:39; cp. Gal 3:13 (Dt 21:23).

ⓑ w. acc.

α. specifying direction (En 24:2 ἐ. νότον ‘southward’ of position of the mountain) of motion that takes a particular direction, to, toward ἐκτείνας τ. χεῖρα ἐ. τοὺς μαθητάς Mt 12:49; cp. Lk 22:53 (JosAs 12:8). πορεύεσθαι ἐ. τὸ ἀπολωλός go after the one that is lost 15:4. ἐ. τὴν ῏Ασσον in the direction of Assos Ac 20:13. ἐπιστρέφειν ἐ. τι turn to someth. 2 Pt 2:22 (cp. Pr 26:11; En 99:5). ὡς ἐ. λῃστήν as if against a robber Mt 26:55; Mk 14:48; Lk 22:52.

β. from one point to another across, over w. motion implied (Hom.+; LXX) περιπατεῖν, ἐλθεῖν ἐ. τ. θάλασσαν or ἐ. τ. ὕδατα Mt 14:25, 28f; J 6:19 P⁷⁵. Of spreading across the land (PsSol 17:10): famine Ac 7:11; 11:28; darkness Mt 27:45; Lk 23:44. ἐ. σταδίους δώδεκα χιλιάδων across twelve thousand stades Rv 21:16 v.l. (Polyaenus 5, 44, 4 ἐ. στάδια δέκα); ἐ. πλεῖον further (1 Esdr 2:24; 2 Macc 10:27) Ac 4:17.

γ. of goal attained (Hom. et al.; LXX) on, upon someone or someth. πέσατε ἐφʼ ἡμᾶς Lk 23:30 (Hos 10:8). ἔπεσεν ἐ. τὰ πετρώδη Mt 13:5; cp. Lk 13:4. ἔρχεσθαι ἐ. τινα come upon someone Mt 3:16; also καταβαίνειν fr. above J 1:33; cp. Rv 16:21. ἀναβαίνειν (Jos., Ant. 13, 138; Just., A II, 12, 7) Lk 5:19. ἐπιβαίνειν Mt 21:5 (Zech 9:9).—Ac 2:3; 9:4 al.; διασωθῆναι ἐ. τ. γῆν be brought safely to the land 27:44; cp. vs. 43; Lk 8:27. ἐ. τὸ πλοῖον to the ship Ac 20:13. ἀναπεσεῖν ἐ. τὴν γῆν lie down or sit down on the ground Mt 15:35. ἔρριψεν αὐτὸν χαμαὶ ἐ. τὸν σάκκον he threw himself down on the sackcloth GJs 13:1. τιθέναι τι ἐ. τι put someth. on someth. (JosAs 16:11) Mt 5:15; Lk 11:33; Mk 8:25 v.l.; likew. ἐπιτιθέναι (JosAs 29:5) Mt 23:4; Mk 8:25; Lk 15:5; J 9:6, 15; Ac 15:10. ἐπιβάλλειν τ. χεῖρας ἐ. τινα (Gen 22:12 al.) Mt 26:50; Lk 21:12; Ac 5:18. Mainly after verbs of placing, laying, putting, bringing, etc. on, to: ἀναβιβάζω, ἀναφέρω, βάλλω, γράφω, δίδωμι, ἐγγίζω, ἐπιβιβάζω, ἐπιγράφω, ἐποικοδομέω, ἐπιρ(ρ)ίπτω, θεμελιόω, ἵστημι, κατάγω, οἰκοδομέω, σωρεύω; s. these entries. Sim. βρέχειν ἐ. τινα cause rain to fall upon someone Mt 5:45 (cp. PsSol 17:18); also τ. ἥλιον ἀνατέλλειν ἐ. τινα cause the sun to rise so that its rays fall upon someone *ibid. τύπτειν τινὰ ἐ. τὴν σιαγόνα strike on the cheek Lk 6:29. πίπτειν ἐ. (τὸ) πρόσωπον (Jdth 14:6) on the face Mt 17:6; 26:39; Lk 5:12; 17:16; 1 Cor 14:25; Rv 7:11.—To, upon w. acc. of thing πορεύεσθαι ἐ. τὴν ὁδόν go to the road Ac 8:26; cp. 9:11. ἐ. τὰς διεξόδους Mt 22:9. ἵνα μὴ πνέῃ ἄνεμος ἐ. πᾶν δένδρον so that no wind should blow upon any tree Rv 7:1.

δ. of closeness to someth. or someone to, up to, in the neighborhood of, on ἐ. τὸ μνημεῖον up to the tomb Mk 16:2; Lk 24:1 v.l., 22, 24; cp. ἐ. τὸ μνῆμα Mk 16:2 v.l.; Lk 24:1. ἔρχεσθαι ἐ. τι ὕδωρ come to some water Ac 8:36. ἐ. τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν to the iron gate 12:10. καταβαίνειν ἐ. τὴν θάλασσαν go down to the sea J 6:16. ἐ. τὸν Ἰορδάνην Mt 3:13 (Just., D. 88, 3 al.). ἀναπίπτειν ἐ. τὸ στῆθος he leaned back on (Jesus’) breast J 13:25; 21:20. πίπτειν ἐ. τοὺς πόδας fall at (someone’s) feet Ac 10:25 (JosAs 14:10 ἔπεσεν ἐ πρόσωπον ἐ. τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ). ἐ. τ. ἀκάνθας among the thorns Mt 13:7.—W. acc. of pers. to someone ἐ. τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐλθόντες they came to Jesus J 19:33; cp. Mt 27:27; Mk 5:21.

ε. in imagery of goal or objective to, toward (Just., A II, 7, 6 ἐπʼ ἀμφότερα τρέπεσθαι) ἐπιστρέφειν, ἐπιστρέφεσθαι ἐ. τινα turn to (Dt 30:10; 31:20 al.; Ar. 2, 1 ἔλθωμεν καὶ ἐ. τὸ ἀνθρώπινον γένος ‘let us now turn to …’; Just., D. 56, 11 ἐ. τὰς γραφὰς ἐπανελθών) Lk 1:17; Ac 9:35; 11:21; 14:15; 26:20; Gal 4:9; 1 Pt 2:25.

⑤ marker of manner, corresponding to an adv., w. dat. (Aeschyl., Suppl. 628 ἐπʼ ἀληθείᾳ; UPZ 162 VI, 3 [117 B.C.] κακοτρόπως καὶ ἐ. ῥαδιουργίᾳ; POxy 237 VI, 21 ἐ. τῇ τῶν ἀνθρ. σωτηρίᾳ; ἐφʼ ὁράσει En 14:8; Just., A I, 9, 3 ἐφʼ ὕβρει; 55, 7 ἐ. τούτῳ τῷ σχήματι ‘in this form’; Tat. 17, 1 ἐπʼ ἀκριβείᾳ; Ath. 33, 2 ἐφʼ ἑνὶ γάμῳ) ὁ σπείρων ἐπʼ εὐλογίαις (in contrast to ὁ σπείρων φειδομένως one who sows sparingly) one who sows in blessing (i.e. generously) 2 Cor 9:6. ἐπʼ εὐλογίαις θερίζειν reap generously ibid.

⑥ marker of basis for a state of being, action, or result, on, w. dat. (Hom. et al.)

ⓐ ἐπʼ ἄρτῳ ζῆν live on bread Mt 4:4; Lk 4:4 (both Dt 8:3. cp. Ps.-Pla., Alcib. 1, 105c; Plut., Mor. 526d; Alciphron 3, 7, 5; SibOr 4, 154). ἐ. τῷ ῥήματί σου depending on your word Lk 5:5. οὐ συνῆκαν ἐ. τοῖς ἄρτοις they did not arrive at an understanding (of it) (by reflecting) on (the miracle of) the loaves Mk 6:52 (cp. Demosth. 18, 121 τί σαυτὸν οὐκ ἐλλεβορίζεις ἐ. τούτοις [sc. λόγοις];=why do you not come to an understanding concerning these words?). ἐ. τῇ πίστει on the basis of faith Ac 3:16; Phil 3:9. ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι on the basis of hope, supporting itself on hope Ac 2:26 (? s. ἐλπίς 1bα); Ro 4:18; 8:20; 1 Cor 9:10; Tit 1:2.—Ac 26:6 ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι gives the basis of the trial at law, as does ἐ. εὐεργεσίᾳ 4:9. ἀπολύειν τ. γυναῖκα ἐ. πορνείᾳ Mt 19:9 (cp. Dio Chrys. 26 [43], 10 ἀπολύειν ἐπʼ ἀργυρίῳ; Ath. 2, 3 κρίνεσθαι … μὴ ἐ. τῷ ὀνόματι, ἐ. δὲ τῷ ἀδικήματι). γυναικὸς ἐ. πόλλαις ἁμαρτίαις διαβληθείσης Papias (2:17). On the basis of the testimony of two witnesses (cp. Appian, Iber. 79 §343 ἤλεγχον ἐ. μάρτυσι) Hb 10:28 (Dt 17:6); sim. use of ἐ. τινί on the basis of someth.: 8:6; 9:10, 15 (here it may also be taken in the temporal sense; s. 18 below), 17. ἁμαρτάνειν ἐ. τῷ ὁμοιώματι τ. παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ Ro 5:14 (ὁμοίωμα 1). δαπανᾶν ἐ. τινι pay the expenses for someone Ac 21:24. ἀρκεῖσθαι ἐ. τινι be content w. someth. 3J 10.

ⓑ w. verbs of believing, hoping, trusting: πεποιθέναι (Wsd 3:9; Sus 35; 1 Macc 10:71; 2 Macc 7:40 and oft.) Lk 11:22; 18:9; 2 Cor 1:9; Hb 2:13 (2 Km 22:3). πιστεύειν Lk 24:25; Ro 9:33; 10:11; 1 Pt 2:6 (the last three Is 28:16). ἐλπίζειν (2 Macc 2:18; Sir 34:7) Ro 15:12 (Is 11:10); 1 Ti 4:10; 6:17; cp. 1J 3:3. παρρησιάζεσθαι Ac 14:3.

ⓒ after verbs which express feelings, opinions, etc.: at, because of, from, with (Hom. et al.) διαταράσσεσθαι Lk 1:29. ἐκθαυμάζειν Mk 12:17. ἐκπλήσσεσθαι Mt 7:28; Mk 1:22; Lk 4:32; Ac 13:12. ἐξίστασθαι (Jdth 11:16; Wsd 5:2 al.) Lk 2:47. ἐπαισχύνεσθαι (Is 1:29) Ro 6:21. εὐφραίνεσθαι (Sir 16:1; 18:32; 1 Macc 11:44) Rv 18:20. θαμβεῖσθαι Mk 10:24; cp. Lk 5:9; Ac 3:10. θαυμάζειν (Lev 26:32; Jdth 10:7 al.; Jos., Ant. 10, 277) Mk 12:17 v.l. μακροθυμεῖν (Sir 18:11; 29:8; 35:19) Mt 18:26, 29; Lk 18:7; Js 5:7. μετανοεῖν (Plut., Ag. 803 [19, 5]; Ps.-Lucian, Salt. 84; Prayer of Manasseh [=Odes 12] 7; Just., A I, 61, 10; D. 95, 3 al.) 2 Cor 12:21. ὀδυνᾶσθαι (cp. Tob 6:15) Ac 20:38. ὀργίζεσθαι Rv 12:17. σπλαγχνίζεσθαι Mt 14:14; Lk 7:13. συλλυπεῖσθαι Mk 3:5. στυγνάζειν 10:22. χαίρειν (PEleph 13, 3; Jos., Ant. 1, 294; Tob 13:15; Bar 4:33; JosAs 4:2; Ar. 15, 7) Mt 18:13; Lk 1:14; 13:17; Ro 16:19 al. χαρὰν καὶ παράκλησιν ἔχειν Phlm 7. χαρὰ ἔσται Lk 15:7; cp. vs. 10 (Jos., Ant. 6, 116 ἡ ἐ. τῇ νίκῃ χαρά). Also w. verbs that denote aroused feelings παραζηλοῦν and παροργίζειν make jealous and angry at Ro 10:19 (Dt 32:21). παρακαλεῖν 1 Th 3:7a (cp. Just., D. 78:8 παράκλησιν ἐχουσῶν ἐ.), as well as those verbs that denote an expression of the emotions ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι (cp. Tob 13:15; Ps 69:5) Lk 1:47; Hs 8, 1, 18; 9, 24, 2. καυχᾶσθαι (Diod S 16, 70; Sir 30:2) Ro 5:2. κοπετὸν ποιεῖν (cp. 3 Macc 4:3) Ac 8:2. ὀλολύζειν Js 5:1. αἰνεῖν (cp. X., An. 3, 1, 45 al.) Lk 2:20. δοξάζειν (Polyb. 6, 53, 10; cp. Diod S 17, 21, 4 δόξα ἐ. ἀνδρείᾳ=fame because of bravery) Ac 4:21; 2 Cor 9:13. εὐχαριστεῖν give thanks for someth. (s. εὐχαριστέω 2; UPZ 59, 10 [168 B.C.] ἐ. τῷ ἐρρῶσθαί σε τ. θεοῖς εὐχαρίστουν) 1 Cor 1:4; cp. 2 Cor 9:15; 1 Th 3:9.—ἐφʼ ᾧ = ἐπὶ τούτῳ ὅτι for this reason that, because (Diod S 19, 98; Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 112 §520; Ael. Aristid. 53 p. 640 D.; Synes., Ep. 73 p. 221c; Damasc., Vi. Isid. 154; Syntipas p. 12, 9; 127, 8; Thomas Mag. ἐφʼ ᾧ ἀντὶ τοῦ διότι; cp. W-S. §24, 5b and 12f. S. WKümmel, D. Bild des Menschen im NT ’48, 36–40) Ro 5:12 (SLyonnet, Biblica 36, ’55, 436–56 [denies a causal sense here]. On the probability of commercial idiom s. FDanker, FGingrich Festschr. ’72, 104f, also Ro 5:12, Sin under Law: NTS 14, ’68, 424–39; against him SPorter, TynBull 41, ’90, 3–30, also NTS 39, ’93, 321–33; difft. JFitzmyer, Anchor Bible Comm.: Romans, ad loc. ‘w. the result that all have sinned’); 2 Cor 5:4; Phil 3:12; for, indeed 4:10.

⑦ marker of addition to what is already in existence, to, in addition to. W. dat. (Hom. et al.; PEleph 5, 17 [284/283 B.C.] μηνὸς Τῦβι τρίτῃ ἐπʼ εἰκάδι; Tob 2:14; Sir 3:27; 5:5) προσέθηκεν τοῦτο ἐ. πᾶσιν he added this to everything else Lk 3:20 (cp. Lucian, Luct. [On Funerals], 24). ἐ. τ. παρακλήσει ἡμῶν in addition to our comfort 2 Cor 7:13. λύπη ἐ. λύπῃ grief upon grief Phil 2:27 v.l. (cp. Soph., Oed. C. 544, also Polyb. 1, 57, 1 πληγὴ ἐ. πληγῇ; Plut., Mor. 123f; Polyaenus 5, 52 ἐ. φόνῳ φόνον; Quint. Smyrn. 5, 602 ἐ. πένθει πένθος=sorrow upon sorrow; Sir 26:15). ἐ. τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ to your prayer of thanks 1 Cor 14:16. So perh. also Hb 8:1. ἐ. πᾶσι τούτοις to all these Col 3:14; Lk 16:26 v.l. (X., Mem. 1, 2, 25 al.; Sir 37:15; cp. 1 Macc 10:42; Just., D. 133, 1 ἐ. τούτοις πᾶσι).—W. acc.: addition to someth. of the same kind Mt 6:27; Lk 12:25; Rv 22:18a. λύπην ἐ. λύπην sorrow upon sorrow Phil 2:27 (cp. Is 28:10, 13; Ezk 7:26; Ps 68:28).

⑧ marker of perspective, in consideration of, in regard to, on the basis of, concerning, about, w. gen. (Antig. Car. 164 ἐ. τῶν οἴνων ἀλλοιοῦσθαι; 4 Macc. 2:9 ἐ. τῶν ἑτέρων … ἔστιν ἐπιγνῶναι τοῦτο, ὅτι …; Ath. 29, 2 τὰ ἐ. τῆς μανίας πάθη) ἐ. δύο ἢ τριῶν μαρτύρων on the evidence of two or three witnesses 1 Ti 5:19 (cp. TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 22ff. [Stone p. 32]). Sim. in the expr. ἐ. στόματος δύο μαρτύρων (Dt 19:15) Mt 18:16; 2 Cor 13:1. ἐπʼ αὐτῆς on the basis of it Hb 7:11. ἐπʼ ἀληθείας based on truth = in accordance w. truth, truly (Demosth. 18, 17 ἐπʼ ἀληθείας οὐδεμιᾶς εἰρημένα; POxy 255, 16 [48 A.D.]; Da 2:8; Tob 8:7; En 104:11) Mk 12:14, 32; Lk 4:25; 20:21; Ac 4:27. ἐφʼ ἑαυτοῦ based on himself = to or by himself (X., An. 2, 4, 10; Demosth. 18, 224 ἐκρίνετο ἐφʼ ἑαυτοῦ; Dionys. Hal., Comp. Verb. 16 ἐ. σεαυτοῦ. Cp. Kühner-G. I 498e) 2 Cor 10:7.—To introduce the object which is to be discussed or acted upon λέγειν ἐ. τινος speak of, about someth. (Pla., Charm., 155d, Leg. 2, 662d; Isocr. 6, 41; Aelian, VH 1, 30; Jer 35:8; EpArist 162; 170; Ath. 5:1 ἐ. τοῦ νοητοῦ … δογματίζειν) Gal 3:16. Do someth. on, in the case of (cp. 1 Esdr 1:22) σημεῖα ποιεῖν ἐ. τῶν ἀσθενούντων work miracles on the sick J 6:2.—On B 13:6 s. τίθημι 1bζ.—In ref. to someth. (Aristot., Pol. 1280a, 17; 4 Macc 12:5 τῶν ἐ. τῆς βασιλείας … πραγμάτων; Just., A I, 5, 1 ἐφʼ ἡμῶν ‘in our case’, D. 131, 4; Ath. 15, 3 ἐ. τῆς ὕλης καὶ τοῦ θεοῦ ‘as respects God and matter, so …’) ἐ. τινων δεῖ ἐγκρατεύεσθαι in certain matters one must practice self-control Hm 8:1. οὔτε … οἴδασι τὸν ἐ. τοῦ πυροῦ σπόρον nor do they comprehend (the figurative sense of) the sowing of wheat AcPlCor 2:26 (cp. 1 Cor 15:36f).

⑨ marker of power, authority, control of or over someone or someth., over

ⓐ w. gen. (Hdt. 5, 109 al.; Mitt-Wilck. I/1, 124, 1=BGU 1120, 1 [5 B.C.] πρωτάρχῳ ἐ. τοῦ κριτηρίου; 287, 1; LXX; AscIs 2:5 τοῦ ἐ. τῶν πραγματε[ι] ῶν=Denis p. 109) βασιλεύειν ἐ. τινος (Judg 9:8, 10; 1 Km 8:7) Rv 5:10. ἔχειν βασιλείαν ἐ. τῶν βασιλέων 17:18. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐ. τινος have power over someone 20:6. διδόναι ἐξουσίαν ἐ. τινος 2:26. καθιστάναι τινὰ ἐ. τινος set someone over, put someone in charge, of someth. or someone (Pla., Rep. 5, 460b; Demosth. 18, 118; Gen 39:4f; 1 Macc 6:14; 10:37; 2 Macc 12:20 al.; EpArist 281; τεταγμένος En 20:5) Mt 24:45; Lk 12:42; Ac 6:3. εἶναι ἐ. τινος (Synes., Ep. 79 p. 224d; Tob 1:22; Jdth 14:13; 1 Macc 10:69) ὸ̔ς ἦν ἐ. πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς who was in charge of all her treasure 8:27. Of God ὁ ὢν ἐ. πάντων (Apollonius of Tyana [I A.D.] in Eus., PE 4, 13) Ro 9:5; cp. Eph 4:6. ὁ ἐ. τινος w. ὤν to be supplied (Demosth. 18, 247 al.; Diod S 13, 47, 6; Plut., Pyrrh. 385 [5, 7], Aemil. Paul. 267 [23, 6]; PTebt 5, 88 [118 B.C.] ὁ ἐ. τ. προσόδων; 1 Macc 6:28; 2 Macc 3:7; 3 Macc 6:30 al.; EpArist 110; 174) ὁ ἐ. τοῦ κοιτῶνος the chamberlain Ac 12:20.

ⓑ w dat. (X., Cyr. 1, 2, 5; 2, 4, 25 al., An. 4, 1, 13; Demosth. 19, 113; Aeschines 2, 73; Esth 8:12e; Just., A II, 5, 2 ἀγγέλοις οὓς ἐ. τούτοις ἔταξε; cp. Ath. 24, 3; Ath. 6, 4 τὸν ἐ. τῇ κινήσει τοῦ σώματος λόγον) Mt 24:47; Lk 12:44.

ⓒ w. acc. (X., Hell. 3, 4, 20 al.; Dionys. Byz. §56 θεῷ ἐ. πάντα δύναμις; LXX; PsSol 17:3, 32) βασιλεύειν ἐ. τινα rule over someone (Gen 37:8; Judg 9:15 B al.) Lk 1:33; 19:14, 27; Ro 5:14. καθιστάναι τινὰ ἐ. τινα set someone over someone (X., Cyr. 4, 5, 58) κριτὴν ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς as judge over you Lk 12:14; ἡγούμενον ἐπʼ Αἴγυπτον Ac 7:10; cp. Hb 2:7 v.l. (Ps 8:7); 3:6; 10:21. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐ. τι Rv 16:9. ἐξουσίαν διδόναι ἐ. τι (Sir 33:20) Lk 9:1; 10:19; Rv 6:8; cp. 22:14. φυλάσσειν φυλακὰς ἐ. τι Lk 2:8 (cp. En 100:5). ὑπεραίρεσθαι ἐ. τινα exalt oneself above someone 2 Th 2:4 (cp. Da 11:36); but here the mng. against is also poss. (s. 12b below). πιστὸς ἐ. τι faithful over someth. Mt 25:21, 23.

⑩ marker of legal proceeding, before, w. acc. in the lang. of the law-courts ἐ. ἡγεμόνας καὶ βασιλεῖς ἄγεσθαι be brought before governors and kings Mt 10:18; cp. Lk 21:12 (cp. BGU 22, 36 [114 A.D.] ἀξιῶ ἀκθῆναι [=ἀχθῆναι] τ. ἐνκαλουμένους ἐ. σὲ πρὸς δέουσαν ἐπέξοδον; Just., A II, 2, 12 ἐ. Οὔρβικον). ὑπάγεις ἐπʼ ἄρχοντα you are going before the magistrate Lk 12:58; cp. Ac 16:19. ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐ. τὸν Πιλᾶτον Lk 23:1. ἐ. τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς Ac 9:21. ἐ. Καίσαρα πορεύεσθαι come before the emperor 25:12. ἐ. τὰς συναγωγάς Lk 12:11. ἐ. τὸ βῆμα Ac 18:12. Cp. 3 above. Here the focus is on transfer to the judiciary.

⑪ marker of purpose, goal, result, to, for, w. acc. (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 2, 3 Jac. ἐ. κατοικίαν) ἐ. τὸ βάπτισμα for baptism=to have themselves baptized Mt 3:7 (cp. Just., A I, 61, 10 ἐ. τὸ λουτρόν; D. 56, 1 ἐ. τὴν … κρίσιν πεμφθεῖσι). ἐ. τὴν θεωρίαν ταύτην for (i.e. to see) this sight Lk 23:48 (sim. Hom. et al.; POxy 294, 18 [22 A.D.]; LXX; Tat. 23, 2 ἐ. τὴν θέαν). ἐ. τὸ συμφέρον to (our) advantage Hb 12:10 (cp. Tat. 6, 1; 34, 2 οὐκ ἐ. τι χρήσιμον ‘to no purpose’). ἐ. σφαγήν Ac 8:32 (Is 53:7); cp. Mt 22:5; ἐ. τ. τελειότητα Hb 6:1. ἐ. τοῦτο for this (X., An. 2, 5, 22; Jos., Ant. 12, 23) Lk 4:43. ἐφʼ ὅ; for what (reason)? Mt 26:50 v.l. (s. ὅς 1bα and 1iβ). Cp. 16.

⑫ marker of hostile opposition, against

ⓐ w. dat. (Hom. et al.; 2 Macc 13:19; Sir 28:23 v.l.; fig. Ath. 22, 7 τοὺς ἐπʼ αὐτοῖς λόγους ‘counter-evidence’) Lk 12:52f (s. use of acc. b below); Ac 11:19. Cp. J 8:7 v.l. (1bβ above).

ⓑ w. acc. (Hdt. 1, 71; X., Hell. 3, 4, 20 al.; Jos., Ant. 13, 331; LXX; En; TestJud 3:1 al.; JosAs 19:2; Just., D. 103, 7; Tat. 36, 2) ὥρμησαν ἐ. αὐτόν Ac 7:57. ἔρχεσθαι Lk 14:31. ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐ. γονεῖς Mt 10:21; Mk 13:12; cp. ἔθνος ἐ. ἔθνος Mt 24:7; Mk 13:8. ἐφʼ ἑαυτόν divided against himself Mt 12:26; Mk 3:24f, 26; Lk 11:17f; cp. J 13:18 (s. Ps 40:10); Ac 4:27; 13:50 al.—Lk 12:53 (4 times; the first and third occurrences w. the acc. are prob. influenced by usage in Mic 7:6; the use of the dat. Lk 12:52f [s. a above] w. a verb expressing a circumstance is in accord with older Gk. [Il. et al.], which prefers the acc. with verbs of motion in ref. to hostility). Cp. 15.

⑬ marker of number or measure, w. acc. (Hdt. et. al.; LXX; GrBar 3:6) ἐ. τρίς (CIG 1122, 9; PHolm α18) three times Ac 10:16; 11:10. So also ἐ. πολύ more than once Hm 4, 1, 8. ἐ. πολύ (also written ἐπιπολύ) in a different sense to a great extent, carefully (Hdt., Thu. et al.; Lucian, D. Deor. 6, 2; 25, 2; 3 Macc 5:17; Jos., Ant. 17, 107) B 4:1. ἐ. πλεῖον to a greater extent, further (Hdt., Thu. et al.; Diod S 11, 60, 5 al.; prob. 2 Macc 12:36; TestGad 7:2; Ar. 4, 3; Ath. 7, 1 ἐ. το πλεῖστον) 2 Ti 3:9; 1 Cl 18:3 (Ps 50:4). ἐ. τὸ χεῖρον 2 Ti 3:13. ἐφʼ ὅσον to the degree that, in so far as (Diod S 1, 93, 2; Maximus Tyr. 11, 3c ἐφʼ ὅσον δύναται; Hierocles 14 p. 451) Mt 25:40, 45; B 4:11; 17:1; Ro 11:13.

⑭ marker indicating the one to whom, for whom, or about whom someth. is done, to, on, about

ⓐ w. dat. πράσσειν τι ἐ. τινι do someth. to someone Ac 5:35 (thus Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 15 §51; cp. δρᾶν τι ἐ. τινι Hdt. 3, 14; Aelian, NA 11, 11); about γεγραμμένα ἐπʼ αὐτῷ J 12:16 (cp. Hdt. 1, 66). προφητεύειν ἐ. τινι Rv 10:11. μαρτυρεῖν bear witness about Hb 11:4; Rv 22:16. ἐ. σοὶ … φανερώσει κύριος τὸ λύτρον the Lord will reveal the salvation to you GJs 7:2.

ⓑ w. acc.

α. ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον the man on whom the miracle had been performed Ac 4:22 (cp. Just., D. 128, 1 κρίσεως γεγενημένης ἐ. Σόδομα). ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν λέγεται ταῦτα the one about whom this was said Hb 7:13 (cp. ἐ. πόρρω οὖσαν [γενεὰν] ἐγὼ λαλῶ En 1:2). γέγραπται ἐπʼ αὐτόν Mk 9:12f; cp. Ro 4:9; 1 Ti 1:18; βάλλειν κλῆρον ἐ. τι for someth. Mk 15:24; J 19:24 (Ps 21:19). ἀνέβη ὁ κλῆρος ἐ. Συμεών the lot came up in favor of Simeon GJs 24:4.

β. of powers, conditions, etc., which come upon someone or under whose influence someone is: on, upon, to, over ἐγένετο ῥῆμα θεοῦ ἐ. Ἰωάννην the word of God came to John Lk 3:2 (cp. Jer 1:1). Of divine blessings (cp. En 1:8; ParJer 5:28) Mt 10:13; 12:28; Lk 10:6; 11:20; cp. 10:9; Ac 10:10. ἵνα ἐπισκηνώσῃ ἐπʼ ἐμὲ ἡ δύναμις τ. Χριστοῦ that the power of Christ may rest upon me 2 Cor 12:9. χάρις θεοῦ ἦν ἐπʼ αὐτό Lk 2:40. Various verbs are used in ref. to the Holy Spirit, either in pass. or act. role, in connection w. ἐ. τινα: ἐκχεῖν Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f); cp. 10:45; Tit 3:6. ἀποστέλλειν (ἐξαποστέλλειν v.l.) Lk 24:49. ἐπέρχεσθαι 1:35; Ac 1:8 (Just., D. 87, 3; cp. ἔρχεσθαι A I, 33, 6; D. 49, 7 ἀπὸ τοῦ Ἠλίου ἐ. τὸν Ἰωάννην ἐλθεῖν). ἐπιπίπτειν 10:44. καταβαίνειν Lk 3:22; J 1:33. τίθεσθαι Mt 12:18 (cp. Is 42:1). Also εἶναι Lk 2:25. μένειν J 1:32f. ἀναπαύεσθαι 1 Pt 4:14. Of unpleasant or startling experiences Lk 1:12, 65; 4:36; Ac 13:11; 19:17; Rv 11:11.—Lk 19:43; 21:35, cp. vs. 34; J 18:4; Eph 5:6; cp. Rv 3:3.—Ro 2:2, 9; 15:3 (Ps 68:10). Of the blood of the righteous, that comes over or upon the murderers Mt 23:35; 27:25; Ac 5:28. Of care, which one casts on someone else 1 Pt 5:7 (Ps 54:23).

⑮ marker of feelings directed toward someone, in, on, for, toward, w. acc., after words that express belief, trust, hope: πιστεύειν ἐ. τινα, w. acc. (Wsd 12:2; Just., D. 16:4 al.) Ac 9:42; 11:17; 16:31; 22:19; Ro 4:24. πίστις Hb 6:1. πεποιθέναι (Is 58:14) Mt 27:43; 2 Th 3:4; 2 Cor 2:3. ἐλπίζειν (1 Ch 5:20; 2 Ch 13:18 al.; PsSol 9:10; 17:3; Just., D. 16:4 al.) 1 Pt 1:13; 1 Ti 5:5. After words that characterize an emotion or its expression: for κόπτεσθαι (Zech 12:10) Rv 1:7; 18:9. κλαίειν Lk 23:28; Rv 18:9 (cp. JosAs 15:9 χαρήσεται ἐ. σέ). σπλαγχνίζεσθαι Mt 15:32; Mk 8:2; 9:22; Hm 4, 3, 5; Hs 9, 24, 2. χρηστός toward Lk 6:35. χρηστότης Ro 11:22; Eph 2:7; cp. Ro 9:23. Esp. also if the feelings or their expressions are of a hostile nature: toward, against (cp. λοιδορεῖν Just., D. 137, 2) ἀποτομία Ro 11:22. μαρτύριον Lk 9:5. μάρτυς ἐ. τ. ἐμὴν ψυχήν a witness against my soul (cp. Dssm., LO 258; 355 [LAE 304; 417]) 2 Cor 1:23. ἀσχημονεῖν 1 Cor 7:36. μοιχᾶσθαι Mk 10:11. τολμᾶν 2 Cor 10:2 (En 7:4). βρύχειν τ. ὀδόντας Ac 7:54. Cp. 12.

⑯ marker of object or purpose, with dat. in ref. to someth. (Hom., Thu. et al.; SIG 888, 5 ἐ. τῇ τῶν ἀνθρ. σωτηρίᾳ; PTebt 44, 6 [114 B.C.] ὄντος μου ἐ. θεραπείᾳ ἐν τῷ Ἰσιείω; LXX; TestJob 3:5 ὁ ἐ. τῇ σωτηρίᾳ τῆς ἐμῆς ψυχῆς ἐλθών; Jos., Ant. 5, 101; Just., A I, 29, 1 ἐ. παίδων ἀναστροφῇ; D. 91, 4 ἐ. σωτηρίᾳ τῶν πιστευόντων) καλείν τινα ἐ. τινι call someone for someth. Gal 5:13 (on ἐπʼ ἐλευθερίᾳ cp. Demosth. 23, 124; [59], 32); ἐ. ἀκαθαρσίᾳ for impurity, i.e. so that we should be impure 1 Th 4:7. κτισθέντες ἐ. ἔργοις ἀγαθοῖς for good deeds Eph 2:10. λογομαχεῖν ἐ. καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων for the ruin of those who hear 2 Ti 2:14 (cp. Eur., Hipp. 511; X., Mem. 2, 3, 19 ἐ. βλάβη; Hdt. 1, 68 ἐ. κακῷ ἀνθρώπου; Polyb. 27, 7, 13 and PGM 4, 2440 ἐπʼ ἀγαθῷ=‘for good’). Cp. 11.

⑰ marker in idiom of authorization, w. dat.: the formula ἐ. τῷ ὀνοματί τινος, in the name of someone, used w. many verbs (Just., D. 39, 6 w. γίνεσθαι, otherw. ἐ. ὀνόματος, e.g. A I, 61, 13; w. διὰ τοῦ ὀ. and in oaths κατὰ τοῦ ὀ. A II, 6, 6, D. 30, 3; 85, 2.—Ath. 23, 1 ἐ. ὀνόματι εἰδώλων.—ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι LXX; JosAs 9:1), focuses on the authorizing function of the one named in the gen. (cp. WHeitmüller [‘Im Namen Jesu’ 1903, 13ff], ‘in connection with, or by the use of, i.e. naming, or calling out, or calling upon the name’ [88]): βαπτίζειν Ac 2:38. δέχεσθαί τινα Mt 18:5; Mk 9:37; Lk 9:48. διδάσκειν Ac 4:18; 5:28. δύναμιν ποιεῖν Mk 9:39. ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια Lk 9:49 v.l. ἔρχεσθαι Mt 24:5; Mk 13:6; Lk 21:8. κηρύσσειν 24:47. λαλεῖν Ac 4:17; 5:40. Semantically divergent from the preceding, but formulaically analogous, is καλεῖν τινα ἐ. τῷ ὀν. τινος name someone after someone (2 Esdr 17:63) Lk 1:59.—ὄνομα 1dγג.—M-M.

⑱ marker of temporal associations, in the time of, at, on, for

ⓐ w. gen., time within which an event or condition takes place (Hom.+) in the time of, under (kings or other rulers): in the time of Elisha Lk 4:27 (cp. Just., D. 46, 6 ἐ. Ἠλίου). ἐ. τῆς μετοικεσίας at the time of the exile Mt 1:11. Under=during the rule or administration of (Hes., Op. 111; Hdt. 6, 98 al.; OGI 90, 15; PAmh 43, 2 [173 B.C.]; UPZ 162 V, 5 [117 B.C.]; 1 Esdr 2:12; 1 Macc 13:42; 2 Macc 15:22; Jos., Ant. 12, 156 ἐ. ἀρχιερέως Ὀ.) ἐ. Ἀβιαθὰρ ἀρχιερέως under, in the time of, Abiathar the high priest Mk 2:26. ἐ. ἀρχιερέως Ἅννα καὶ Καιάφα Lk 3:2. ἐ. Κλαυδίου Ac 11:28 (Just., A I, 26, 2). ἐ. τῶν πατέρων in the time of the fathers 1 Cl 23:3. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτων τῶν ἡμερῶν in the last days (Gen 49:1; Num 24:14; Mi 4:1; Jer 37:24; Da 10:14) 2 Pt 3:3; Hs 9, 12, 3; cp. Hb 1:2. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου in the last time Jd 18. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου τῶν χρόνων at the end of the times/ages 1 Pt 1:20. ἐ. τῶν προσευχῶν μου when I pray, in my prayers (cp. PTebt 58, 31 [111 B.C.] ἐ. τ. διαλόγου, ‘in the discussion’; 4 Macc 15:19 ἐ. τ. βασάνων ‘during the tortures’; Sir 37:29; 3 Macc 5:40; Demetr.: 722, Fgm. 1, 14 Jac. ἐ. τοῦ ἀρίστου; Synes., Ep. 121 p. 258c ἐ. τῶν κοινῶν ἱερῶν) Ro 1:10; Eph 1:16; 1 Th 1:2; Phlm 4.

ⓑ w. dat., time at or during which (Hom. et al.; PTebt 5, 66 [118 B.C.]; PAmh 157; LXX; Just., A I, 13, 3 ἐ. χρόνοις Τίερίου) at, in, at the time of, during: ἐ. τοῖς νῦν χρόνοις in these present times 2 Cl 19:4. ἐ. τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ at the time of the first covenant Hb 9:15. ἐ. συντελείᾳ τ. αἰώνων at the close of the age 9:26 (Tat. 13, 1 ἐ. ς. τοῦ κόσμου; cp. Sir 22:10 and PLond III, 954, 18 p. 154 [260 A.D.] ἐ. τέλει τ. χρόνου; POxy 275, 20 [66 A.D.] ἐ. συνκλεισμῷ τ. χρόνου; En 27:3 ἐπʼ ἐσχάτοις αἰώσιν). ἐ. τῇ θυσίᾳ at the time of, together with, the sacrifice Phil 2:17. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ μνείᾳ ὑμῶν at every remembrance of you Phil 1:3. ἐ. παροργισμῷ ὑμῶν during your wrath, i.e. while you are angry Eph 4:26. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ ἀνάγκῃ in all (our) distress 1 Th 3:7b. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει 2 Cor 1:4. ἐ. τούτῳ in the meanwhile J 4:27 (Lucian, Dial. Deor. 17, 2, cp. Philops. 14 p. 41; Syntipas p. 76, 2 ἐφʼ ἡμέραις ἑπτα; 74, 6).

ⓒ w. acc.

α. answering the question ‘when?’ on: ἐ. τὴν αὔριον (Sb 6011, 14 [I B.C.]; PRyl 441 ἐ. τὴν ἐπαύριον) (on) the next day Lk 10:35; Ac 4:5. ἐ. τὴν ὥραν τ. προσευχῆς at the hour of prayer 3:1 (Polyaenus 8, 17 ἐ. ὥραν ὡρισμένην).

β. answering the qu. ‘how long?’ for, over a period of (Hom. et al.; Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 170, 8=BGU 1058, 9 [13 B.C.]; POxy 275, 9; 15 ἐ. τὸν ὅλον χρόνον; PTebt 381, 19 ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν χρόνον περίεστιν ἡ μήτηρ; LXX; En 106:15; TestJob 30:2 ἐ. ὥρας τρεῖς; TestJud 3:4; TestGad 5:11; Jos., Ant. 11, 2; Just., D. 142, 1 ἐ. ποσόν ‘for awhile’) ἐ. ἔτη τρία for three years (Phlegon: 257 Fgm. 36, 2, 1 Jac.) Lk 4:25. ἐ. τρεῖς ἡμέρας for three days (Diod S 13, 19, 2; Arrian, Anab. 4, 9, 4; GDI 4706, 119 [Thera] ἐπʼ ἀμέρας τρεῖς) GPt 8:30 al. ἐ. ἡμέρας πλείους over a period of many days (Jos., Ant. 4, 277) Ac 13:31.—16:18 (ἐ. πολλὰς ἡμέρας as Appian, Liby. 29 §124; cp. Diod S 3, 16, 4); 17:2; 19:8, 10, 34; 27:20; Hb 11:30. ἐ. χρόνον for a while (cp. Il. 2, 299; Hdt. 9, 22, 1; Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1257; Jos., Vi. 2) Lk 18:4. ἐ. πλείονα χρόνον (Diod S 3, 16, 6; Hero Alex. I p. 344, 17) Ac 18:20. ἐφʼ ὅσον χρόνον as long as Ro 7:1; 1 Cor 7:39; Gal 4:1. Also ἐφʼ ὅσον as long as Mt 9:15; 2 Pt 1:13 (for other mngs. of ἐφʼ ὅσον s. above under 13). ἐφʼ ἱκανόν (sc. χρόνον) for a considerable time (EpArist 109) Ac 20:11. ἐ. χρόνον ἱκανόν Qua. ἐ. πολύ for a long time, throughout a long period of time (Thu. 1, 7; 1, 18, 1; 2, 16, 1 al.; Appian, Liby. 5 §21; Arrian, Cyneg. 23, 1; Lucian, Toxar. 20; Wsd 18:20; Sir 49:13; JosAs 19:3; Jos., Vi. 66: Just., A I, 65, 3) Ac 28:6. ἐ. πλεῖον the same (schol. on Pind., N. 7, 56b; PLille 3, 16 [III B.C.]; Jdth 13:1; Sir prol. l. 7; Jos., Ant. 18, 150) Ac 20:9; any longer (Lucian, D. Deor. 5, 3; Appian, Hann. 54 §227; 3 Macc 5:8; Wsd 8:12; Ath. 12, 3) Ac 24:4; 1 Cl 55:1.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐπί
76 τις

τις, [full] τι, Indef. Pron.

A any one, any thing, enclitic through all cases (for exceptions v. infr.):—but τίς; τί; Interrog. Pron. who? what?, oxyt. in the monosyll. cases, parox. in the others:—Dialectal forms: Cypr. σις ( si se) Inscr.Cypr.135.10 H.; Arc. σις (with <*> for ς) IG5(2).262.25 (Mantinea, v B.C.); Thess. κις ib.9(2).515.12 ([place name] Larissa), 1226.4, 1229.27 ([place name] Phalanna), pl. κινες ib.517.41 ([place name] Larissa), neut. κι in διεκί, ποκκί (qq.v.); neut. pl. [dialect] Dor. σά, [dialect] Boeot. τά, [dialect] Aeol. dat. τίω, τίοισι (v. infr. B). (I.-E. q[uglide]i-, cf. Lat. quis, quid, etc.; for σά, τά, v. ἄσσα, σά μάν; with τέο (v. infr. B) cf. OSlav. gen. c<*>eso.)

A Indef. Pron. τις, τι, gen. [dialect] Ion. τεο Od.16.305, Hdt.1.58; more freq. τευ Il.2.388, al., Hdt.4.30, al., Meliss.7, etc.; Trag. and [dialect] Att. του A.Pr.21, Ar.Ach. 329, Th.1.70, etc. (sts. fem., S.Aj. 290, OT 1107 (lyr.), E.Hec. 370, etc.); του is rare after 300 B.C., never in LXX or NT, but found in IG12(5).798.17 (Tenos, iii B.C.), PCair.Zen.250.6, 647.23 (iii B.C.), Plb.3.23.3, revived by the Atticists, D.H.8.29, Plu.Fab.20, etc.; τινος Pi.P.2.90, IG12.16.17, 65.41, A.Eu. 5, Ch. 102, S.Ant. 698, al., Hdt.2.109, al. (Rh.Mus.72.483), etc.; dat. [dialect] Ion. τεῳ Il.16.227
, Od.11.502, Hdt.2.48, 5.86; Trag. and [dialect] Att. τῳ (also in Hom., Il.1.299, 12.328, Od.13.308, 20.297, al., always in masc.) A.Th. 1045, IG12.39.54, D.S.18.45; as fem., A.Th. 472, S. OT80, etc.; τινι (Hom. in the form οὔ τινι Il.17.68
, Od.14.96) Pi. O.9.26, al., B.17.12, Hdt.1.114 (elsewh. fem., 2.62, 3.69, 83, 4.113), A.Th. 1041, S.Aj. 443, 495, etc.; acc. τινα Il.1.62, 5.761, etc., neut. τι 2.122, etc.: dual τινε Od.4.26, Pl.Sph. 237d, Prm. 143c, 149e: pl. τινες (Hom. only in οὔ τινες Od.6.279
, 17.587 and οἵτινες (v. ὅστις)); [dialect] Dor. τινεν SIG527.127 (Drerus, iii B.C.); nom. and acc. neut. τινα ( ὅτινα Il.22.450
), never in Trag., Ar., Th., or Hdt., f.l. in Isoc.4.74, first in Pl.Chrm. 163d, Ep. 325a, D.47.63, Hyp.Ath.19, Alex.110, Sotad.Com.1.22, Arist.EN 1094a5, IG42(1).121.35 (Epid., iv B.C.), etc.; ἄσσα (q.v.) Od.19.218, never in Trag. or Hdt.; [dialect] Att. ἄττα first in Th.1.113, 2.100, Ar.Ra. 173, al., Pl.R. 400a, etc., never in LXX, Plb., D.S., Str., revived by the Atticists, D.H.Comp.3, etc.; gen. [dialect] Ion. τεων Hdt.2.175, 5.57, τεῶν cj. for γε ῶν in 4.76; τινων not in Hdt., first in Ar.Eq. 977 (lyr.); dat. τισι, τισιν, first in Hdt. 9.113, X.Ath.1.18; N.-W. [dialect] Dor. τινοις GDI1409.5 (Delph., iii B.C.); [dialect] Ion. τεοισι Hdt.8.113, 9.27 (for τεοις and τεον v. τεός); acc. τινας Il.15.735, Od.11.371 (also in οὕστινας, ὅτινας, v. ὅστις), etc.; neut. τινα (v. supr.):—any one, any thing, some one, some thing; and as Adj. any, some, and serving as the Indef. Art. a, an; θεός νύ τίς ἐστι κοτήεις Il.5.191
; καί τις θεὸς ἡγεμόνευεν Od.9.142
; οὐδέ τις αὐτὸν ἠείδη δμώων ib. 205; ἤ τι ὀϊσάμενος, ἢ.. ib. 339; μή τίς μοι ὑποδείσας ἀναδύη ib. 377, cf. 405- 410; εἴ τινά που μετ' ὄεσσι λάβοι ib. 418, cf. 421, al.; τις θεός construed as if τις θεῶν, 19.40, cf. 11.502, IG12.94.19, E.Hel. 1039.

II special usages:

1 some one (of many), i.e. many a one, ὧδε δέ τις εἴπεσκεν Il.7.201
, etc.: sts. with meiosis, implying all or men, 13.638, Od.3.224; so in Prose, Hdt.5.49 fin., Th.2.37, etc.

2 any one concerned, every one, εὖ μέν τις δόρυ θηξάσθω Il.2.382
; ἀλλά τις αὐτὸς ἴτω let every man come himself, 17.254; ἵνα τις στυγέῃσι καὶ ἄλλος 8.515
, cf. 16.209, 17.227, al.; so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., even with the imper., τοῦτό τις.. ἴστω S Aj.417 (lyr.), cf. E.Ba. 346, Ar.Av. 1187; ἀγορεύω τινὶ ἐμὲ μὴ βασανίζειν Id.Ra. 628
; τοὺς ξυμμάχους αὐτόν τινα κολάζειν that every man should himself chastise his own allies, Th.1.40, cf. 6.77; ὅ τί τις ἐδύνατο Id.7.75
; ἄμεινόν τινος better than any others, D.21.66, cf. 19.35:—this is more fully expressed by adding other pronominal words, τις ἕκαστος Od.9.65
, Th.6.31, etc.; πᾶς τις A.Ag. 1205
, Hdt.6.80, Th.8.94, etc.; ἅπας τις Hdt.3.113
, etc.; οὐδέν τι μᾶλλον Id.4.118
. In these senses, τις is freq. combined with pl. words, οἱ κακοὶ.. οὐκ ἴσασι, πρίν τις ἐκβάλῃ, for πρὶν ἐκβάλωσι, S.Aj. 965; οἷς ἂν ἐπίω, ἧσσόν τις πρόσεισι, for ἧσσον προσίασι, Th.4.85; ἐτόλμα τις.., ὁρῶντες Id.2.53
, cf. 7.75; esp. after εἴ or ἤν τις, X. Mem.1.2.62, al.

3 in reference to a definite person, whom one wishes to avoid naming, οὐκ ἔφασαν ἰέναι, ἐὰν μή τις χρήματα διδῷ (i.e. Cyrus) Id.An.1.4.12, cf. Ar.Ra. 552, Theoc.5.122; so also euphem. for something bad, ἤν τι ποιῶμεν Th.2.74
; ἂν οὗτός τι πάθῃ D.4.11
: hence for the [ per.] 1st or [ per.] 2nd pers. Pron., ἅ τιν' οὐ πείσεσθαι ὀΐω Il.1.289
, cf. S.Ant. 751; ποῖ τις τρέψεται; for ποῖ τρέψομαι; Ar.Th. 603, cf. S.Aj. 245 (lyr.), 1138, Th.4.59, X.An.3.4.40, 5.7.31, etc.

4 indefinitely, where we say they, French on, sts. with an ironical force, φοβεῖταί τις A.Ch.59
(lyr.); μισεῖ τις ἐκεῖνον D.4.8
; as voc., τὸν Πλοῦτον ἔξω τις κάλει call P. out, somebody, Ar.Pl. 1196.

5 τις, τι may be opposed, expressly or by implication, to οὐδείς, οὐδέν, and mean somebody, something, by meiosis for some great one, some great thing, ηὔχεις τις εἶναι you boasted that you were somebody, E.El. 939; εἰσὶν ὅμως τινὲς οἱ εὐδοκιμοῦντες Arist.Pol. 1293b13
; τὸ δοκεῖν τιν' εἶναι Men.156
; τὸ δοκεῖν τινὲς εἶναι D.21.213
; ὡς σὲ μὲν ἐν τῇ πόλει δεῖ τινὰ φαίνεσθαι, τὴν πόλιν δ' ἐν τοῖς Ἕλλησι μηδενὸς ἀξίαν εἶναι Id.10.71
; κἠγών τις φαίνομαι ἦμεν after all I too am somebody, Theoc.11.79, cf. Act.Ap.5.36; also in neut., οἴονταί τι εἶναι ὄντες οὐδενὸς ἄξιοι Pl.Ap. 41e
, cf.Phd. 63c, Phdr. 243a, Euthd. 303c, etc.:— so τι λέγειν to be near the mark, opp. οὐδὲν λέγειν, Id.Prt. 339c, R. 329e, Phdr. 260a, etc.; ἵνα καὶ εἰδῶμεν εἴ τι ὅδε λέγει Id.Cra. 407e
; οἴεσθέ τι ποιεῖν, οὐδὲν ποιοῦντες Id.Smp. 173c
.

b τις is sts. opp. to another word, ἀελλοπόδων μέν τιν' εὐφραίνοισιν ἵππων τιμαί.., τέρπεται δὲ καί τις.. Pi.Fr. 221
; τισὶ τῶν πολιτῶν ἀποροῦσι συνεξέδωκε θυγατέρας.., τοὺς δ' ἐλύσατο ἐκ τῶν πολεμίων Lys.19.59
; μέρος μέν τι σιδήρου, μέρος δέ τι ὀστράκινον LXX Da.2.33
(more freq. with the Article, v. infr. 10 c); ἔστιν οὖν οὐ πᾶν τὸ ταχύ, ἀλλά τι (sic codd. BT) αὐτοῦ ἀγαστόν Pl.Cra. 412c
; ἀναγκαῖον ἤτοι πᾶσι τοῖς πολίταις ἀποδίδοσθαι πάσας ταύτας τὰς κρίσεις ἢ τισὶ πάσας.. ἢ τινὰς μὲν αὐτῶν πᾶσι τινὰς δὲ τισίν Arist.Pol. 1298a9
, cf. 1277a23; τὸ μεῖζον τοῦθ' ὅπερ ἐστὶν ἑτέρου λέγεται· τινὸς γὰρ λέγεται μεῖζον greater than something, Id.Cat. 6a38; τὸ πρώτως ὂν καὶ οὐ τὶ ὂν ἀλλ' ὂν ἁπλῶς Id.Metaph. 1028a30
; πότερον τῷ τυχόντι ἢ τισίν; Id.Pol. 1269a26.

6 with pr. names τις commonly signifies one named so-and-so, ἦν δέ τις ἐν Τρώεσσι Δάρης Il.5.9
, cf. X.An.3.1.4, etc.; with a sense of contempt, Θερσίτης τις ἦν there was one Thersites, S.Ph. 442.

b one of the same sort, converting the pr. name into an appellative, ἤ τις Ἀπόλλων ἢ Πάν an Apollo or a Pan, A.Ag.55 (anap.); [πόλιες] ταὶ μέλονται πρός τινος ἢ Διὸς ἢ γλαυκᾶς Ἀθάνας Lyr.in PVat.11v xi7; Σκύλλαν τινά A.Ag. 1233
, cf.Ar.V. 181, Av. 512, Ra. 912: so also ὥς τις ἥλιος A.Ag. 288
; ἰσθμόν τιν' Ar. Th. 647.

7 with Adjs. τις combines to express the idea of a Subst. used as predicate, ὥς τις θαρσαλέος καὶ ἀναιδής ἐσσι προΐκτης a bold and impudent beggar, Od.17.449, cf. 18.382, 20.140, Il.3.220; ἐγώ τις, ὡς ἔοικε, δυσμαθής a dull ard, Pl.R. 358a, cf. Prt. 340e; φόβου πλέα τις εἶ a cow ard, A.Pr. 696, cf. Th. 979(lyr.), Ag. 1140 (lyr.); ὡς ταχεῖά τις.. χάρις διαρρεῖ in what swift fashion ( = ταχέως πως), S.Aj. 1266, cf. OT 618, Hdt.4.198; δεινόν τι ποιεύμενος thinking it a terrible thing, Id.3.155, 5.33.

8 with numerals and Adjs. expressing number, size, or the like , εἷς δέ τις ἀρχὸς ἀνὴρ.. ἔστω some one man, Il.1.144; ἕνα τιν' ἂν καθεῖσεν Ar.Ra. 911
; δώσει δέ τι ἕν γε φέρεσθαι Od.15.83
; τινὰ μίαν νύκτα Th.6.61
; προσκαλεσάμενός τινας δύο τῶν ἑκατονταρχῶν Act.Ap.23.23
; sts. the τις softens the definiteness of the numeral, ἑπτά τινες some seven, seven or so, Th.7.34; ἐς διακοσίους τινάς Id.3.111
, cf. 7.87, 8.21; so without an actual numeral, ἡμέρας τινάς some days, i.e. several, Id.3.52; στρατῷ τινι of a certain amount, considerable, Id.8.3; ἐνιαυτόν τινα a year or so, Id.3.68; so οὐ πολλοί τινες, τινὲς οὐ πολλοί, A.Pers. 510, Th. 6.94, etc.; ὀλίγοι τινές or τινὲς ὀλίγοι Id.2.17
, 3.7; οὔ τινα πολλὸν χρόνον no very long time, Hdt.5.48; τις στρατιὰ οὐ πολλή Th.6.61
; so also ὅσσος τις χρυσός what a store of gold, Od.10.45, cf. Hdt. 1.193, 2.18, etc.; κόσοι τινές Id.7.234
; πηλίκαι τινὲς τιμωρίαι Isoc. 20.3
; πολλὸς γάρ τις ἔκειτο Il.7.156
; ἐκ πολλοῦ τευ χρόνου Hdt. 2.58
.

9 with Pronominal words, ἀλλά τί μοι τόδε θυμὸς.. μερμηρίζει something, namely this, Od.20.38, cf. 380; οἷός τις what sort of a man, Il.5.638 (dub. l.), cf. Od.9.348, 20.377, Pl.Prt. 313a, etc.; ποῖός τις S.Ant.42
, OC 1163, Hdt.3.34, X.An.7.6.24, etc.; ὁποῖός τις Id.Cyr.2.2.2
, al.; εὐτυχίη τις τοιήδε Hdt.3.139
, cf. X.Mem.1.1.1, etc.; τοιοῦτός τις Id.An.5.8.7
.

10 with the Article,

a when a noun with the Art. is in appos. with τις, as ὅταν δ' ὁ κύριος παρῇ τις when the person in authority, whoever he be, is here, S.OC 289; τοὺς αὐτοέντας.. τιμωρεῖν τινας (v.l. τινα) Id.OT 107.

b in Philosophic writers, τις is added to the Art. to show that the Art. is used to denote a particular individual who is not specified in the general formula, although he would be in the particular case, ὁ τὶς ἄνθρωπος the individual man (whoever he may be), this or that man, opp. ἄνθρωπος (man in general), ὁ τὶς ἵππος, ἡ τὶς γραμματική, Arist.Cat. 1b4, 8; τὸ τὶ μέγεθος, opp. ὅλως τὸ μέγεθος, Id.Pol. 1283a4, cf. S.E.P.2.223; but in ἑνὸς γὰρ τό γε τὶ φήσεις σημεῖον εἶναι Pl.Sph. 237d
, the Art. is used as in Il. cc. s.v. ὁ, ἡ, τό B.1.5
: later ὅ τις (or ὁ τὶς ) much like ὁ δεῖνα, δεῦρο ὅ τις θεός, ὄφθητί μοι in a general formula of invocation, PMag.Par.1.236; αἴρω σε, ἥ τις βοτάνη ib.287; εἰς τήν τινα κρείαν (leg. χρείαν) ib.289.

c freq. in opposed clauses, ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δὲ.. E.Med. 1141
, Hec. 624, Pl.Phd. 99b, etc.; ὁ μέν τις.., ἄλλος δὲ.. E.IT 1407
; ὁ μὲν.., ὁ δέ τις.. X.Cyr.1.4.15
: pl., οἱ μέν τινες.., οἱ δὲ.. Hdt.1.127
, cf. Th.2.91; οἱ μέν τινες.., οἱ δὲ.., οἱ δέ τινες X.Cyr.3.2.10
, etc.; οἱ μὲν.., οἱ δέ τινες.. ib.6.1.26, etc.: also combined with other alternative words, ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δέ τις.., ἕτερος δέ τις.. Id.Smp.2.6
; ὁ μὲν.., ἕτερος δέ τις.., ὁ δὲ.. , etc., Ar. Pl. 162 sq.: also in neut., τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δέ τι.. Pl.Ep. 358a
; τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δὲ.. Hdt.3.40
; in adverb. sense, τὸ μὲν.., τὸ δέ τι.. partly.., partly.., Plb.1.73.4; and τι remains unaltered even when the Art. is pl., τὰ μέν τι μαχόμενοι, τὰ δὲ καὶ ἀναπαυόμενοι X.An.4.1.14
, cf. HG7.1.46; also τὸ δέ τι.. but in some measure.., without τὸ μέν preceding, Th.1.107, cf. 118, 7.48.

d later τις is used as in b supr. but without the Art., γράψον.. ὅτι τι καί τι εἴληφας that you have received such and such things, POxy.937.22 (iii A.D.); κληρονόμους καταλείπω τὴν θυγατέρα μού τινα καὶ τὸν σύντροφον αὐτῆς τινα καί τινα ib.1034.2 (ii A.D.); τίς τινι χαίρειν A to B greeting (in a draft letter), ib. 509 (ii A.D.).

II the neut. τι is used,

a collectively, ἦν τι καὶ ἐν ταῖς Συρακούσαις there was a party.., Th.7.48; so perh. τῶν ἄλλων οὔ πέρ τι πεφυγμένον ἐστ' Ἀφροδίτην, οὔτε θεῶν, οὔτ' ἀνθρώπων no class, h.Ven.34 (but masc. τις in h.Merc. 143).

b euphem. for something bad, v. supr. 3.

c joined with Verbs, somewhat, in any degree, at all, ἦ ῥά τί μοι κεχολώσεαι Il.5.421
; παρεθάρρυνέ τι αὐτούς X.HG6.4.7
, etc.: with Adjs. or Adverbs, οὕτω δή τι ἰσχυραί, οὕτω δή τι πολύγονον, etc., Hdt.3.12, 108, cf. 4.52; so also ὀλίγον τι ἧσσον Od.15.365
; οὐδέ τι μᾶλλον Hdt.6.123
, etc.; ἧσσόν τι Th.3.75
, etc.; οὐ πάνυ τι, πολύ τι, σχεδόν τι, v. πάνυ 1.3, πολύς 111.1a
, 2a, σχεδόν IV; also in conjunction with οὐδέν, μηδέν, οὐδέν τι πάντως Hdt.6.3
; οὐδέν, μηδέν τι μᾶλλον, E.Alc. 522, S.Aj. 280; μηδέν τι λίαν E.Andr. 1234
:—also καί τι καὶ.. ὑποψίᾳ in part also from suspicion, Th.1.107; καί πού τι καί Pi.O.1.28
.

12 τίς τε freq. in Hom., ὡς ὅτε τίς τε Il.3.33
, 4.141, v. τε B.

13 ἤ τις ἢ οὐδείς few or none, next to none, Hdt.3.140, X.Cyr.7.5.45, D.C.47.5, 48.4; ἤ τι ἢ οὐδέν little or nothing, Pl.Ap. 17b; ἢ οὐδεὶς ἤ τις D.C.41.62
(s. v.l.).

14 τις is pleonast. in such phrases as οὐδέν τι or μηδέν τι, v. supr. 11c.

b repeated in successive clauses, ὅσα λέγει τις ἢ πράσσειτις ἢψέγειν ἔχει S.Ant. 689
; εἴ τις δύο ἢ καὶ πλέους τις ἡμέρας λογίζεται Id.Tr. 944
(where however κἄτι πλείους is prob. cj.), cf. E.Or. 1218 (whereas τις is sts. omitted in the first clause, οὔτε φωνὴν οὔτε του μορφὴν βροτῶν A.Pr.21
, cf. S.Tr.3): but in E.Andr. 734, ἔστι γάρ τις οὐ πρόσω.. πόλις τις, the repetition is pleonastic, as also in A.Supp.57 sq. (lyr., s. v.l.).

15 τις is sts. omitted, οὐδέ κεν ἔνθα τεόν γε μένος καὶ χεῖρας ὄνοιτο (sc. τις) Il.13.287; ὡς δ' ἐν ὀνείρῳ οὐ δύναται (sc. τις) φεύγοντα διώκειν 22.199
, cf. S.OC 1226 (lyr.), Leg.Gort.2.2, X.Smp.5.2, Pl.Grg. 456d: τις must often be supplied from what goes before, ib. 478c, Prt. 319d.

b sts. also τις is omitted before a gen. case which must depend upon it, as ἢ [τις] τᾶς ἀσώτου Σισυφιδᾶν γενεᾶς S.Aj. 189
(lyr.); ἢν γαμῇ ποτ' αὐτὸς ἢ [τις] τῶν ξυγγενῶν Ar.Nu. 1128
; ἐν τῶν πόλεων IG12.56.14
.--Cf. ὅστις, οὔτις, μήτις, ἄλλο τι.

III Accentuation and position of τις:

1 accentuation: τις is normally enclitic, but in certain uses is orthotone, i.e. theoretically oxytone (τίς, τινά, τινές, τινῶν, etc., cf. Choerob. in Theod.1.373 H.) and barytone when followed by another word ( τὶς or τις, τινὰ, τινὲς, τινῶν, etc.). According to Sch. D.T.p.240 H. its orthotone accent is τίς (not τὶς) , τίνα, τίνες, etc. The orthotone form is used in codd.:

a at the beginning of a sentence, τίς ἔνδον.. ; is any one within? A.Ch. 654 ( τὶς cj. Hermann); τί φημι; = λέγω τι; am I saying anything? S.Tr. 865, OT 1471; <τίς ἦλθε;> ἦλθέ τις has anybody come? Somebody has come, Sch.D.T. l.c.; τὶς κάθηται, τὶς περιπατεῖ, so and so is sitting (walking), S.E.M.8.97; τὶς αἰπόλος καλούμενος Κομάτας Sch.Theoc.7.78; τίς ποτε οἰκοδεσπότης.. ἐκοπία Aesop.
in Gloss. iii p.41; or after a pause, πῶς γὰρ ἄν, ἔφην ἐγώ, ὦ βέλτιστε, τὶς ἀποκρίναιτο Pl.R. 337e
; τι οὖν ([etym.] τὶς ἂν εἴποι) ταῦτα λέγεις; D.1.14 (v.l.); ἔντοσθεν δὲ γυνά, τι θεῶν δαίδαλμα Theoc.1.32
; οὐ γυμνὸν τὸ φίλαμα, τι δ' ὦ ξένε καὶ πλέον ἑξεῖς Mosch.1.5
(v.l. for τὺ).

b when τις is opp. to another τις or to some other word, τισὶ μὲν συμφέρει, τισὶ δ' οὐ συμφέρει Arist.Pol. 1284b40
, cf. Th.2.92, Pl.Cri. 49a, D. 9.2; τινὲς μὲν οὖν.., ἡμεῖς δὲ.. Sor.1.1
; τὸ τὶ μὲν ψεῦδος ἔχον, τὶ δὲ ἀληθές S.E.M.8.127
; ἀλλὰ τινὰ μὲν.., τινὰ δὲ.. Gem.14.6
; ποτὲ μὲν πρὸς πάντα, ποτὲ δὲ πρὸς τινά Sor.1.48
: without such opposition, τοῦτ' εἰς ἀνίαν τοὔπος ἔρχεται τινί for a certain person, S.Aj. 1138. Codd. are not consistent; in signf.11.5a, 10c, 13 they make it enclitic; in signf. 11.5b sts. enclitic, sts. orthotone (v. supr.); sts. enclitic and orthotone in the same sentence, πάντα δὲ τὰ γιγνόμενα ὑπό τέ τινος γίγνεται καὶ ἔκ τινος καὶ τί Arist.Metaph. 1032a14
, cf. Pl.Chrm. 165c.

2 position:

a τις is rarely first word in the sentence, and rarely follows a pause (v. supr. 111.1a, b); it may stand second word, ἔσκε τις ἐνθάδε μάντις ἀνήρ Od.9.508
, cf. Il.8.515, 23.331; but in general its position is not far before or after the word to which it belongs in sense, ἀλλ' ἄγε δή τινα μάντιν ἐρείομεν 1.62
; φυλακὴ δέ τις ἔμπεδος ἔστω 8.521
.

b in [dialect] Ion. Prose it sts. stands between its genitive and the Article of that genitive, τῶν τις Περσέων Hdt.1.85
; τῶν τις ἱρέων Id.2.38
; τῶν τινες Φοινίκων Id.8.90
; ἐς τῶν τι ἄλλο στομάτων τοῦ Νείλου Id.2.179
; so also in late Prose, Ath.3.108d, Eust.1402.18, 1659.27, 1676.1.

c it stands between the Art. and Subst. in signf.11.10b.

d τίς τι is the correct order, not τί τις, IG12.110.46, Th.7.10, X.An.4.1.14 (codd. dett.), D.22.22, etc.

e whereas in [dialect] Att. the order ἐάν τις is compulsory, in [dialect] Dor. the usual order is αἴ τίς κα, Leg.Gort.9.43, al., Tab.Heracl.1.105, al. (but αἴ κά τις Epich.35
, 159; αἰ δέ κα μή τις Leg.Gort.5.13
): later [dialect] Dor. εἴ τί κα GDI2101.3
, al.; καἴ τι ἂν ( = καὶ εἴ τι ἂν) IG5(1).1390.50 (Andania, i B.C., v. infr. B.11.1b):—this [dialect] Dor. order influenced the Koine, as in the rare εἴ τις ἂν Plu.TG15
.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τις
77 αὐτός

αὐτός, ή, ὁ (Hom.+; W-S. §22; B-D-F index) reflexive pron. ‘self’

① intensive marker, setting an item off fr. everything else through emphasis and contrast, self, used in all pers., genders, and numbers.

ⓐ used w. a subject (noun or pron.)

α. specif. named (X., Cyr. 1, 4, 6; Plut., Caes. 710 [7, 9] αὐ. Κικέρων; 2 Macc 11:12) αὐ. Δαυίδ David himself Mk 12:36f; Lk 20:42; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς Lk 24:15; J 2:24; 4:44; αὐ. ὁ Ἰησοῦς short ending of Mk.

β. or otherw. exactly designated αὐ. ὁ θεός (Jos., Bell. 7, 346) Rv 21:3; αὐ. τ. ἐπουράνια Hb 9:23 (cp. 4 Macc 17:17; Sir 46:3b; GrBar); αὐ. ἐγώ I myself Ro 15:14 (cp. 3 Macc 3:13; POxy 294, 13f [22 A.D.]); αὐ. ἐγὼ Παῦλος 2 Cor 10:1; αὐτοὶ ὑμεῖς J 3:28 (cp. 4 Macc 6:19; En 103:7); αὐτοὶ οὗτοι (Thu. 6, 33, 6) Ac 24:15; ἐν ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς among yourselves 1 Cor 11:13.

ⓑ to emphasize a subject already known: of Jesus Mt 8:24; Mk 8:29; Lk 5:16f; 9:51; 10:38; 24:36 (cp. the Pythagorean αὐτὸς ἔφα Schwyzer II 211). Of God Hb 13:5 (cp. Wsd 6:7; 7:17; Sir 15:12; 1 Macc 3:22 and oft. LXX).

ⓒ differentiating fr. other subjects or pointing out a contrast w. them αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ μετʼ αὐτοῦ Mk 2:25; J 2:12; 4:53; 18:1; Lk 24:15; 1 Cor 3:15. αὐ. οὐκ εἰσήλθατε καὶ τοὺς εἰσερχομένους ἐκωλύσατε you yourselves did not come in etc. Lk 11:52; cp. vs. 46.—J 7:9; 9:21; Mt 23:4; Lk 6:11; Ac 18:15; 1 Th 1:9; 1 Cor 2:15. αὐτὸς ἐγώ I alone 2 Cor 12:13. Ro 7:25 s. e below.—εἰ μὴ αὐ. except himself Rv 19:12. αὐ. ὄγδοός ἐστιν he is the eighth 17:11; s. also 2a. In anticipation of an incorrect inference Ἰησοῦς αὐ. οὐκ ἐβάπτιζεν Jesus did not personally baptize J 4:2 opp. ‘his disciples.’ Of bodily presence, αὐ. παραγενοῦ come in person (as opp. to letter-writing) AcPlCor 1:7; with component of surprise that the subject specified is actually present in person (Philo, De Jos. 238: Jos. to his brothers αὐ. εἰμι ἐγώ) Lk 24:36, 39.

ⓓ of one whose action is independent or significant without ref. to someth. else (Hyperid. 1, 19, 11; 3, 2) without help J 2:25; 4:42; 6:6; Ac 20:34; αὐ. ᾠκοδόμησεν he built at his own expense Lk 7:5; αὐ. ὁ πατὴρ φιλεῖ ὑμᾶς the Father personally loves you J 16:27 (i.e. they require no intermediary).

ⓔ of one viewed as a solitary figure ‘(be) by oneself, alone’ w. μόνος (cp. μόνος 1aβ) Mk 6:47; J 6:15. W. κατʼ ἰδιαν Mk 6:31.—thrown on one’s own resources αὐ. ἐγὼ τῷ νοὶ̈ δουλεύω νόμῳ θεοῦ thrown on my own resources I am enslaved in mind to God’s interests but in my flesh to the interests of sin Ro 7:25 (JWeiss, Beitr. zur Paulin. Rhetorik, in BWeiss Festschr., 1897, 233f; JKürzinger, BZ 7, ’63, 270–74).

ⓕ with climactic force in connection with one or more lexical units καὶ αὐτός even (Sir prol. line 24 καὶ αὐ. ὁ νόμος even the law; 4 Macc 17:1; GrBar 4:13; 9:4 al.) καὶ αὐ. ἡ κτίσις even the created world Ro 8:21. καὶ αὐ. Σάρρα even Sara Hb 11:11 (on the rdg. here s. Windisch ad loc. and B-D-F §194, 1; Rob. 686; Mlt-Turner 220; cp. Ps.-Callisth. 1, 10, 3 καὶ αὐτὸν τὸν Φίλιππον=and even Philip; but the text of the Hb passage is prob. corrupt; s. καταβολή). οὐδὲ ἡ φύσις αὐ. διδάσκει; does not even nature teach? 1 Cor 11:14.—Without ascensive particle, Ro 9:3 Paul expresses extraordinary devotion to his people (imagine!) I myself.

ⓖ w. attention directed to a certain pers. or thing to the exclusion of other lexical units, so that αὐ. can almost take on demonstrative sense (s. 2a, also Aeschyl., 7 against Thebes 528; Hes., Works 350): αὐ. τὰ ἔργα the very deeds J 5:36; αὐ. ὁ Ἰωάννης (POxy 745, 3 [I A.D.] αὐ. τὸν Ἀντᾶν) this very (or same) John Mt 3:4 (s. Mlt. 91); αὐτῆς τῆς Ἡρωδίαδος Mk 6:22 v.l. (s. 2bα for the rdg. αὐτοῦ W-H., N. and s. on this RBorger, TRu 52, ’87, 25f); ἐν αὐ. τ. καιρῷ (cp. Tob 3:17 BA; 2:9; SIG 1173, 1 αὐταῖς τ. ἡμέραις) just at that time Lk 13:1.—23:12; 24:13.—2:38; 10:21; 12:12.—10:7. αὐτὸ τοῦτο just this, the very same thing (Oenomaus in Eus., PE 5, 22, 3; PRyl 77, 39; POxy 1119, 11; cp. Phoenix Coloph. 6, 8 Coll. Alex. p. 235) 2 Cor 7:11; Gal 2:10; Phil 1:6; εἰς αὐ. τοῦτο Ro 9:17; 13:6; 2 Cor 5:5; Eph 6:22; Col 4:8. The phrases τοῦτο αὐ. 2 Cor 2:3 and αὐ. τοῦτο 2 Pt 1:5 are adverbial accusatives for this very reason (Pla., Prot. 310e [pl.]; X., An. 1, 9, 21; PGrenf I, 1, 14).

② a ref. to a definite person or thing, he, him, she, her, it, they, them

ⓐ αὐτός refers w. more or less emphasis, esp. in the nom., to a subject, oft. resuming one already mentioned: αὐ. παρακληθήσονται they (not others) shall be comforted Mt 5:4; cp. vs. 5ff. οὐκ αὐ. βλασφημοῦσιν; Js 2:7. αὐ. σώσει Mt 1:21 (cp. Ps 129:8). αὐ. ἀποδώσει 6:4 v.l.—Mk 1:8; 14:15 al. Freq. the emphasis is scarcely felt: Mt 14:2; Lk 4:15; 22:23; J 6:24; Ac 22:19 (cp. Gen 12:12; Tob 6:11 BA; Sir 49:7; Vett. Val. 113, 16.—JWackernagel, Syntax II² 1928, 86).—Perh. the development of αὐ. in the direction of οὗτος (which it practically replaces in Mod. Gk.) is beginning to have some influence in the NT (Pla., Phdr. 229e αὐτά=this; X., An. 4, 7, 7 αὐτό; Dio Chrys. 3, 37; 15 [32], 10 αὐτοί; Aelian, NA 6, 10; Mél. de la fac. orient … Beyrouth 1, 1906, 149 no. 18 εἰς αὐτὸ ἐγεννήθης=for this [purpose] you were born; Schmid IV 69; 616 αὐτός = οὗτος; Synes., Ep. 3, 159a; 4, 165a; Agathias [VI A.D.], Hist. 1, 3 p. 144, 17 D.) καὶ αὐ. ἦν Σαμαρίτης Lk 17:16 (cp. 3:23; 19:2 and 1g above; on 5:1 s. Mussies 169). Yet here αὐ. could mean alone (examples of this from Hom. on in many writers in WSchulze, Quaestiones epicae 1892, p. 250, 3) he alone was a Samaritan; but Luke’s thematic interest in unexpected candidates for the Kingdom (cp. 5:30–32; 15:2; 19:2 [καὶ αὐτός]; 23:43) militates against the view.

ⓑ The oblique cases of αὐ. very oft. (in a fashion customary since Hom.) take the place of the 3rd pers. personal pron.; in partic. the gen. case replaces the missing possessive pron.

α. w. ref. to a preceding noun διαφέρετε αὐτῶν Mt 6:26; καταβάντος αὐτοῦ 8:1; ἀπεκάλυψας αὐτά 11:25.—26:43f; Mk 1:10; 4:33ff; 12:19; Lk 1:22; 4:41. The gen. is sometimes put first for no special reason (Esth 1:1e) αὐτοῦ τὰ σημεῖα J 2:23, cp. 3:19, 21, 33; 4:47; 12:40. αὐτῶν τὴν συνείδησιν 1 Cor 8:12. Sim. Lk 1:36 αὐτῇ τῇ καλουμένῃ στείρᾳ w. her who was called barren. Forms of αὐ. are sometimes used without qualifiers in a series, referring to difft. pers.: φέρουσιν αὐτῷ (Jesus) τυφλόν, καὶ παρακαλοῦσιν αὐτὸν (Jesus) ἵνα αὐτοῦ (i.e. τοῦ τυφλοῦ) ἅψηται Mk 8:22. On problems related to the rdg. τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτοῦ Ἡρωδιάδος εἰσελθούσης when his (Herod’s) daughter Herodias came in (?) Mk 6:22, s. Borger in 1g, and entry Ἡρῳδίας.

β. w. ref. to a noun to be supplied fr. the context, and without suggestion of contrast or disparagement: ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς αὐτῶν (i.e. τ. Γαλιλαίων) Mt 4:23. ἐν ταῖς πόλεσιν αὐτῶν 11:1. ἐκήρυσσεν αὐτοῖς (i.e. the inhabitants) Ac 8:5. παρακαλέσας αὐτούς 20:2. ἀποταξάμενος αὐτοῖς 2 Cor 2:13. τὰ γινόμενα ὑπʼ αὐτῶν Eph 5:12. ἐδημηγόρει πρὸς αὐτούς Ac 12:21. τὸν φόβον αὐτῶν 1 Pt 3:14 (cp. 13 and s. Is 8:12). Mt 12:9 (cp. vs. 2); Lk 2:22; 18:15; 19:9; 23:51; J 8:44; 20:15; Ac 4:5; Ro 2:26; Hb 8:9.

γ. freq. used w. a verb, even though a noun in the case belonging to the verb has already preceded it (cp. Dio Chrys. 6, 23; 78 [29], 20; Epict. 3, 1, 22; POxy 299 [I A.D.] Λάμπωνι ἔδωκα αὐτῷ δραχμὰς η´; FKälker, Quaest. de Eloc. Polyb. 1880, 274) τοῖς καθημένοις ἐν σκιᾷ θανάτου φῶς ἀνέτειλεν αὐτοῖς Mt 4:16.—5:40; 9:28; 26:71; J 15:2; 18:11; Js 4:17; Rv 2:7, 17; 6:4 al.

δ. used pleonastically after a relative, as somet. in older Gk., e.g. Soph., X., Hyperid. (B-D-F §297; Rob. 683), freq. in the LXX fr. Gen 1:11 (οὗ τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ; GrBar 2:11 ὸ̔ν οὐδεὶς δύναται πειρᾶσαι αὐτόν al.) on (Helbing, Grammatik p. iv; Thackeray 46), and quotable elsewh. in the Koine (Callim., Epigr. 43 [42], 3 ὧν … αὐτῶν; Peripl. Eryth. c. 35; POxy 117, 15f ἐξ ὧν δώσεις τοῖς παιδίοις σου ἓν ἐξ αὐτῶν): οὗ τὸ πτύον ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ Mt 3:12; Lk 3:17. οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανὸς … τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ Mk 1:7; Lk 3:16. ἧς εἶχεν τὸ θυγάτριον αὐτῆς Mk 7:25. πᾶν ὸ̔ δέδωκεν … ἀναστήσω αὐτό J 6:39; Ac 15:17. ἣν οὐδεὶς δύναται κλεῖσαι αὐτήν Rv 3:8. οἷς ἐδόθη αὐτοῖς 7:2, cp. 13:12. οὗ ἡ πνοὴ αὐτοῦ 1 Cl 21:9.—Cp. in ref. to an anticipatory noun τὰ Ἐλισαίου ὀστᾶ … νεκροῦ βληθέντος … ἐπʼ αὐτά when a corpse was cast on the bones of Elisha AcPlCor 2:32.

ε. continuing a relative clause (an older Gk. constr.; B-D-F §297; Rob. 724): ἐξ οὗ τὰ πάντα καὶ ἡμεῖς εἰς αὐτόν 1 Cor 8:6; οἷς τὸ κρίμα … καὶ ἡ ἀπώλεια αὐτῶν (for καὶ ὧν ἡ ἀπώλεια) 2 Pt 2:3.

ζ. w. a change of pers. Lk 1:45; Rv 18:24.

η. w. a change of number and gender ἔθνη … αὐτούς Mt 28:19. τοῦ παιδίου … αὐτῇ Mk 5:41. φῶς … αὐτόν J 1:10. λαόν … αὐτῶν Mt 1:21.—14:14; Mk 6:45f; 2 Cor 5:19.

③ pert. to someth. that is identical with, or closely related to, someth., w. art. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό the same (Hom. et al.; Ps 101:28, s. Mussies 171).

ⓐ w. a noun τὸν αὐ. λόγον Mt 26:44; Mk 14:39; τὸ αὐ. φύραμα Ro 9:21; cp. Lk 23:40; 1 Cor 1:10; 10:3f; 12:4ff; 15:39; Phil 1:30.

ⓑ without a noun τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. ποιεῖν (Jos., Ant. 5, 129; 9, 271) Mt 5:46; Lk 6:33; Eph 6:9. τὰ αὐτὰ πράσσειν Ro 2:1. τὸ αὐ. λέγειν agree (not only in words; s. on λέγω 1aα) 1 Cor 1:10. ἀπαγγέλλειν τὰ αὐτά Ac 15:27. τὸ αὐ. as adv. in the same way (X., Mem. 3, 8, 5) Mt 27:44; 18:9 D.—ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ. (Hesychius: ὁμοῦ, ἐπὶ τὸν αὐ. τόπον; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 30, 167; SIG 736, 66 [92 B.C.]; BGU 762, 9 [II A.D.] ἀπὸ τῶν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ. καμήλων ε´ of the five camels taken together; PTebt 14, 20; 319, 9 al.; 2 Km 2:13; Ps 2:2 al.; 3 Macc 3:1; Sus 14 Theod.) of place at the same place, together (En 100:2; Jos., Bell. 2, 346; s. συνέρχομαι 1a) Mt 22:34; 1 Cor 11:20; 14:23; B 4:10; IEph 5:3; εἶναι ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ. (TestNapht 6:6) Lk 17:35; Ac 1:15; 2:1. προστιθέναι ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ. add to the total Ac 2:47 (see M-M.). κατὰ τὸ αυ. of pers. being together as a body in each other’s company, together (PEleph 1, 5 εἶναι δὲ ἡμᾶς κατὰ ταὐτό) and also with ref. to simultaneous presence at the same time (Aelian, VH 14, 8 δύο εἰκόνας εἰργάσατο Πολύκλειτος κατὰ τ. αὐ.; 3 Km 3:18) Ac 14:1; the mng. in the same way may also apply (ENestle, Acts 14:1: ET 24, 1913, 187f) as in Hs 8, 7, 1 (cod. A; s. καθά; but s. Bonner 105, n. 17, who restores κατʼ αὐ[τοὺς αἱ ῥάβ]δοι; so also Joly).—In combinations ἓν καὶ τὸ αὐ. (also Pla., Leg. 721c; Aristot., Metaph. 1039a, 28; other exx. in GKypke, Observ. II 1755, 220; Diod S 3, 63, 2 εἷς καὶ ὁ αὐτός) one and the same thing 1 Cor 11:5; cp. 12:11 (Diod S 22, 6, 3 μίαν καὶ τὴν αὐτὴν ἀπόκρισιν; Epict. 1, 19, 15 μία καὶ ἡ αὐ. ἀρχή). W. gen. foll. τὰ αὐ. τῶν παθημάτων the same sufferings as 1 Pt 5:9. Without comparison: ὁ αὐ. (Thu. 2, 61, 2; Plut., Caesar 729 [45, 7], Brutus 989 [13, 1]) εἶ thou art the same Hb 1:12 (Ps 101:28); cp. 13:8. On the variation betw. αὐτοῦ and αὑτοῦ, αὐτῶν and αὑτῶν in the mss., s. ἑαυτοῦ, beg.—WMichaelis, D. unbetonte καὶ αὐτός bei Lukas: StTh 4, ’51, 86–93; MBlack, An Aramaic Approach³, ’67, 96–100; MWilcox, The Semitisms of Ac, ’65, 93–100 (Qumran).—Mussies 168–73. DELG. M-M. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > αὐτός
78 καί

καί conjunction (Hom.+), found most frequently by far of all Gk. particles in the NT; since it is not only used much more commonly here than in other Gk. lit. but oft. in a different sense, or rather in different circumstances, it contributes greatly to some of the distinctive coloring of the NT style.—HMcArthur, ΚΑΙ Frequency in Greek Letters, NTS 15, ’68/69, 339–49. The vivacious versatility of κ. (for earlier Gk. s. Denniston 289–327) can easily be depressed by the tr. ‘and’, whose repetition in a brief area of text lacks the support of arresting aspects of Gk. syntax.

① marker of connections, and

ⓐ single words

α. gener. Ἰάκωβος καὶ Ἰωσὴφ καὶ Σίμων καὶ Ἰούδας Mt 13:55. χρυσὸν καὶ λίβανον καὶ σμύρναν 2:11. ἡ ἐντολὴ ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή Ro 7:12. πολυμερῶς κ. πολυτρόπως Hb 1:1. ὁ θεὸς κ. πατήρ God, who is also the Father 1 Cor 15:24; cp. 2 Cor 1:3; 11:31; Eph 1:3; Js 1:27; 3:9 al.—Connects two occurrences of the same word for emphasis (OGI 90, 19 [196 B.C.] Ἑρμῆς ὁ μέγας κ. μέγας; pap in Mayser II/1, 54) μείζων κ. μείζων greater and greater Hv 4, 1, 6. ἔτι κ. ἔτι again and again B 21:4; Hs 2, 6 (B-D-F §493, 1; 2; s. Rob. 1200).

β. w. numerals, w. the larger number first δέκα καὶ ὁκτώ Lk 13:16. τεσσεράκοντα κ. ἕξ J 2:20. τετρακόσιοι κ. πεντήκοντα Ac 13:20.—The καί in 2 Cor 13:1 ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων καὶ τριῶν σταθήσεται πᾶν ῥῆμα=‘or’ ([v.l. ἢ τριῶν for καὶ τριῶν as it reads Mt 18:16]; cp. Js 4:13 v.l. σήμερον καὶ αὔριον=‘today or tomorrow’, but s. above all Thu. 1, 82, 2; Pla., Phd. 63e; X., De Re Equ. 4, 4 ἁμάξας τέτταρας καὶ πέντε; Heraclides, Pol. 58 τρεῖς καὶ τέσσαρας; Polyb. 3, 51, 12 ἐπὶ δυεῖν καὶ τρισὶν ἡμέραις; 5, 90, 6; Diod S 34 + 35 Fgm. 2, 28 εἷς καὶ δύο=one or two; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1091 p. 305, 22 W. τριέτης καὶ τετραέτης) by the statement of two or three witnesses every charge must be sustained, as explained by Dt 19:15.

γ. adding the whole to the part and in general (Aristoph., Nub. 1239 τὸν Δία καὶ τοὺς θεούς; Thu. 1, 116, 3; 7, 65, 1) Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι Peter and the rest of the apostles Ac 5:29. οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς κ. τὸ συνέδριον ὅλον the high priest and all the rest of the council Mt 26:59. Vice versa, adding a (specially important) part to the whole and especially (πᾶς Ἰουδὰ καὶ Ἰερουσαλήμ 2 Ch 35:24; cp. 32, 33; 1 Macc 2:6) τοῖς μαθηταῖς κ. τῷ Πέτρῳ Mk 16:7. σὺν γυναιξὶ κ. Μαριάμ Ac 1:14.

δ. The expr. connected by καί can be united in the form of a hendiadys (Alcaeus 117, 9f D.² χρόνος καὶ καρπός=time of fruit; Soph., Aj. 144; 749; Polyb. 6, 9, 4; 6, 57, 5 ὑπεροχὴ καὶ δυναστεία=1, 2, 7; 5, 45, 1 ὑπεροχὴ τῆς δυναστείας; Diod S 5, 67, 3 πρὸς ἀνανέωσιν καὶ μνήμην=renewal of remembrance; 15, 63, 2 ἀνάγκη καὶ τύχη=compulsion of fate; 16, 93, 2 ἐπιβουλὴ κ. θάνατος=a fatal plot; Jos., Ant. 12, 98 μετὰ χαρᾶς κ. βοῆς=w. a joyful cry; 17, 82 ἀκρίβεια κ. φυλακή) ἐξίσταντο ἐπὶ τῇ συνέσει καὶ ταῖς ἀποκρίσεσιν αὐτοῦ they were amazed at his intelligent answers Lk 2:47. δώσω ὑμῖν στόμα κ. σοφίαν I will give you wise utterance 21:15. τροφὴ κ. εὐφροσύνη joy concerning (your) food Ac 14:17. ἐλπὶς κ. ἀνάστασις hope of a resurrection 23:6 (2 Macc 3:29 ἐλπὶς καὶ σωτηρία; s. OLagercrantz, ZNW 31, ’32, 86f; GBjörck, ConNeot 4, ’40, 1–4).

ε. A colloquial feature is the coordination of two verbs, one of which should be a ptc. (s. B-D-F §471; Rob. 1135f) ἀποτολμᾷ κ. λέγει = ἀποτολμῶν λέγει he is so bold as to say Ro 10:20. ἔσκαψεν κ. ἐβάθυνεν (=βαθύνας) Lk 6:48. ἐκρύβη κ. ἐξῆλθεν (=ἐξελθών) J 8:59. Sim. χαίρων κ. βλέπων I am glad to see Col 2:5. Linking of subordinate clause and ptc. Μαριὰμ ὡς ἦλθεν … καὶ ἰδοῦσα J 11:32 v.l. Cp. παραλαβών … καὶ ἀνέβη Lk 9:28 v.l.

ⓑ clauses and sentences

α. gener.: ἐν γαστρὶ ἕξει κ. τέξεται υἱόν Mt 1:23 (Is 7:14). εἰσῆλθον … κ. ἐδίδασκον Ac 5:21. διακαθαριεῖ τὴν ἅλωνα αὐτοῦ κ. συνάξει τὸν σῖτον Mt 3:12. κεκένωται ἡ πίστις καὶ κατήργηται ἡ ἐπαγγελία Ro 4:14 and very oft. Connecting two questions Mt 21:23, or quotations (e.g. Ac 1:20), and dialogue (Lk 21:8), or alternate possibilities (13:18).

β. Another common feature is the practice, drawn fr. Hebrew or fr. the speech of everyday life, of using κ. as a connective where more discriminating usage would call for other particles: καὶ εἶδον καὶ (for ὅτι) σεισμὸς ἐγένετο Rv 6:12. καὶ ἤκουσεν ὁ βασιλεὺς … καὶ (for ὅτι) ἔλεγον and the king learned that they were saying Mk 6:14 (s. HLjungvik, ZNW 33, ’34, 90–92; on this JBlinzler, Philol. 96, ’43/44, 119–31). τέξεται υἱὸν καὶ καλέσεις τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ (for οὗ τὸ ὄνομα καλ.) Mt 1:21; cp. Lk 6:6; 11:44. καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι καὶ ποιήσωμεν σκηνάς Mk 9:5. Esp. freq. is the formula in historical narrative καὶ ἐγένετο … καὶ (like וַ … וַיְהִי) and it happened or came about … that Mt 9:10; Mk 2:15; Lk 5:1 v.l. (for ἐγένετο δὲ … καὶ; so also the text of 6:12), 12, 17; 14:1; 17:11 al. (Gen 7:10 al.; JosAs 11:1; 22:1). S. MJohannessohn, Das bibl. Καὶ ἐγένετο u. seine Geschichte, 1926 (fr. ZVS 35, 1925, 161–212); KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT I, 1 ’62, 29–62; Mlt-Turner 334f; ÉDelebecque, Études Grecques sur L’Évangile de Luc ’76, 123–65; JVoelz, The Language of the NT: ANRW II/25/2, 893–977, esp. 959–64.—As in popular speech, κ. is used in rapid succession Mt 14:9ff; Mk 1:12ff; Lk 18:32ff; J 2:13ff; 1 Cor 12:5f; Rv 6:12ff; 9:1ff. On this kind of colloquial speech, which joins independent clauses rather than subordinating one to the other (parataxis rather than hypotaxis) s. B-D-F §458; Rdm.² p. 222; Rob. 426; Dssm., LO 105ff (LAE 129ff), w. many references and parallels fr. secular sources. This is a favorite, e.g., in Polyaenus 2, 3, 2–4; 2, 4, 3; 3, 9, 10; 3, 10, 2; 4, 6, 1; 7, 36 al.

γ. It is also coordination rather than subordination when κ. connects an expr. of time with that which occurs in the time (Od. 5, 362; Hdt. 7, 217; Thu. 1, 50, 5; Pla., Symp. 220c; Aeschin. 3, 71 νὺξ ἐν μέσῳ καὶ παρῆμεν; s. B-D-F §442, 4; KBrugmann⁴-AThumb, Griechische Gramm. 1913, 640*): ἤγγικεν ἡ ὥρα κ. παραδίδοται the time has come when he is to be given up Mt 26:45. κ. ἐσταύρωσαν αὐτόν when they crucified him Mk 15:25. κ. ἀνέβη εἰς Ἰεροσόλυμα when he went up to Jerusalem J 2:13. κ. συντελέσω when I will make Hb 8:8 (Jer 38:31); cp. J 4:35; 7:33; Lk 19:43; 23:44; Ac 5:7.

δ. καί introducing an apodosis is really due to Hebr./LXX infl. (B-D-F §442, 7; Abel §78a, 6 p. 341; Mlt-H. 422; KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT I, 1 ’62, 66–72; but not offensive to ears trained in good Gk.: s. Il. 1, 478; Hdt. 1, 79, 2; sim.Thu. 2, 93, 4 ὡς ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐχώρουν εὐθύς; 8, 27, 5; Herm. Wr. 13, 1 …, καὶ ἔφης; Delebecque [s. above in β] 130–32) καὶ ὅτε ἐπλήσθησαν ἡμέραι ὀκτὼ …, κ. ἐκλήθη τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ Lk 2:21; cp. Rv 3:20. Also κ. ἰδού in an apodosis Lk 7:12; Ac 1:10.

ε. connecting negative and affirmative clauses Lk 3:14. οὔτε ἄντλημα ἔχεις κ. τὸ φρέαρ ἐστὶ βαθύ you have no bucket, and the well is deep J 4:11; cp. 3J 10 (οὔτε … καί Eur., Iph. Taur. 591f; Longus, Past. 1, 17; 4, 28; Aelian, NA 1, 57; 11, 9; Lucian, Dial. Meretr. 2, 4 οὔτε πάντα ἡ Λεσβία, Δωρί, πρὸς σὲ ἐψεύσατο καὶ σὺ τἀληθῆ ἀπήγγελκας Μυρτίῳ ‘It wasn’t all lies that Lesbia told you, Doris; and you certainly reported the truth to Myrtium’). After a negative clause, which influences the clause beginning w. καί: μήποτε καταπατήσουσιν … κ. στραφέντες ῥήξωσιν ὑμᾶς Mt 7:6; cp. 5:25; 10:38; 13:15 (Is 6:10); 27:64; Lk 12:58; 21:34; J 6:53; 12:40 (Is 6:10); Ac 28:27 (Is 6:10); 1 Th 3:5; Hb 12:15; Rv 16:15.

ζ. to introduce a result that comes fr. what precedes: and then, and so Mt 5:15; 23:32; Mk 8:34; 2 Cor 11:9; Hb 3:19; 1J 3:19. καὶ ἔχομεν and so we have 2 Pt 1:19. Esp. after the impv., or expr. of an imperatival nature (Soph., Oed. Col. 1410ff θέσθε … καὶ … οἴσει, El. 1207; Sir 2:6; 3:17) δεῦτε ὀπίσω μου καὶ ποιήσω and then I will make Mt 4:19. εἰπὲ λόγῳ, κ. ἰαθήσεται ὁ παῖς μου speak the word, and then my servant will be cured Mt 8:8; Lk 7:7; cp. Mt 7:7; Mk 6:22; Lk 10:28; J 14:16; Js 4:7, 10; Rv 4:1.—καί introduces a short clause that confirms the existence of someth. that ought to be: ἵνα τέκνα θεοῦ κληθῶμεν, καὶ ἐσμέν that we should be called children of God; and so we really are (καλέω 1d) 1J 3:1 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 40 §161 they were to conquer Sardinia, καὶ κατέλαβον=and they really took it; 4, 127 §531 one day would decide [κρίνειν] the fate of Rome, καὶ ἐκρίθη).

η. emphasizing a fact as surprising or unexpected or noteworthy: and yet, and in spite of that, nevertheless (Eur., Herc. Fur. 509; Philostrat., Her. 11 [II 184, 29 Kayser] ῥητορικώτατον καὶ δεινόν; Longus, Past. 4, 17 βουκόλος ἦν Ἀγχίσης καὶ ἔσχεν αὐτὸν Ἀφροδίτη) κ. σὺ ἔρχῃ πρὸς μέ; and yet you come to me? Mt 3:14; cp. 6:26; 10:29; Mk 12:12; J 1:5, 10; 3:11, 32; 5:40; 6:70; 7:28; 1 Cor 5:2; 2 Cor 6:9; Hb 3:9 (Ps 94:9); Rv 3:1. So also, connecting what is unexpected or otherw. noteworthy with an attempt of some kind (JBlomqvist, Das sogennante και adversativum ’79): but ζητεῖ κ. οὐχ εὑρίσκει but he finds none (no resting place) Mt 12:43. ἐπεθύμησαν ἰδεῖν κ. οὐχ εἶδαν but did not see (it) 13:17; cp. 26:60; Lk 13:7; 1 Th 2:18. Cp. GJs 18:3 (not pap). Perhaps Mk 5:20. Introducing a contrasting response καὶ ἀποδώσεις μοι Hv 2, 1, 3.

θ. to introduce an abrupt question, which may often express wonder, ill-will, incredulity, etc. (B-D-F §442, 8. For older lit. exx. of this usage s. Kühner-G. II p. 247f; for later times EColwell, The Gk. of the Fourth Gospel ’31, 87f): κ. πόθεν μοι τοῦτο; how have I deserved this? Lk 1:43. κ. τίς; who then? Mk 10:26; Lk 10:29; J 9:36. καὶ τί γέγονεν ὅτι … ; how does it happen that … ? 14:22. καὶ πῶς σὺ λέγεις … ; how is it, then, that you say … J 14:9 v.l. W. a protasis εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼ λυπῶ ὑμᾶς, κ. τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με; for if I make you sad, who then will cheer me up? 2 Cor 2:2 (cp. Ps.-Clem., Hom. 2, 43; 44 εἰ [ὁ θεὸς] ψεύδεται, καὶ τίς ἀληθεύει;). Thus Phil 1:22 is prob. to be punctuated as follows (s. ADebrunner, GGA 1926, 151): εἰ δὲ τὸ ζῆν ἐν σαρκί, τοῦτο μοι καρπὸς ἔργου, καὶ τί αἱρήσομαι; οὐ γνωρίζω but if living on here means further productive work, then which shall I choose? I really don’t know. καὶ πῶς αὐτοῦ υἱός ἐστιν; how, then, is he his son? Lk 20:44 (cp. Gen 39:9).

ι. to introduce a parenthesis (Eur., Orest. 4, Hel. 393; X., Equ. 11, 2.—B-D-F §465, 1; Rob. 1182) κ. ἐκωλύθην ἄρχι τοῦ δεῦρο but so far I have been prevented Ro 1:13.

ⓒ oft. explicative; i.e., a word or clause is connected by means of καί w. another word or clause, for the purpose of explaining what goes before it and so, that is, namely (PPetr II, 18 [1], 9 πληγὰς … καὶ πλείους=blows … indeed many of them.—Kühner-G. II 247; B-D-F §442, 9; Rob. 1181; Mlt-Turner 335) χάριν κ. ἀποστολήν grace, that is, the office of an apostle Ro 1:5. ἀπήγγειλαν πάντα καὶ τὰ τ. δαιμονιζομένων they told everything, namely what had happened to those who were possessed Mt 8:33. καὶ χάριν ἀντὶ χάριτος that is, grace upon grace J 1:16. Cp. 1 Cor 3:5; 15:38.—Mt 21:5.—Other explicative uses are καὶ οὗτος, καὶ τοῦτο, καὶ ταῦτα (the first and last are in earlier Gk.: Hdt., X. et al.; s. Kühner-G. I 647; II 247) and, also ascensive and indeed, and at that Ἰ. Χρ., καὶ τοῦτον ἐσταυρωμένον J. Chr., (and) indeed him on the cross 1 Cor 2:2. καὶ τοῦτο Ro 13:11; 1 Cor 6:6, 8; Eph 2:8. καὶ ταῦτα w. ptc. and to be sure Hb 11:12. See B-D-F §290, 5; 425, 1; 442, 9.—The ascensive force of καί is also plain in Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον a Roman citizen, and uncondemned at that Ac 22:25. ἔρχεται ὥρα καὶ νῦν ἐστιν an hour is coming, indeed it is already here J 5:25. προσέθηκεν καὶ τοῦτο ἐπὶ πᾶσιν καὶ κατέκλεισεν τὸν Ἰωάννην ἐν φυλακῇ added this on top of everything else, namely to put John in prison Lk 3:20.

ⓓ After πολύς and before a second adj. καί is pleonastic fr. the viewpoint of modern lang. (earlier Gk.: Hom. et al. [Kühner-G. II 252, 1]; cp. Cebes 1, 1 πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα ἀναθήματα; 2, 3; B-D-F §442, 11) πολλὰ … κ. ἄλλα σημεῖα many other signs J 20:30 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 318). πολλὰ κ. βαρέα αἰτιώματα many severe charges Ac 25:7. πολλὰ … καὶ ἕτερα Lk 3:18 (cp. Himerius, Or. 40 [=Or. 6], 6 πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα). πολλοὶ καὶ ἀνυπότακτοι Tit 1:10.

ⓔ introducing someth. new, w. loose connection: Mt 4:23; 8:14, 23, 28; 9:1, 9, 27, 35; 10:1; 12:27; Mk 5:1, 21; Lk 8:26; J 1:19 and oft.

ⓕ καί … καί both … and, not only …, but also (Synes., Dreams 10 p. 141b καὶ ἀπιστεῖν ἔξεστι καὶ πιστεύειν.—B-D-F §444, 3; Rob. 1182; Mlt-Turner 335) connecting single expressions Mt 10:28; Mk 4:41; Ro 11:33; Phil 2:13; 4:12. κ. ἐν ὀλίγῳ κ. ἐν μεγάλῳ Ac 26:29. κ. ἅπαξ κ. δίς (s. ἅπαξ 1) Phil 4:16; 1 Th 2:18. Connecting whole clauses or sentences: Mk 9:13; J 7:28; 9:37; 12:28; 1 Cor 1:22. Introducing contrasts: although … yet (Anthol. VII, 676 Δοῦλος Ἐπίκτητος γενόμην καὶ σῶμʼ ἀνάπηρος καὶ πενίην ῏Ιρος καὶ φίλος ἀθανάτοις ‘I was Epictetus, a slave; crippled in body and an Iros [a beggar in Hom., Od.] in poverty, but dear to the Immortals’) J 15:24; Ac 23:3. καὶ … κ. οὐ Lk 5:36; J 6:36. καὶ οὐ … καί 17:25; κ. … κ. now … now Mk 9:22. On τὲ … καί s. τέ 2c. Somet. w. ἤ q.v. 1aβ.—HCadbury, Superfluous καί in the Lord’s Prayer (i.e. Mt 6:12) and Elsewhere: Munera Studiosa (=WHatch Festschr.) ’46.

② marker to indicate an additive relation that is not coordinate to connect clauses and sentences, also, likewise, funct. as an adv.

ⓐ simply κ. τὴν ἄλλην the other one also Mt 5:39; cp. vs. 40; 6:21; 12:45; Mk 1:38; 2:26; 8:7 and oft. Freq. used w. pronouns κἀγώ (q.v.). καὶ σύ Mt 26:73. κ. ὑμεῖς 20:4, 7; Lk 21:31; J 7:47 and oft. κ. αὐτός (s. αὐτός 1f).

ⓑ intensive: even Mt 5:46f; 10:30; Mk 1:27; Lk 10:17; J 14:9 v.l.; Ac 5:39; 22:28; Ro 9:24 (ἀλλὰ καί); 1 Cor 2:10; 2 Cor 1:8; Gal 2:17; Eph 5:12; Phlm 21; Hb 7:25; 1 Pt 4:19 (but s. d below); Jd 23; Hs 5, 2, 10; 7:1; ἔτι καὶ νῦν Dg 2:3. CBlackman, JBL 87, ’68, 203f would transl. Ro 3:26b: … even in the act of declaring righteous (cp. the gen. abs. Polemon Soph. B 14 Reader καὶ Δάτιδος ἀποπλέοντος=even though Datis was sailing away). In formulas expressing a wish: ὄφελον καί if only, would that Gal 5:12. In connection w. a comparative: κ. περισσότερον προφήτου one who is even more than a prophet Mt 11:9. κ. μείζονα ποιήσει J 14:12.

ⓒ In sentences denoting a contrast καί appears in var. ways, somet. in both members of the comparison, and oft. pleonastically, to our way of thinking καθάπερ …, οὕτως καί as …, thus also 2 Cor 8:11. ὥσπερ …, οὕτως καί (Hyperid. 1, 2, 5–8) Ro 5:19; 11:30f; 1 Cor 11:12; 15:22; Gal 4:29. ὡς …, οὕτως καί Ro 5:15, 18. ὸ̔ν τρόπον …, οὕτως καί 2 Ti 3:8.—οὕτως καί thus also Ro 6:11. ὡσαύτως καί in the same way also 1 Cor 11:25. ὁμοίως καί (Jos., Bell. 2, 575) J 6:11; Jd 8. ὡς καί Ac 11:17; 1 Cor 7:7; 9:5. καθὼς καί Ro 15:7; 1 Cor 13:12; 2 Cor 1:14; Eph 4:17. καθάπερ καί Ro 4:6; 2 Cor 1:14.—καί can also stand alone in the second member w. the mng. so also, so. ὡς … καί Mt 6:10; Ac 7:51; Gal 1:9; Phil 1:20. καθὼς … καί Lk 6:31 v.l.; J 6:57; 13:15; 1 Cor 15:49.—οἷος …, τοιοῦτος καί 1 Cor 15:48. After a comp. ὅσῳ καί by so much also Hb 8:6. καί is found in both members of the comparison (s. Kühner-G. II 256; 2 Macc 2:10; 6:14) Ro 1:13; 1 Th 2:14. καθὼς καὶ … οὕτως καί Col 3:13 (cp. Hyperid. 1, 40, 20–25 ὥσπερ καὶ … οὕτω καί; 3, 38).

ⓓ w. expressions that introduce cause or result, here also pleonastic to a considerable degree διὰ τοῦτο καί for this reason (also) Lk 11:49; J 12:18. διὸ καί Lk 1:35; Ac 10:29; Ro 4:22; Hb 13:12. εἰς τοῦτο καί 2 Cor 2:9. ὥστε καί 1 Pt 4:19 (but this pass. may well fit in b). ὅθεν καί Hb 7:25; 11:19.

ⓔ after an interrogative (as Thu., X., et al.; s. Kühner-G. II 255. S. also B-D-F §442, 14) at all, still ἱνατί καὶ τ. γῆν καταργεῖ; Lk 13:7. τί καί; (Hyperid. 3, 14 τί καὶ ἀδικεῖ; what kind of wrong, then, is he committing?) τί καὶ ἐλπίζει; why does he still (need to) hope? Ro 8:24. v.l. τί καὶ βαπτίζονται; why are they baptized (at all)? 1 Cor 15:29; cp. vs. 30.

ⓕ used w. a relative, it oft. gives greater independence to the foll. relative clause: Mk 3:14; Lk 10:30; J 11:2 v.l.; Ac 1:3, 11; 7:45; 10:39; 11:30; 12:4; 13:22; 28:10; Ro 9:24; 1 Cor 11:23; Gal 2:10; Col 1:29 al.

ⓖ used pleonastically w. prep.

α. μετά (BGU 412, 6 μετὰ καὶ τ. υἱοῦ) Phil 4:3.

β. σύν (ins in PASA III 612; PFay 108; BGU 179, 19; 515, 17) 1 Cl 65:1.—Dssm., NB 93 (BS 265f).

ⓗ w. double names ὁ καί who is also called … (the earliest ex. in a fragment of Ctesias: 688 Fgm. 15, 51 p. 469, 23 Jac. ῏Ωχος καὶ Δαρειαῖος [s. Hatch 141]; OGI 565; 574; 583; 589; 603; 604; 620; 623; 636; POxy 45; 46; 54; 101; 485; 1279; PFay 30; BGU 22, 25; 36, 4; Jos., Ant. 1, 240; 5, 85; 12, 285; 13, 320; 18, 35. Further material in WSchmid, Der Atticismus III 1893, 338; Dssm., B 181ff [BS 313–17]. Lit. in B-D-F §268, 1) Σαῦλος, ὁ καὶ Παῦλος Ac 13:9. Ἰγνάτιος, ὁ καὶ Θεοφόρος ins of all the letters of Ign.

ⓘ with other particles

α. καὶ γάρ for (s. γάρ 1b).—καὶ γὰρ … ἀλλά (or granted that … but) 2 Cor 13:4; Phil 2:27.—καὶ γὰρ οὐ(κ): neither 1 Cor 11:9; for even … not 2 Cor 3:10.

β. καί γε (without intervening word [opp. earlier Gk, e.g. Pla., Phd. 58d; Rep. 7, 531a]: Hippocr., Septim. 9, VII 450 Littré; Cornutus p. 40, 12; Περὶ ὕψους 13, 2; Rhetor Apsines [III A.D.] p. 332, 17 Hammer; TestReub 4:4 al.; for גָּם always in Theod. [DBarthélemy, Les devanciers d’Aquila ’63, 31ff]), weakened force: (if) only or at least Lk 19:42 v.l.; intensive: indeed (Jos. Ant 29, 19) Ac 2:18 (J 3:2 v.l.; Mel., P. 30, 207); Hm 8:5; 9:9. καί γε οὐ μακράν= and indeed God is not far Ac 17:27.—Kühner-G. II 176b; Schwyzer II 561; B-D-F §439, 2; Rdm.² 35–37.

γ. καὶ … δέ and also, but also (s. δέ 5b).

δ. καίτοι (Il. 13, 267 et al., ins, pap; 4 Macc 2:6; 5:18; 7:13; Ath. 8, 1 al.; Mel., P. 58, 422) particle (B-D-F §425, 1; 450, 3; Rob. 1129 and 1154) w. finite verb (Chion, Ep. 3, 1; Jos. Ant. 5, 78) yet, on the other hand Ac 14:17. W. gen. abs. foll. (BGU 850, 4 [76 A.D.] καίτοι ἐμοῦ σε πολλὰ ἐρωτήσαντος; 898, 26; Philo, Vi. Mos. 1, 20; Jos., Ant. 2, 321; Ath. 19, 2; 25, 2) Hb 4:3.—καίτοι γε or καί τοι γε (since Aristoph., Ach. 611; but esp. in later Gk. [cp. Schwyzer II 561; MMeister, De Aiocho dial., Breslau diss. 1915 p. 31, 5]; Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 364b; Jos., Bell. 1, 7, Ant. 5, 36; Epict. 3, 24, 90; Just., A II, 11, 2; D. 7, 3; Ath. 3, 1; 22, 7; SIG 685, 76 and 82 [139 B.C.]) although J 4:2; Ac 14:17 v.l.; Dg 8:3. W. part. foll. (Jos., C. Ap. 1, 230; Mel., P. 58, 422) AcPt Ox 849, 18.—Kühner-G. II 151f; B-D-F §439, 1; 450, 3.—For ἀλλὰ κ., δὲ και, ἐὰν κ., εἰ κ., ἢ κ. s. ἀλλά, δέ, ἐάν, εἰ, ἤ.—ERobson, KAI-Configurations in the Gk. NT, 3 vols. diss. Syracuse ’79. LfgrE s.v. καί col. 1273f (lit.). DELG. M-M. EDNT.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > καί
79 ποιέω

ποιέω (Hom.+) impf. ἐποίουν; fut. ποιήσω; 1 aor. ἐποίησα; pf. πεποίηκα; plpf. πεποιήκειν Mk 15:7 (as IMagnMai 93b, 24; on the omission of the augment s. B-D-F §66, 1; Mlt-H. 190). Mid.: impf. ἐποιούμην; 1 aor. ἐποιησάμην; pf. πεποίημαι 1 Cl 1:1. Pass. (has disappeared almost entirely; B-D-F §315): 1 fut. ποιηθήσομαι; 1 aor. 3 pl. ἐποιήθησαν (En 22:9); pf. 3 sg. πεποίηται (Ec 8:14; Tat. 11, 2), ptc. πεποιημένος (Ec 1:14 al.) Hb 12:27. A multivalent term, often without pointed semantic significance, used in ref. to a broad range of activity involving such matters as bringing someth. into being, bringing someth. to pass, or simply interacting in some way with a variety of entities.

① to produce someth. material, make, manufacture, produce τὶ someth. (Gen 6:14ff; 33:17 al.; JosAs 16:8; GrBar 3:5 ‘build’; ApcMos 20; Mel., P. 38, 261).

ⓐ of human activity: σκεῦος 2 Cl 8:2. χιτῶνας, ἱμάτια Ac 9:39. εἰκόνα Rv 13:14b. θεούς make gods Ac 7:40 (Ex 32:1). ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς 19:24. ἀνθρακιάν J 18:18. τέσσαρα μέρη 19:23 (s. μέρος 1a). πηλόν 9:11, 14. σκηνὰς pitch tents, build huts (1 Ch 15:1; 2 Esdr 18: 16f; Jdth 8:5; Jos., Ant. 3, 79; Just., D. 127, 3 σκηνήν) Mt 17:4; Mk 9:5; Lk 9:33. ἁγίασμα GJs 6:1; καταπέτασμα τῷ ναῷ 10:1; τὴν πορφύραν καὶ τὸ κόκκινον 12:1.—Used w. prepositional expressions ποιῆσαι αὐτὴν (i.e. τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ μαρτυρίου) κατὰ τὸν τύπον to make it (the tent of testimony) according to the model (Ex 25:40) Ac 7:44; cp. Hb 8:5. ποιεῖν τι ἔκ τινος make someth. from or out of someth. (i.e. fr. a certain material; Hdt. 2, 96; cp. X., An. 4, 5, 14; Theophr., HP 4, 2, 5; Ex 20:24f; 28:15; 29:2) J 2:15; 9:6; Ro 9:21.

ⓑ of divine activity, specifically of God’s creative activity create (Hes., Op. 109; Heraclitus, Fgm. 30 κόσμον οὔτε τις θεῶν οὔτε ἀνθρώπων ἐποίησεν, ἀλλʼ ἦν ἀεὶ καὶ ἔστιν καὶ ἔσται; Pla., Tim. 76c ὁ ποιῶν ‘the Creator’; Epict. 1, 6, 5; 1, 14, 10; 2, 8, 19 σε ὁ Ζεὺς πεποίηκε; 4, 1, 102; 107; 4, 7, 6 ὁ θεὸς πάντα πεποίηκεν; Ael. Aristid. 43, 7 K.=1 p. 2 D.: Ζεὺς τὰ πάντα ἐποίησεν; Herm. Wr. 4, 1. In LXX oft. for בָּרָא also Wsd 1:13; 9:9; Sir 7:30; 32:13; Tob 8:6; Jdth 8:14; Bar 3:35; 4:7; 2 Macc 7:28; Aristobulus in Eus., PE13, 12, 12 [pp. 182 and 184 Holladay]; JosAs 9:5; Philo, Sacr. Abel. 65 and oft.; SibOr 3, 28 and Fgm. 3, 3; 16; Just., A II, 5, 2 al.) w. acc. ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα Ac 7:50 (Is 66:2). τοὺς αἰῶνας Hb 1:2 (s. αἰών 3). τὸν κόσμον (Epict. 4, 7, 6 ὁ θεὸς πάντα πεποίηκεν τὰ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ καὶ αὐτὸν τὸν κόσμον ὅλον; Sallust. 5 p. 10, 29; Wsd 9:9; TestAbr A 10 p. 88, 21 [Stone p. 24]) Ac 17:24. τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν (cp. Ael. Aristid. above; Gen 1:1; Ex 20:11; Ps 120:2; 145:6; Is 37:16; Jer 39:17 et al.; TestJob 2:4; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 121; Aristobulus above) Ac 4:24; 14:15b; cp. Rv 14:7. τὰ πάντα PtK 2 p. 13, 26 (JosAs 12, 2; Just., D. 55, 2; also s. Ael. Aristid. above). Lk 11:40 is classed here by many. Of the relation of Jesus to God Ἰησοῦν, πιστὸν ὄντα τῷ ποιήσαντι αὐτόν= appointed him Hb 3:2 (cp. Is 17:7).—W. a second acc., that of the predicate (PSI 435, 19 [258 B.C.] ὅπως ἂν ὁ Σάραπις πολλῷ σὲ μείζω ποιήσῃ) ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ ἐποίησεν αὐτούς (God) created them male and female Mt 19:4b; Mk 10:6 (both Gen 1:27c).—Pass. Hb 12:27.—ὁ ποιήσας the Creator Mt 19:4a v.l.

② to undertake or do someth. that brings about an event, state, or condition, do, cause, bring about, accomplish, prepare, etc.

ⓐ ἔργα π. do deeds, also in sg. (as JosAs 29:3 μὴ ποιήσῃς τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο) τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Ἀβραὰμ π. do as Abraham did J 8:39. τὰ ἔργα τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν vs. 41; cp. 10:37. τὰ πρῶτα ἔργα Rv 2:5. ἔργον commit a deed 1 Cor 5:2 v.l. ἔργον ποίησον εὐαγγελιστοῦ 2 Ti 4:5 (s. ἔργον 2).—ἔργον or ἔργα somet. refer to wondrous deeds: ἓν ἔργον ἐποίησα I have done just one (wondrous) deed J 7:21. Pl. 14:12a; cp. vs. 12bc. This illustrates the transition to

ⓑ do, perform miracles δυνάμεις Mt 7:22; 13:58; Ac 19:11 (Just., A I, 26, 2 al.); sg. Mk 6:5; 9:39. θαυμάσια Mt 21:15 (cp. Sir 31:9). μεγάλα καὶ θαυμάσια AcPl Ha 8, 33=BMM verso 5f (Just., A I, 62, 4). σημεῖα (Ex 4:17) J 2:23; 3:2; 7:31; 9:16; 11:47b; 20:30; Rv 13:13a; 16:14; 19:20. Sing. J 6:30; 10:41. τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα Ac 6:8; 7:36. ὅσα Mk 3:8; 6:30; Lk 9:10.—Ac 10:39; 14:11.

ⓒ of conditions bring about, etc.: εἰρήνην make, establish peace Eph 2:15; Js 3:18 (cp. 2 Macc 1:4). τὴν ἔκβασιν provide a way out 1 Cor 10:13 (on the foll. gen. of the inf. w. the art. s. B-D-F §400, 2; Rob. 1067). ἐπίστασιν ὄχλου cause a disturbance among the people Ac 24:12. τὰ σκάνδαλα create difficulties Ro 16:17. On Mk 6:20 v.l. KRomaniuk, ETL 69, ’93, 140f.—W. dat. of advantage ἐποίουν χαρὰν τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς they brought joy to the members Ac 15:3 (s. ἀδελφός 2a).

ⓓ used w. a noun as a periphrasis for a simple verb of doing (s. 7a below; B-D-F §310, 1.—ποιέω in such combinations as early as IPriene 8, 63 [c. 328 B.C.], also Plut., Crass. 551 [13, 6]; s. ἑορτή, end). ἐποίησεν ᾆσμα GJs 6:3. διαθήκην π. Hb 8:9 (Jer 38:32 cod. Q; cp. Is 28:15; TestAbr A 8 p. 86, 6 [Stone p. 20] διάταξιν). π. τὴν ἐκδίκησιν Lk 18:7f; cp. Ac 7:24 (s. ἐκδίκησις 1). ἐνέδραν 25:3. κοπετόν 8:2. κρίσιν (s. κρίσις 1aα and β) J 5:27; Jd 15. θρῆνον GJs 3:1. κυνηγίαν AcPl Ha 1, 33. λύτρωσιν Lk 1:68. ὁδὸν ποιεῖν (v.l. ὁδοποιεῖν) Mk 2:23 (ὁδός 2). π. (τὸν) πόλεμον (μετά τινος) wage war (on someone) Rv 11:7; 12:17; 13:7 (Da 7:8 LXX; 7:21 Theod.; Gen 14:2). πρόθεσιν Eph 3:11; συμβούλιον π. Mk 3:6 v.l.; 15:1; συστροφήν Ac 23:12; cp. vs. 13. φόνον Mk 15:7 (cp. Dt 22:8; Callinicus, Vi. Hyp. 98, 21 Bonn; TestAbr B 10 p. 115, 4 [Stone p. 78, 4]).—τὸ ἱκανὸν ποιεῖν τινι vs. 15 s. ἱκανός 1.

ⓔ what is done is indicated by the neut. of an adj. or pron.: τὸ ἀγαθὸν π. do what is good Ro 13:3; τὰ ἀγαθὰ π. J 5:29; ἀγαθὸν π. do good Mk 3:4; 1 Pt 3:11 (Ps 33:15). τὸ καλὸν Ro 7:21; 2 Cor 13:7b; Gal 6:9. τὰ καλὰ (καὶ εὐάρεστα ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ) 1 Cl 21:1. καλόν Js 4:17. τὸ κακόν Ro 13:4. τὰ κακά 3:8. κακόν 2 Cor 13:7a (κακὸν μηδέν; cp. SIG 1175, 20 κακόν τι ποιῆσαι). κακά 1 Pt 3:12 (Ps 33:17). τὰ ἀρεστὰ αὐτῷ (=τῷ θεῷ) J 8:29; cp. Hb 13:21b; 1J 3:22 (TestAbr A 15 p. 96, 12 [Stone p. 40] πάντα τὰ ἀρεστὰ ἐνώπιον σου ἐποίησεν). πάντα 1 Cor 9:23; 10:31b; IEph 15:3.—ὅ Mt 26:13; Mk 14:9; J 13:7, 27a. τοῦτο Mt 13:28; Mk 5:32; Lk 5:6; J 14:13, 14 v.l.; AcPl Ha 9, 27; Ro 7:15f, 20 (cp. Epict. 2, 26, 4 ὸ̔ θέλει οὐ ποιεῖ καὶ ὸ̔ μὴ θέλει ποιεῖ); 1 Cor 11:24f (the specific sense ‘sacrifice’ in this passage is opposed by TAbbott [JBL 9, 1890, 137–52], but favored by FMozley [ET 7, 1896, 370–86], AAndersen [D. Abendmahl in d. ersten zwei Jahrh. 1904], and K Goetz [D. Abendmahlsfrage² 1907]). αὐτὸ τοῦτο Gal 2:10. ταῦτα Mt 21:23; 23:23; Gal 5:17; 2 Pt 1:10b. αὐτά J 13:17; Ro 1:32; 2:3. τὸ αὐτό Mt 5:46, 47b.—τί ποιήσω; Mk 10:17; cp. J 18:35 (TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 19 [Stone p. 10]; ParJer 6:14 τί ποιήσωμεν; ApcEsdr 7:4 p. 32, 14 Tdf.). τί ἀγαθὸν ποιήσω; Mt 19:16. τί κακὸν ἐποίησεν; Mt 27:23; Lk 23:22; Mk 15:14. τί περισσὸν ποιεῖτε; Mt 5:47a. τί ποιεῖτε τοῦτο; what is this that you are doing? or why are you doing this? Mk 11:3 (GrBar 2:2 τί ἐποίησας τοῦτο; s. B-D-F §299, 1; Rob. 736; 738; Rdm.² 25f). τί ταῦτα ποιεῖτε; Ac 14:15a (as Demosth. 55, 5). τί σὺ ὧδε ποιεῖς; Hv 1, 1, 5. W. ptc. foll. (B-D-F §414, 5; Rob. 1121) τί ποιεῖτε λύοντες; what are you doing, untying? Mk 11:5. τί ποιεῖτε κλαίοντες; what are you doing, weeping? or what do you mean by weeping? Ac 21:13. τί ποιήσουσιν οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι; what are they to do, who have themselves baptized? 1 Cor 15:29.—A statement of what is to be done follows in an indirect question ὸ̔ ποιεῖς ποίησον do what you must do J 13:27 (as Epict. 3, 21, 24 ποίει ἃ ποιεῖς; 3, 23, 1; 4, 9, 18; TestJob 7:13).

ⓕ of meals or banquets, and of festivities of which a banquet is the principal part give ἄριστον Lk 14:12. δεῖπνον (q.v. bα) Mk 6:21; Lk 14:12, 16; J 12:2; Hs 5, 2, 9. δοχήν (s. δοχή) Lk 5:29; 14:13; GJs 6:2. γάμους (s. γάμος 1a) Mt 22:2 (JosAs 20:6).—Keep, celebrate (PFay 117, 12) the Passover (feast) Mt 26:18; Hb 11:28 (s. πάσχα 3). Also in connection w. τὴν ἑορτὴν ποιῆσαι Ac 18:21 D the Passover is surely meant. But π. is also used of festivals in general (cp. X., Hell. 4, 5, 2 ποιεῖν Ἴσθμια; 7, 4, 28 τὰ Ὀλύμπια).

ⓖ of the natural processes of growth; in plant life send out, produce, bear, yield καρπόν, καρπούς (Aristot., Plant. 1, 4, 819b, 31; 2, 10, 829a, 41; LXX [καρπός 1aα]) Mt 3:10; 7:17ab, 18, 19; 13:26; Lk 3:9; 6:43ab; 8:8; 13:9; Rv 22:2; also in imagery Mt 3:8; 21:43; Lk 3:8. κλάδους Mk 4:32. ἐλαίας Js 3:12a (cp. Jos., Ant. 11, 50 ἄμπελοι, αἳ ποιοῦσιν τὸν οἶνον). π. ὕδωρ produce water vs. 12b (but s. ἁλυκός).—Of capital yielding a return ἡ μνᾶ ἐποίησεν πέντε μνᾶς the mina has made five minas Lk 19:18. Also of a person who operates w. capital make money (Ps.-Demosth. 10, 76; Polyb. 2, 62, 12) ἐποίησεν ἄλλα πέντε τάλαντα Mt 25:16 v.l.

ⓗ with focus on causality

α. The result of the action is indicated by the acc. and inf.; make (to), cause (someone) to, bring it about that (Hom. et al.; also ins [SIG IV p. 510a index], pap, LXX; TestJob 3:7; 42:6; ParJer 9:16f; ApcMos 16; Just., A I, 26, 5, D. 69, 6; 114, 1; Ath. 13, 2) ποιεῖ αὐτὴν μοιχευθῆναι Mt 5:32. ποιήσω ὑμᾶς γενέσθαι ἁλεεῖς ἀνθρώπων Mk 1:17. Cp. 7:37b; Lk 5:34 ( force someone to fast); J 6:10; Ac 17:26; Rv 13:13b.—ἵνα takes the place of the inf.: ποιήσω αὐτοὺς ἵνα ἥξουσιν Rv 3:9; cp. 13:12b, 16. ἵνα without acc. (TestAbr B 6 p. 110, 20 [Stone p. 68] ποίησον ἵνα φαγῶμεν) J 11:37; Col 4:16; Rv 13:15.—ἡμῖν ὡς πεποιηκόσιν τοῦ περιπατεῖν αὐτόν us, as though we had caused him to walk Ac 3:12 (s. B-D-F §400, 7).

β. w. a double accusative, of the obj. and the pred. (Hom. et al.; LXX; ApcEsdr 4:27 p. 38, 32 Tdf. λίθους ἄρτους ποιήσας; Mel., P. 68, 494 ποιήσας ἡμᾶς ἱεράτευμα καινόν), make someone or someth. (into) someth. W. noun as predicate acc.: ποιήσω ὑμᾶς ἁλιεῖς ἀνθρώπων Mt 4:19. ὑμεῖς αὐτὸν (i.e. τὸν οἶκον τοῦ θεοῦ) ποιεῖτε σπήλαιον λῃστῶν 21:13; Mk 11:17; Lk 19:46. Cp. Mt 23:15b; J 2:16; 4:46, 54; cp. 2:11; Ac 2:36; 2 Cor 5:21; Hb 1:7 (Ps 103:4); Rv 1:6; 3:12 al. ποίησόν με ὡς ἕνα τ. μισθίων σου Lk 15:19, 21 v.l. (cp. Gen 45:8; 48:20 and s. B-D-F §453, 4; Rob. 481). If the obj. acc. is missing, it may be supplied fr. the context as self-evident ἁρπάζειν αὐτὸν ἵνα ποιήσωσιν βασιλέα take him by force, in order to make (him) king J 6:15.—1 Cor 6:15. Claim that someone is someth., pretend that someone is someth. J 8:53; 10:33; 19:7, 12; 1J 1:10; 5:10. Cp. 5b.—W. adj. as predicate acc.: εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους (Is 40:3) make the paths straight Mt 3:3; Mk 1:3; Lk 3:4. τρίχα λευκὴν π. Mt 5:36. Cp. 12:16; 20:12b; 26:73; 28:14; Mk 3:12; J 5:11, 15; 7:23; 16:2; Ac 7:19; Eph 2:14 ὁ ποιήσας τὰ ἀμφότερα ἕν; Rv 12:15; 21:5. ἴσον ἑαυτὸν ποιῶν τῷ θεῷ (thereby) declaring that he was equal to God or making himself equal to God J 5:18.—Cp. use of the mid. 7b below.

γ. w. adv. of place send outside ἔξω ποιεῖν τινα put someone out (=send outside; cp. X., Cyr. 4, 1, 3 ἔξω βελῶν ποιεῖν=‘put outside bowshot’) Ac 5:34.

③ to carry out an obligation of a moral or social nature, do, keep, carry out, practice, commit

ⓐ do, keep the will or law obediently τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ etc. (JosAs 12:3; s. θέλημα 1cγ) Mt 7:21; 12:50; Mk 3:35; J 4:34; 6:38; 7:17; 9:31; Eph 6:6; Hb 10:7, 9 (both Ps 39:9), 36; 13:21; 1J 2:17; Pol 2:2; τὰ θελήματα Mk 3:35 v.l.; Ac 13:22; GEb 121, 34. π. τὰ θελήματα τῆς σαρκός Eph 2:3. Cp. Mt 21:31.—π. τὸν νόμον J 7:19; Gal 5:3; cp. Mt 5:19; Ro 2:14; Gal 3:10 (Dt 27:26); vs. 12 (cp. Lev 18:5).—Mt 7:24, 26; Lk 6:46; J 2:5; 8:44. ἐκεῖνο τὸ προσταχθὲν ἡμῖν ποιήσωμεν let us do what has been commanded us GMary 463, 27f (ParJer 6:9).—ὸ̔ ἐὰν φανηρώσῃ … ὁ θεός, τοῦτο ποιήσομεν GJs 8:2.—ἐξουσίαν ποιεῖν exercise authority Rv 13:12a.

ⓑ do, practice virtues (cp. SIG 304, 41f τὰ δίκαια): π. τὴν ἀλήθειαν (ἀλήθεια 2b) live the truth J 3:21 (cp. 1QS 1:5 al.); 1J 1:6. (τὴν) δικαιοσύνην (δικαιοσύνη 3a) 1J 2:29; 3:7, 10; Rv 22:11; 2 Cl 4:2; 11:7. τὰ ἐντολά Ro 22:14 v.l. (SGoranson, NTS 43, ’97, 154–57). Differently Mt 6:1 (δικαιοσύνη 3b), which belongs with ποιεῖν ἐλεημοσύνην vs. 2a and 3a (s. ἐλεημοσύνη 1); cp. Ac 9:36; 10:2; 24:17. π. ἐγκράτειαν 2 Cl 15:1. π. χρηστότητα Ro 3:12 (Ps 13:1, 3; 52:4 v.l.). π. ἔλεος show mercy Js 2:13; μετά τινος to someone Lk 1:72; 10:37a (JosAs 23:4; s. ἔλεος a and μετά A2γג).

ⓒ do, commit, be guilty of sins and vices (τὴν) ἁμαρτίαν (ἁμαρτία 1a) J 8:34; 2 Cor 11:7; 1 Pt 2:22; 1J 3:4a, 8, 9; pl. Js 5:15 (TestAbr B 10 p. 115, 10 [Stone p. 78, 10]). ἁμάρτημα (TestJob 11:3; ParJer 2:2; s. ἁμάρτημα) 1 Cor 6:18. (τὴν) ἀνομίαν (ἀνομία 2) Mt 13:41; 1J 3:4b; 1 Cl 16:10 (Is 53:9). βδέλυγμα καὶ ψεῦδος Rv 21:27. τὸ πονηρὸν τοῦτο GJs 13:1; cp. 13:2; 15:3f; ταῦτα 15:2. τὰ μὴ καθήκοντα Ro 1:28. ὸ̔ οὐκ ἔξεστιν Mk 2:24; cp. Mt 12:2.

ⓓ The manner of action is more definitely indicated by means of an adv. (Jos., C. Ap. 2, 51). καλῶς ποιεῖν do good or well Mt 12:12; 1 Cor 7:37, 38a (ApcMos 17). κρεῖσσον π. 7:38b; Js 2:8 (s. 5d below), 19; φρονίμως π. act wisely Lk 16:8; π. οὕτως do so (Chariton 8, 6, 4 ποιήσομεν οὕτως=this is the way we will proceed; JosAs 10:20; ApcMos 40; Mel., P. 13, 82) Mt 24:46; Lk 9:15; 12:43; J 14:31 (καθὼς … οὕτως π.); Ac 12:8; 1 Cor 16:1; Js 2:12; B 12:7; GJs 7:2. π. ὡσαύτως proceed in the same way Mt 20:5; ὁμοίως π. Lk 3:11; 10:37b. ὥσπερ οἱ ὑποκριταὶ ποιοῦσιν as the dissemblers do Mt 6:2b. καθὼς ποιεῖτε 1 Th 5:11.—ποιεῖν foll. by a clause beginning w. ὡς: ἐποίησεν ὡς προσέταξεν he did as (the angel) had ordered Mt 1:24; cp. 26:19. Or the clause begins w. καθώς Mt 21:6; J 13:15b (TestJob 7:9). For GJs 17:1 s. 5e.

ⓔ The manner of the action is more definitely indicated by a prepositional expr. ποιεῖν κατά τι do or act in accordance w. someth. (SIG 915, 13 π. κατὰ τὰς συνθήκας; 1016, 6; PLille 4, 6; 22 [III B.C.]; BGU 998 II, 12 [II B.C.] π. κατὰ τὰ προγεγραμμένα) κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν as they do Mt 23:3b.—Lk 2:27. Also π. πρός τι: πρὸς τὸ θέλημα 12:47.

④ to do someth. to others or someth., do someth. to/with, of behavior involving others, π. τι w. some indication of the pers. (or thing) with whom someth. is done; the action may result to the advantage or disadvantage of this person:

ⓐ neutral π. τί τινα do someth. with someone (double acc. as Demosth. 23, 194 τὶ ποιεῖν ἀγαθὸν τὴν πόλιν) τί ποιήσω Ἰησοῦν; what shall I do with Jesus? Mt 27:22. τί οὖν αὐτὴν ποιήσωμεν; what, then, shall I do about (Mary)? GJs 8:2; cp. 14:1; 17:1. τί ποιήσεις τὸν ἀγρόν; what will you do with the land? Hs 1:4 (ParJer 3:9 τί θέλει ποιήσω τὰ ἅγια σκεύη). Cp. Mk 15:12.—B-D-F §157, 1; Rob. 484.—Neutral is also the expr. π. τί τινι do someth. to someone J 9:26; 12:16; 13:12; Ac 4:16. Likew. the passive form of the familiar saying of Jesus ὡς ποιεῖτε, οὕτω ποιηθήσεται ὑμῖν as you do (whether it be good or ill), it will be done to you 1 Cl 13:2.

ⓑ to someone’s advantage: π. τί τινι (Diod S 18, 51, 3; TestAbr B 12 p. 116, 19 [Stone p. 80]; ParJer 3:12; ApcMos 3): ὅσα ἐὰν θέλητε ἵνα ποιῶσιν ὑμῖν οἱ ἄνθρωποι Mt 7:12a. τί θέλετε ποιήσω ὑμῖν; what do you want me to do for you? Mt 20:32.—25:40; cp. vs. 45; Mk 5:19f; 7:12; 10:35f, 51; Lk 1:49; 8:39ab; J 13:15a.—π. τι εἴς τινα 1 Th 4:10. π. τι μετά τινος (B-D-F §227, 3, add. reff. B-D-R) Ac 14:27; 15:4 (TestJob 1:4; on the constr. w. μετά s. 3b above and cp. BGU 798, 7; 948, 8).

ⓒ to someone’s disadvantage: π. τί τινι (Gen 20:9; JosAs 28:10 μὴ ποιήσητε αὐτοῖς κακόν; ApcMos 42) τί ποιήσει τοῖς γεωργοῖς; what will he do to the vine-dressers? Mt 21:40.—Mk 9:13; Lk 6:11; 20:15; Ac 9:13; Hb 13:6 (Ps 117:6); GJs 9:2.—π. τι εἴς τινα (PSI 64, 20; 22 [I B.C.] μηδὲ ποιήσειν εἰς σὲ φάρμακα) J 15:21. π. τι ἔν τινι Mt 17:12; Lk 23:31.

ⓓ w. dat. and adv. ἐποίησαν αὐτοῖς ὡσαύτως they treated them in the same way Mt 21:36. οὕτως μοι πεποίηκεν κύριος the Lord has dealt thus with me Lk 1:25; cp. 2:48; Mt 18:35. εὖ ποιεῖν τινι Mk 14:7. καλῶς π. τινι Mt 5:44 v.l.; Lk 6:27. ὁμοίως π. τινι 6:31b.—In a condensed colloquialism (ποιεῖν) καθὼς ἐποίει αὐτοῖς (to do) as he was accustomed to do for them Mk 15:8 (s. εὐποιί̈α 1).

ⓔ w. dat. and prep. κατὰ τὰ αὐτὰ ἐποίουν τοῖς προφήταις οἱ πατέρες αὐτῶν Lk 6:23; cp. vs. 26.

⑤ do, make, with variations in specialized expressions

ⓐ get or gain someth. for oneself, provide oneself with someth. ποιήσατε ἑαυτοῖς βαλλάντια Lk 12:33; φίλους 16:9 (cp. X., An. 5, 5, 12 φίλον ποιεῖσθαί τινα).—Without a dat. Ἰησοῦς μαθητὰς ποιεῖ Jesus was gaining disciples J 4:1.

ⓑ of mental construction assume, suppose, take as an example (Hdt. et al.) w. double acc. (Pla., Theaet. 197d) ποιήσατε τὸ δένδρον καλόν suppose the tree is good Mt 12:33a; cp. vs. 33b.

ⓒ w. an acc. of time spend, stay (Anth. 11, 330; PSI 362, 15 [251/250 B.C.]; UPZ 70, 21; PFlor 137, 7 [III A.D.] ἡμέραν, ἥν ποιεῖ ἐκεῖ; PGen 54, 18 τρεῖς ἡμέρας; Pr 13:23; Ec 6:12; Tob. 10:7 BA; TestJob 20:5; 31:4; ParJer 6:16; ApcMos 37 ὥρας τρεῖς; Jos. Ant. 6, 18 μῆνας τέσσαρας; cp. our colloquial ‘do time’. Demosth. 19, 163 and Pla., Phileb. 50d are wrongly cited in this connection, as shown by WSchulze, Graeca Latina 1901, 23f) χρόνον (Dionys. Hal. 4, 66; ParJer 7:33; ApcMos 31) Ac 15:33; 18:23. μῆνας τρεῖς 20:3. τρεῖς μῆνας GJs 12:3. νυχθήμερον 2 Cor 11:25. ἐνιαυτόν Js 4:13 (TestJob 21:1 ἔτη).

ⓓ καλῶς ποιεῖν w. ptc. foll. do well if, do well to, as a formula somet.= please (s. καλῶς 4a and cp. SIG 561, 6f καλῶς ποιήσειν τοὺς πολίτας προσδεξαμένους; UPZ 110, 11 [164 B.C.]; POxy 300, 5 [I A.D.]; 525, 7; Hdt. 5, 24 εὖ ἐποίησας ἀφικόμενος; SIG 598e, 8f) Ac 10:33; Phil 4:14; 2 Pt 1:19; 3J 6; GEg 252, 53.—Sim. καλῶς ποιεῖν, εἰ … Js 2:8 (cp. PPetr II, 11 [1], 1 καλῶς ποιεῖς εἰ ἔρρωσαι).

ⓔ αὕτη ἡ ἡμέρα κυρίου ποιήσει ὡς βούλεται this day of the Lord will turn out as (the Lord) wills GJs 17:1 (deStrycker cites Mt 6:34 for the construction); if the accentuation αὐτή is adopted, render: the day of the Lord shall itself bring things about as (the Lord) wills.

⑥ to be active in some way, work, be active, abs. (X., An. 1, 5, 8; Ruth 2:19) w. acc. of time (Socrat., Ep. 14, 8 ποιήσας ἡμέρας τριάκοντα) μίαν ὥραν ἐποίησαν they have worked for only one hour Mt 20:12a. ποιῆσαι μῆνας be active for months Rv 13:5.—Somet. it is not a general action or activity that is meant, but the doing of someth. quite definite. The acc. belonging to it is easily supplied fr. the context: λέγουσιν καὶ οὐ ποιοῦσιν they say (it), but do not do or keep (it) Mt 23:3c (the contrast is not betw. speaking [λαλεῖν] and acting in general).—2 Cor 8:10f (s. Betz, 2 Cor p. 64); 1 Th 5:24.

⑦ make/do someth. for oneself or of oneself mid.

ⓐ mostly as a periphrasis of the simple verbal idea (s. 2d) ἀναβολὴν ποιεῖσθαι Ac 25:17 (s. ἀναβολή). ἐκβολὴν ποιεῖσθαι 27:18 (s. ἐκβολή); αὔξησιν π. Eph 4:16; δέησιν or δεήσεις π. Lk 5:33; Phil 1:4; 1 Ti 2:1 (s. δέησις). διαλογισμοὺς π. 1 Cl 21:3; τὰς διδασκαλίας Papias (2:15); τὴν ἕνωσιν π. IPol 5:2; ἐπιστροφὴν π. 1 Cl 1:1 (ἐπιστροφή 1); καθαρισμὸν π. Hb 1:3 (καθαρισμός 2). κοινωνίαν Ro 15:26. κοπετόν Ac 8:2 v.l.; λόγον (Isocr., Ep. 2, 2; Just., D. 1, 3 al.) 1:1; 11:2 D; 20:24 v.l. (on these three passages s. λόγος: 1b; 1aγ and 1aα, end). μνείαν Ro 1:9; Eph 1:16; 1 Th 1:2; Phlm 4 (μνεία 2). μνήμην 2 Pt 1:15 (s. μνήμη 1). μονήν J 14:23 (μονή 1). νουθέτησιν 1 Cl 56:2 (Just., A I, 67, 4). ὁμιλίαν IPol 5:1 (ὁμιλία 2). ποιεῖσθαι τὴν παραβολήν AcPlCor 2:28. πορείαν π. (=πορεύεσθαι; cp. X., An. 5, 6, 11, Cyr. 5, 2, 31; Plut., Mor. 571e; Jos., Vi. 57; 2 Macc 3:8; 12:10; Ar. 4, 2) Lk 13:22. πρόνοιαν π. make provision, care (Isocr. 4, 2 and 136; Demosth., Prooem. 16; Ps.-Demosth. 47, 80; Polyb. 4, 6, 11; Dion. Hal. 5, 46; Aelian, VH 12, 56. Oft. in ins and pap [esp. of civic-minded people]; Da 6:19 προν. ποιούμενος αὐτοῦ; Jos., Bell. 4, 317, C. Ap. 1, 9; Ar. 13, 2) Ro 13:14; Papias (2:15). προσκλίσεις π. 1 Cl 47:3; σπουδὴν π. be eager (Hdt. 1, 4; 5, 30 πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούμενος; 9, 8; Pla., Euthyd. 304e, Leg. 1, 628e; Isocr. 5, 45 πᾶσαν τὴν σπ.̀ περὶ τούτου ποιεῖσθαι; Polyb. 1, 46, 2 al.; Diod S 1, 75, 1; Plut., Mor. 4e; SIG 539A, 15f; 545, 14 τὴν πᾶσαν σπ.̀ ποιούμενος; PHib 71, 9 [III B.C.] τ. πᾶσαν σπ. ποίησαι; 44, 8) Jd 3. συνελεύσεις ποιεῖσθαι come together, meet 1 Cl 20:10 (Just., A I, 67, 7). συνωμοσίαν ποιεῖσθαι form a conspiracy (Polyb. 1, 70, 6; Herodian 7, 4, 3; SIG 526, 16) Ac 23:13.—Cp. use of the act. 2d.

ⓑ w. double acc., of the obj. and pred. (Lucian, Prom. Es in Verb. 6 σεμνοτάτας ἐποιεῖτο τὰς συνουσίας; GDI 4629, II, 22; 25 [Laconia]; Jos., Ant. 2, 263; s. 2hβ) βεβαίαν τὴν κλῆσιν ποιεῖσθαι make the calling certain 2 Pt 1:10. οὐδενὸς λόγου ποιοῦμαι τὴν ψυχὴν τιμίαν ἐμαυτῷ I don’t consider my life as something of value for myself Ac 20:24. Cp. use of the act. 2hβ.—B. 538. Cp. πράσσω. Schmidt, Syn. I 397–423. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ποιέω
80 φέρω

φέρω ([dialect] Locr. [full] φάρω [ᾰ], IG9(1).334.5 (Oeanthea, v. B.C.)), only [tense] pres. and [tense] impf. (late 1 [tense] aor. [ per.] 3pl.

A ἤφεραν IG3.1379
), Il.21.458, etc.: [dialect] Ep. forms, [ per.] 2pl. imper. φέρτε Il.9.171
; [ per.] 2sg. subj. φέρῃσθα Call.Dian. 144
; [ per.] 3sg. subj. φέρῃσι Il.18.308
, Od.5.164, al.; [dialect] Ep. inf. φερέμεν Il.9.411
, al.: [tense] impf. ἔφερον, [dialect] Ep. φέρον 3.245
; also φέρεσκε, φέρεσκον ([ per.] 3pl.), Od.9.429, 10.108.

II [tense] fut. οἴσω Il.7.82
, etc.; [dialect] Dor. οἰσῶ Theoc.3.11
; [ per.] 1pl. οἰσεῦμες Id.15.133
; [ per.] 3pl. ηοίσοντι Tab.Heracl.1.150: the foll. act. forms are not [tense] fut. in sense, imper. οἶσε Od.22.106
, 481, Ar.Ach. 1099, 1101, 1122, Ra. 482; οἰσέτω Il.19.173
, Od.8.255; [ per.] 3pl. οἰσόντων Antim.15
; inf. οἴσειν Pi.P.4.102
, [dialect] Ep. οἰσέμεν Od.3.429
, οἰσέμεναι Il.3.120
, Od.8.399, etc.: [tense] aor. 1 inf. οἶσαι Ph.1.611
codd. ( ἀν-οῖσαι is prob. in Hdt.1.157):—[voice] Med., [tense] fut. οἴσομαι Il.22.217
, S.El. 969, etc. (in pass. sense, E.Or. 440, X.Oec.18.6; so [dialect] Dor. οἰσεῖται Archim.Fluit.1.7
, al.): [tense] fut. [voice] Pass. οἰσθήσομαι D.44.45
, Arist. Ph. 205a13, Archim.Fluit.1.3, al., ([etym.] ἐξ-) E.Supp. 561:—[voice] Pass., [tense] pf. προοῖσται Luc.Par.2
; cf. οἰστέον, οἰστός ([etym.] ἀν-οιστός).

III from ἐνεγκ- (not found in Hom. or Hdt., exc. as v.l. in Il.19.194, but in Pi.O.13.66, I.8(7).21, ([etym.] προς-) Id.P.9.36, also B.16.62, and normal in [dialect] Att. and Trag., also in codd.Hp., Epid.1.1.2, al.) come [tense] aor. 1 ἤνεγκα, and [tense] aor. 2 ἤνεγκον:—Indic., [ per.] 1sg. ἤνεγκον S.OC 521
(lyr.), 964, Ar.Ra. 1299, Th. 742, Lys. 944, ([etym.] δι-) Isoc.18.59, but ἤνεγκα S.El. 13
, E. Ion38, Aeschin.2.4, and in compos. with Preps.; [ per.] 2sg. always ἤνεγκας Ar.Av. 540
(lyr.), ([etym.] ἐξ-) S.Tr. 741 (in Ar.Th. 742, δέκα μῆνας αὔτ' ἐγὼ ἤνεγκον is answd. by ἤνεγκας σύ;); [ per.] 3sg. ἤνεγκε, common to both forms; dual δι-ηνεγκάτην Pl.Lg. 723b
; pl. always ἠνέγκαμεν, -ατε, -αν ([ per.] 3pl. ἀπ-ήνενκαν IG22.1620.37
, al., once ἀπ-ήνεγκον ib. 1414.2; δι-ηνέγκομεν is f.l. in X.Oec.9.8): imper., [ per.] 2sg. ἔνεγκε E. Heracl. 699
, Ar.Eq. 110, X.Mem.3.6.9 ( ἔνεγκον cj. Pors. in Anaxipp. 8); [ per.] 3sg. ἐνεγκάτω Ar. Pax 1149
(troch.), Th. 238, Pl.Phd. 116d, ([etym.] προς-) X.Smp.5.2; but ἐξ-ενεγκέτω IG12.63.33
, 76.61; [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 3pl. ἐνεγκόντω ib.5 (1).26.16 (Amyclae, ii/i B. C.); [ per.] 2pl. ἐξ-ενέγκατε Ar.Ra. 847
: subj. ἐνέγκω common to both forms: opt., [ per.] 1sg. ἐνέγκαιμι E.Hipp. 393
, Pl.Cri. 43c: [ per.] 3sg. ἐνέγκαι (cod.A, but - κοι cod.Laur.) S.Tr. 774, but ἐνέγκοι Id.Fr.84
(anap.), Pl.R. 330a, ([etym.] ξυν-) Th.6.20, etc.; [ per.] 2pl. ἐνέγκαιτε ( ἐνέγκατε codd.) E.Heracl. 751 (lyr.): inf. ἐνεγκεῖν A.Supp. 766
, S.OC 1599, IG22.40.18, etc., ([etym.] προς-) Pi.P.9.36, Hp.VM15; Hellenistic ἐνέγκαι Arist.Oec. 1349a27
([etym.] εἰς-), PAmh.2.30.35 (ii B. C.), Ev.Marc. 2.4 ([etym.] προς-), etc., found also in codd.Hp., Aff.3 ([etym.] προς-), Nat.Mul.19 ([etym.] δι-): part. ἐνεγκών Pi.I.8(7).21
, S.El. 692, Th.6.56, etc., ἐνέγκας IG22.1361.21
([etym.] εἰς-), 333.4, D.49.51 (and later, Demetr.Com.Nov.1.10 ([etym.] εἰς-), Arist.Oec. 1351a14, etc.; in X. we find ἐξ-ενεγκόντες Mem.1.2.53
, and δι-ενεγκοῦσα, συν-ενεγκόντες, vv. ll. in ib.2.2.5, An.6.5.6):— [voice] Med., only ἠνεγκάμην, Ar.Ec.76 ([etym.] ἐξ-), etc. (exc. imper. ἐνεγκοῦ S.OC 470
); [ per.] 2sg. ἠνέγκω E.Supp. 583
, X.Oec.7.13; [ per.] 3sg. ἠνέγκατο S.Tr. 462
, Pl.R. 406b, etc.; [ per.] 1pl. ἠνεγκάμεθα Id. Ion 530b
, ([etym.] προ-) Phlb. 57a; inf. εἰς-ενέγκασθαι Isoc.15.188
: part. ἐνεγκάμενος Aeschin.1.131
, ([etym.] ἀπ-) X.Ages.6.2.

IV from ἐνεικ- comes [tense] aor. 1 ἤνεικα, found mostly in [dialect] Ion. (but not in codd. Hp.), [dialect] Ep. and Lyr., also at Cos (v. infr.) and implied elsewh. in pass. forms (v. infr. v):—the endings are those of [tense] aor. 1, exc. in imper. ἔνεικε Od.21.178
, inf. ἐνεικέμεν (v.l. ἐνεγκέμεν) Il.19.194, ἐνείκην (v. infr.), and part. μετ-ενεικών, ἐξενικοῦσι (v. infr.), cf. συνενείκομαι:—[ per.] 1sg. ἀν-ένεικα Od.11.625
; [ per.] 2sg. ἀπ-ένεικας Il.14.255
; [ per.] 3sg. ἤνεικε Od.18.300
, al., Hdt.2.146, [dialect] Ep. ἔνεικε Il.15.705
, al.; [ per.] 1pl. ἐνείκαμεν Od.24.43
; [ per.] 3pl. ἤνεικαν Hdt.3.30
, [dialect] Ep. ἔνεικαν Il.9.306
; imper. [ per.] 2sg. ἔνεικον Anacr.62.3
; [ per.] 2pl., ἐνείκατε Od. 8.393
; [ per.] 3pl. ἐνεικάντων Schwyzer 688
B 3 (Chios, v B. C.); inf. ἐνεῖκαι Il.18.334
, Pi.P.9.53, Hdt.1.32; ἐνεικέμεν (v. supr.); [dialect] Aeol. ἐνείκην Alc.Oxy.1788
Fr.15ii 20; part. ἐνείκας Il.17.39
, ([etym.] ἀν-) Hdt.2.23; μετ-ενεικών Abh.Berl.Akad.1928(6).22
(Cos, iii B. C.):—[voice] Med., [ per.] 3sg. ἀν-ενείκατο Il.19.314
; [ per.] 3pl. ἠνείκαντο 9.127
, Hdt.1.57, ([etym.] ἐς-) 7.152; part. ἐνεικάμενος Alc.35.4
.

2 [tense] aor. 1 ἤνῐκα is found in the foll. dialect forms: [ per.] 3sg. ἤνικε IG42(1).121.110
(Epid., iv B. C.); ἤνικεν SIG239
Bi11 (Delph., iv B. C.); ἀν-ήνικε IG4.757A12
, al. (Troezen, ii B. C.); ἀπ-ήνικε ib.42(1).103.16, al. (Epid., iv B. C.); but ἤνῑκε is prob. written for ἤνεικε in IG4.801.3 (Troezen, vi B. C.); [ per.] 1pl. ἀν-ηνίκαμες [ῐ] GDI 3591b21 ([place name] Calymna); [ per.] 3pl. ἤνικαν SIG239
Bi 17 (Delph., iv B. C.), IG 12(2).15.15 (Mytil., iii B. C.); [ per.] 3sg. subj. ἐνίκει Berl.Sitzb.1927.161
([place name] Cyrene); ἐς-ενίκη, and inf. ἐς-ένικαι, IG12(2).645b43,39 (Nesus, iv B. C.); part. (dat. pl.) ἐξ-ενικοῦσι IG4.823.49
(Troezen, iv B. C.); so in later Gr., εἰς-ήνικα Supp.Epigr.7.381
,382 (Dura-Europos, iii A. D.); ἤνιγκα ib.383 (ibid., iii A. D.):—[voice] Med., part. ἐξ-ε[νικ]άμενος IG12
(2).526a5 (Eresus, iv B. C.).

b [dialect] Boeot. [tense] aor. 1 in [ per.] 3pl. εἴνιξαν IG7.2418.24
(Thebes, iv B. C.); [ per.] 1sg. ἤνειγξα Hdn.Gr.2.374.

V other tenses: [tense] pf. ἐνήνοχα D.21.108
, 22.62, ([etym.] ἐξ-) Luc.Pr.Im.15,17, ([etym.] μετ-) Pl.Criti. 113a, ([etym.] συν-) v. l. in X.Mem.3.5.22:—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut. ἐνεχθήσομαι Arist.Ph. 205b12
, Archim.Fluit.2.2, al., ([etym.] ἐπ-) Th.7.56, ([etym.] κατ-) Isoc.13.19: [tense] aor. ἠνέχθην X.An.4.7.12
and freq. in compds.; [dialect] Ion. ἀπ-ηνείχθην Hdt.1.66
, etc.; ([etym.] περι-) ib.84; [ per.] 3pl. written ἠνείχτθησαν in Schwyzer 707B9 (Ephesus, vi B. C.); [dialect] Dor. part. ἐξ-ενειχθείς IG42(1).121.115
(Epid., iv B. C.); Hellenistic ἐνεγχθείς PCair.Zen.327.42
(iii B. C.), ([etym.] συμπερι-) IPE12.32A31,78, B70 (Olbia, iii B. C.); in dialects, [ per.] 3sg. indic. ἀπ-ηνίχθη IG42(1).103.111
(Epid., iv B. C.); [ per.] 3sg. subj. ἐξενιχθῇ ib.12(5).593 A23 (Ceos, v B. C.), Abh.Berl.Akad.1928(6).21 (Cos, iii B. C.); [dialect] Boeot. ἐν-ενιχθεῖ IG7.3172.150
(Thespiae, iii B. C.); part. (neut.) ἐπ-ενιχθέν Abh.Berl.Akad.1928(6).53
(Telos, iv B. C., ined.); [dialect] Att. [tense] pf. ἐνήνεγμαι, ἐνήνεκται Pl.R. 584d
, εἰς-ενήνεκται E. Ion 1340
; ἀν-ενήνεγκται IG12.91.4
; ἐπαν-ενήνειγκται ib.22.1607a7; [dialect] Ion. ἐξ-ενηνειγμένος Hdt.8.37
; [dialect] Att. [tense] plpf. προς-ενήνεκτο X.HG4.3.20
; part. κατ-, μετ-ενηνεγμένος Plb.10.30.2
, Str.13.1.12. (With φέρω cf. Lat.fero, OE. beran, Skt. bhárati 'bear'; οἴσω is of uncertain origin; ἐνεγκ- is prob. redupl. ἐγκ- ( ἐνεκ- in [voice] Pass. forms and in δουρηνεκής, etc.), cogn. with Skt. náśati 'attain,' Lat. nanciscor, Lith. nèšti 'carry, bear'; ἐνεικ- ([etym.] ἐνῐκ-) is of uncertain origin; the glosses ἐνέεικαν· ἤνεγκαν, and ἐνεείκω· ἐνέγκω (Hsch.) are not corroborated.)

A [voice] Act.,

I bear or carry a load, ἐν ταλάροισι φέρον μελιηδέα καρπόν Il.18.568
; μέγα ἔργον, ὃ οὐ δύο γ' ἄνδρε φέροιεν 5.303
; ἦγον μὲν μῆλα, φέρον δ' εὐήνορα οἶνον Od.4.622
; χοάς A.Ch.15
; φ. ἐπ' ὤμοις S.Tr. 564
; χερσὶν φ. Id.Ant. 429
; φ. ὅπλα βραχίονι E.Hec.14
; bear (as a device) on one's shield, A.Th. 559, etc.; γαστέρι κοῦρον φ., of a pregnant woman, Il.6.59; φ. ὑπὸ ζώνην or ζώνης ὕπο, A.Ch. 1000(992), E.Hec. 762: in Trag. stronger than ἔχω, ἁγνὰς αἵματος χεῖρας φ. to have hands clean from blood, E.Hipp. 316 (v.l. φορεῖς) ; ἀλαὸν ὄμμα φέρων Id.Ph. 1531
(lyr.); γλῶσσαν εὔφημον φ. A.Ch. 581
, cf. Supp. 994; καλὸν φ. στόμα S.Fr. 930
codd. (nisi leg. φορῇ) ; ἄψοφον βάσιν φ. Id.Tr. 967
(lyr.).

II bear, convey, with collat. notion of motion, freq. in Hom., πῇ δὴ.. τόξα φέρεις; Od.21.362
; πρόσω φ. ib. 369; εἴσω φέρω σ' ἐντεῦθεν Ar.V. 1444
, cf. Pl.Lg. 914b; πόδες φέρον Il.6.514
; πέδιλα τά μιν φέρον 24.341
, etc.; of horses, 2.838; ἵππω.. ἅρμα οἴσετον 5.232
, etc.; of ships, Od.16.323, cf. Il.9.306; τὰ σώματα τῶν ζῴων συνέστηκεν ἐκ τοῦ φέροντος καὶ τοῦ φερομένου Diocl. Fr.17
.

b of persons, bring to bear, μένος or μένος χειρῶν ἰθύς τινος φέρειν hurl one's strength right upon or against him, Il.16.602, 5.506; φ. τὴν ὀργήν, τὴν αἰτίαν ἐπί τινα, Plb.21.31.8, 33.11.2.

c lead, direct, τὴν πόλιν Plu.Luc.6
.

2 of wind, bear along, [πνοιὴ Ζεφύρου] φ. νῆάς τε καὶ αὐτούς Od.10.26
; [σχεδίην] ἄνεμοι φέρον ἔνθα καὶ ἔνθα 5.330
, cf. 4.516, Il.19.378, etc.; ἐπέλασσε φέρων ἄνεμος Od.3.300
, 7.277, cf. 5.111, etc.: abs., ὁ βορέας ἔξω τοῦ Πόντου εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα φέρει is fair for Greece, X.An.5.77: metaph., ὅπῃ ἂν ὁ λόγος ὥσπερ πνεῦμα φ. Pl.R. 394d
; φ. τινὰ φρένες δύσαρκτοι A.Ch. 1023
, cf. Th. 687 (lyr.):—[voice] Pass., v. infr. B.

III endure, suffer, λυγρά Od.18.135
; ἄτην Hdt.1.32
; χαλινόν, ζυγόν, A.Ag. 1066, 1226; πημονάς, τύχας, Id.Pers. 293, E.Or. 1024; ξυμφοράς Th.2.60
; τὰς οὐ προσηκούσας ἁμαρτίας Antipho 3.2.10
; also of food, ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἢ δύνανται φ. X.Cyr.8.2.21
; of strong wine, bear, admit, καὶ τὰ τρία φέρων καλῶς, i.e. three parts of water, instead of ἴσον ἴσῳ, Ar.Eq. 1188, cf. Ach. 354; so τὰς ἐπιδείξεις.. φέρουσιν αὐτοῦ (sc. Ἰσοκράτους) οἱ λόγοι, τοὺς δὲ ἐν ἐκκλησίαις.. ἀγῶνας οὐχ ὑπομένουσι D.H.Isoc.2
: metaph., ᾗ φέρειν πέφυκε Pl.Ti. 48a
.

2 freq. with modal words, πήματα κόσμῳ φ. Pi.P.3.82
; σιγῇ κακά E.Hec. 738
; ὀργῇ τὸν πόλεμον Th.1.31
; θυμῷ φ. Id.5.80
; χαρᾷ φ. τι J.AJ19.1.13
: esp. with an Adv., [ὕβριν] ῥηϊδίως φ. Hes.Op. 215
; δεινῶς, βαρέως, πικρῶς, χαλεπῶς φέρειν τι, bear a thing impatiently, take it ill or amiss, Hdt.2.121.γ, 5.19, E. Ion 610, Pl.R. 330a, etc.; δυσπετῶς, βαρυστόνως φ., A.Pr. 752, Eu. 794; προθύμως φέρειν τὸν πόλεμον to be zealous about the war, Hdt.9.18,40; προθύμως τὰ τοῦ πολέμου ἔφερον Th.8.36
; αἶσαν φέρειν ὡς ῥᾷστα A.Pr. 104
; συμφορὴν ὡς κουφότατα φ. Hdt.1.35
; ῥᾳδίως φ. Pl.Grg. 522d
, al.; εὐπετῶς φ. S.Fr. 585
, X.Mem.2.1.6; εὐπόρως ( εὐφόρως Brunck) ἐνεγκεῖν S.Ph. 873
; εὐμενῶς, εὐχερῶς φ., D.Ep. 3.45, Pl.R. 474e; these phrases are used mostly c. acc. rei; also c. part., βαρέως ἤνεικε ἰδών Hdt.3.155
, cf. Ar.Th. 385, etc.; φ. ἐλαφρῶς.. λαβόντα ζυγόν Pi.P.2.93
; ῥᾳδίως φέρεις ἡμᾶς ἀπολείπων Pl. Phd. 63a
: c. gen., τοῦ ἐνδεοῦς χαλεπώτερον φ. Th.1.77
, cf. 2.62; ἐπί τινι, χαλεπῶς φ. ἐπὶ τῇ πολιορκίᾳ X.HG7.4.21
, cf. Isoc.12.232; πράως ἐπὶ τοῖς γιγνομένοις φ. D.58.55
: c. dat. only, βαρέως φέρειν τοῖς παροῦσι, τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ, X.An.1.3.3, HG3.4.9, cf. 5.1.29; later, χαλεπῶς φ. διά τι, πρός τι, D.S.17.111, Jul.Or.1.17c codd.

IV bring, fetch, εἰ.. θεὸς αὐτὸν ἐνείκαι Od.21.196
; φ. ἄποινα Il.24.502
; ἄρνε 3
, 120, cf. Sapph.95; ὕδωρ, οἶνον, Anacr.62.1; ἔντεα Il.18.191
; τόξα Od.21.359
; κνημῖδας A.Th. 675
; δᾷδα Ar.Nu. 1490
, etc.; γῆν τε καὶ ὕδωρ Hdt.7.131
:—[voice] Med., carry or bring with one, or for one's own use, ποδάνιπτρα Od.19.504
; οἶνον Alc.35
, cf. Hdt.4.67, 7.50, X. Mem.3.14.1; φερνὰς δόμοις E.Andr. 1282
; fetch, Od.2.410; χοὰς ἐκ κρήνης S.OC 470
.

2 bring, offer, present, δῶρα Od.8.428
, etc.; μέλος Pi.P.2.3
; χοάς τινι A.Ch. 487
; φ. πέπλον δώρημά τινι S.Tr. 602
; πρός τινα δῶρα X.An.7.3.31
; χάριν τινὶ φ. grant any one a favour, do him a kindness, Il.5.211, Od.5.307, al.; ἐπὶ ἦρα φ. τινί Il.1.572
, Od.3.164, etc.; φ. τισὶ εὐνοίας, ὄνησιν ἀστοῖς, A.Supp. 489, S.OC 287; but after Hom., χάριν τινὶ φ. show gratitude to him, Pi.O.10(11).17; μῆνιν φ. τινί cherish wrath against.. A.Niob. in PSI11.1208.12.

b = ἄγω iv. 1, ἄχρι νῦν καθ' ὥραν ἔτους λέγονται πένθος ἐπὶ Μελεάγρῳ φέρειν Ant.Lib.2.7
; Ἰάλεμος· ὁ ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀπολωλόσιν ἀνίαν φέρων, Suid.:—[voice] Med., τοῦ γονέως ἐφ' ᾧ γε τὸ πένθος φέρεσθε Phalar.Ep.103.1
.

3 bring, produce, cause, [ἀστὴρ] φέρει πυρετὸν βροτοῖσιν Il.22.31
; ὄσσαν.. ἥ τε φ. κλέος ἀνθρώποισι Od.1.283
, cf. 3.204; φ. κακόν, πῆμα, ἄλγεα, etc., work one woe, Il.8.541, Od.12.231, 427, etc.; δηϊοτῆτα φ. bring war, 6.203; ἐπ' ἀλλήλοισι φ. Ἄρηα Il.3.132
, cf. 8.516; πόλεμον Hes.Sc. 150
; θάνατον φ. B.5.134
; τοῦτο εὐδοξίαν σοι οἴσει Pl.Ep. 312c
; τὸ σωθῆναι τὸ ψεῦδος φέρει S.Ph. 109
; τέχναι.. φόβον φέρουσιν μαθεῖν A.Ag. 1135
(lyr.); ὥσπερ τὸ δίκαιον ἔφερε as justice brought with it, brought about, i.e. as was just, no more than just, Hdt.5.58; ἀν' ὄ κα φέρῃ ὁ λόγος ὁ ταμία Φιλοκλέος IG42(1).77.13
(Epid., ii B. C.); of a calculation, yield a result, Vett.Val.349.27; produce, adduce, bring forward, παραδείγματα Isoc.7.6
, etc.; πάσας αἰτίας D.58.22
; ἁρμόττουσαν εἰκόνα Id.61.10
:—[voice] Pass., εἰς τὴν συνηγορίαν.. τοιαῦτά τινα φέρεται Sor.2.3
.

b bring or carry with one, involve, τὸ πᾶν ἡμῖν τοῦ πολέμου φέρουσιν αἱ νέες Hdt.8.62
; οὐ ξύλων ἀγὼν ὁ τὸ πᾶν φέρων ἐστὶ ἡμῖν, ἀλλ' ἀνδρῶν ib. 100.

4 μῦθον φ. τινί bring one word, Il.10.288, 15.202; ἀγγελίην φ. bring a message, ib. 175, Od.1.408; λόγον Pi.P.8.38
; ἐπιστολὰς φ. τινί S.Aj. 781
, cf. Tr. 493; ἐπιστολήν X.Ages.8.3
: hence, tell, announce, πευθώ, φάτιν, A.Th. 370, Ag.9; σαφές τι πρᾶγος Id.Pers. 248
(troch.), cf. Ag. 639, etc.; report, ἀγήν (breakages) PCair.Zen. 15r27 (iii B. C.); φ. κεχωνευκώς reports that he has.., ib.741.26, cf. 147.4, 268.24 (all iii B. C.); enter, book a payment made, PBaden47.12:—[voice] Med., λόγους φ. E.Supp. 583
; but also ἀγγελίας ἔπος οἴσῃ thou shalt have it brought thee, receive, Id.Ph. 1546 (lyr.); μαντήϊα.. φέρονται Hes.Fr.134.9
:—[voice] Pass., θάνατον ἀνάγκη φέρεσθαι τοῦ διαθεμένου the death of the testator must be announced, Ep.Heb.9.16.

5 pay something due or owing, φόρον τέσσαρα τάλαντα φ. pay as a tax or tribute, Th.4.57, cf. IG12.57.9, Pl.Plt. 298a, PCair.Zen.467.7 (iii B. C.); δασμόν X.An.5.5.10
; σύνοδον φ. subscribe to the expense of a meeting, IG22.1012.14, 1326.6; χρήματα πᾶσι τάξαντες φ. Th.1.19
; μισθὸν φ. X.Cyr.1.6.12
(but usu., receive, draw, pay, μισθὸν δύο δραχμὰς τῆς ἡμέρας Ar.Ach.66
; τέτταρας τῆς ἡμέρας ὀβολοὺς φέρων Men.357
; αἱ νῆες μισθὸν ἔφερον Th. 3.17
, cf. X.An.1.3.21, Oec.1.6); φ. ἐννέα ὀβολοὺς τῆς μνᾶς τόκους Lys.Fr.1.2
, cf. Lycurg.23; also of property, bring in, yield as rent, φ. μίσθωσιν τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ Is.5.35
.

6 apply, refer, τι ἐπί τι Pl. Ti. 37e
, Chrm. 163d, R. 478b, cf. Plb.3.36.7, al.; φ. τὰ πράγματα ἐπί τινα confer powers upon, Id.2.50.6.

7 ψῆφον φ. give one's vote, A.Eu. 674, 680, And.1.2, Is.11.18; ψῆφος καθ' ἡμῶν οἴσεται ([voice] Pass.) E.Or. 440; περὶ ταύτης ἡ ψῆφος οἰσθήσεται D.44.45
; ὑπὲρ ἀγῶνος Lycurg.7
, cf. 11: hence φ. τινά appoint or nominate to an office, φ. χορηγόν D.20.130
, 39.7, cf. Pl.Lg. 753d, Arist.Pol. 1266a10:—[voice] Pass., ibid.; ὅπως φέρηται ἐν τῷ στρατιωτικῷ UPZ15.10
(ii B. C.); τῶν φερομένων ἐν Κλεοπάτρᾳ κληρούχων PRein.10.13
, al. (ii B. C.); φερομένου μου ἐν τῇ συνοχῇ since I am enrolled in prison, i.e. am in prison, BGU1821.21 (i B. C.):—[voice] Med., choose, adopt, ταύταν φ. βιοτάν E.Andr. 785
(lyr.).

V bring forth, produce, whether of the earth or of trees, φ. ἄρουρα φάρμακα Od.4.229
; ἄμπελοι φ. οἶνον 9.110
; [νῆσος] φ. ὥρια πάντα ib. 131, cf. Hes.Op. 117; [οὐ] γῆ καρπὸν ἔφερε Hdt.6.139
; γύαι φ. βίοτον A.Fr.196.5
, cf. Pi.N.11.41, E.Hec. 593, etc.: abs., bear fruit, be fruitful, εὖτ' ἂν τάδε πάντα φέρῃσι h.Merc.91
; ἡ γῆ ἔφερε ( καρπόν add. codd. quidam) Hdt.5.82; αἱ ἄμπελοι φέρουσιν X.Oec.20.4
; also of living beings, τόπος ἄνδρας φ. Pl.Ti. 24c
; ἤνεγκεν αὐτὸν Λαοδίκεια Philostr. VS1.25.1
;
ἡ ἐνεγκοῦσα
one's country, Hld.2.29
, Lib.Or. 2.66, al., Chor.p.81 B., Lyd.Mag.3.26, dub. in Supp.Epigr.4.439 (Milet.) without Art. (also ἡ ἐνεγκαμένη Jul.Ep. 202
); or Mother Earth, M.Ant.4.48: generally, create, form, Πηνειὸς Τέμπη φ. Philostr.Im.1.25
; [τὰ βρέφη] ἄρχεται φέρειν τοὺς ὀδόντας Aët.4.9
; φ. τοὺς κυνόδοντας Gp.16.1.14
.

VI carry off or away, Κῆρες ἔβαν θανάτοιο φέρουσαι Il.2.302
; φ. τινὰ ἐκ πόνου 14.429
, 17.718, etc.; of winds, [ἔπος] φέροιεν ἀναρπάξασαι ἄελλαι may the winds sweep away the word, Od.8.409; of a river, Hdt.1.189:—[voice] Med., carry off with one, Od.15.19.

2 carry away as booty or prize, ἔναρα, τεύχεα, Il.6.480, 17.70; αἶγα λέοντε φ. 13.199
; δεῖπνον φ., of Harpies, A.Eu.51; ἐνέχυρα βίᾳ φ. Antipho 6.11
; in the phrase φέρειν καὶ ἄγειν (cf. ἄγω 1.3
), IG12.69.19; φέροντα ἢ ἄγοντα Lex ap.D.23.60; αἴ κα.. ἄγῃ ἢ φέρῃ Leg.Gort.5.37
; ἥρπαζον καὶ ἔφερον Lys.20.17
; κείρων ἢ φέρων IG12(9).90.10
(Tamynae, iv B. C.); αἴ τίς κα.. φέρει τι τῶν ἐν τᾷ ἱαρᾷ γᾷ Tab.Heracl.1.128
; of a divorced wife, αἰ δέ τι ἄλλο φέροι τῶ ἀνδρός, πέντε στατῆρανς καταστασεῖ κὤτι κα φέρῃ αὐτόν Leg.Gort.3.2
; φέρειν alone, rob, plunder, θεῶν ἱερά E.Hec. 804
; ἀλλήλους Th.1.7
; abs., SIG38.23 (Teos, v B. C.):—[voice] Pass., φερόμενοι Βακχῶν ὕπο E.Ba. 759
:—[voice] Med. in same sense, ἔναρα Il.22.245
; πελέκεας οἶκόνδε φ. 23.856
; ἀτερπέα δαῖτα Od.10.124
, cf. 15.378.

3 carry off, gain, esp. by toil or trouble, win, achieve, both [voice] Act. and [voice] Med., ἤ κε φέρῃσι μέγα κράτος ἦ κε φεροίμην Il.18.308
; φέρειν τρίποδα Hes.Op. 657
; τἀπινίκια S.El. 692
; τιμήν Ar. Av. 1278
; τἀριστεῖα, τὰ νικητήρια, Pl.R. 468c, Lg. 657e; πέρα.. οὐδὲν φ. S.OC 651
; ἐκ σοῦ πάντ' ἄνευ φόβου φ. Id.OT 590
; τίς.. πλέον τᾶς εὐδαιμονίας φέρει ἤ .. ; ib. 1190 (lyr.), cf. El. 1088 (lyr.); in bad sense, μείζω τὴν αἰσχύνην φ. Pl.Lg. 671e
: also, receive one's due, φ. χάριν S.OT 764
; ὡς τοῦτό γ' ἔρξας δύο φέρῃ δωρήματα Id.Ph. 117
; μισθὸν φέρειν (v. supr. iv.5); of a priest's perquisites, φέρει ὁ ἱαρεὺς γέρη σκέλη κτλ. BMus.Inscr.968
A 9 ([place name] Cos), cf. IG12.24.10, al., SIG56.35 (Argos, v B. C.):—[voice] Med. (v. ad init.), win for oneself, κῦδος οἴσεσθαι Il.22.217
; δέπας, τεύχεα, carry off as a prize, 23.663, 809, al.; ἀέθλια or ἄεθλον φ. carry off, win a prize, 9.127, 23.413; τὰ πρῶτα φέρεσθαι (sc. ἄεθλα) 23.275, 538; οὐ σμικρὸν ἆθλον τῆς ἐρωτικῆς μανίας φέρονται Pl.Phdr. 256d
; of perquisites, τὸ.. σκέλος τοὶ ἱαρομνάμονες φερόσθω (i. e. φερούσθω from Φερόνσθω) IG42(1).40.13 (Epid., v/iv B. C.): hence οὐ τὰ δεύτερα Hdt.8.104
; πλέον φέρεσθαι get more or a larger share for onself, gain the advantage over any one, τινος Hdt.7.211, cf. S.OT 500 (lyr.), E.Hec. 308; ταῦτα ἐπὶ σμικρόν τι ἐφέροντο τοῦ πολέμου this they received as a small help towards the war, Hdt.4.129; ἠνείκατο παρὰ Ἐγεσταίων τὰ οὐδεὶς ἄλλος 5.47
; ἴδια κέρδεα προσδεκόμενοι παρὰ τοῦ Πέρσεω οἴσεσθαι 6.100
; χάριν φέρεσθαι παρ' ὑμῶν And.2.9
; φ. τὴν ἀπέχθειαν αὐτῶν Antipho 3.4.2
; ὀνείδη Pl.Lg. 762a
; εὐσέβειαν ἐκ πατρὸς οἴσῃ S.El. 969
; δάκρυ πρὸς τῶν κλυόντων A.Pr. 638
; ἀπό τινος βοσκάν Id.Eu. 266
(lyr.); ἐξ ἀνανδρίας τοὔνομα Aeschin.1.131
: generally, get for one's own use and profit, take and carry away, esp. to one's own home, τοῦ.. πάμπρωτα παρ' ἀγλαὰ δῶρα φέροιο Il.4.97
: hence φέρειν or φέρεσθαι is often used pleon., v. infr. xi.

VII abs., of roads or ways, lead to a place, ὁδὸν φέρουσαν ἐς ἱρόν Hdt.2.122
, cf. 138; τὴν φέρουσαν ἄνω (sc. ὁδόν) Id.9.69; τῆς μὲν ἐς ἀριστερὴν ἐπὶ Καρίης φ., τῆς δὲ ἐς δεξιὴν ἐς Σάρδις Id.7.31
; ἐπὶ Σοῦσα X.An.3.5.15
; ἁπλῆ οἶμος εἰς Ἅιδου φέρει A.Fr. 239
; ἡ ἐς Θήβας φέρουσα ὁδός Th.3.24
(but ἡ ἐπ' Ἀθηνῶν φέρουσα ibid.); also ἡ θύρα ἡ εἰς τὸν κῆπον φ. the door leading to the garden, D.47.53; αἱ εἰς τὴν πόλιν φ. πύλαι, αἱ ἐπὶ τὸ τεῖχος φ. κλίμακες, X.HG7.2.7, cf. PMich.Zen.38.27 (iii B. C.), Plb.10.12.3.

2 of a district or tract of country, stretch, extend to or towards, φέρειν ἐπί or ἐς θάλασσαν Hdt.4.99
; ἐς τὴν μεσόγαιαν ib. 100; πρὸς νότον Id.7.201
; ἡ ἀπὸ δυσμῶν αὐτῆς (sc. τῆς Κιμβρικῆς) καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄλβιν φέρουσα Ptol.Geog.2.11.2
, cf. 3.

b of time, τῇ νυκτὶ τῇ φερούσῃ εἰς τὴν β τοῦ Παχών PPetr.3p
.x (iii B. C.), cf. PTeb.61 (b) 288 (ii B. C.), BGU1832.5 (i B. C.), etc.

3 metaph., lead to or towards, be conducive to, ἐς αἰσχύνην φέρει Hdt.1.10
; τὰ ἐς ἄκεσιν φέροντα Id.4.90
; ἐς βλάβην, ἐς φόβον φέρον, S.OT 517, 991; εἰς ὄκνον E.Supp. 295
: esp. in good sense, tend, conduce to one's interest, ἐπ' ἀμφότερά τοι φέρει (impers.) ταῦτα ποιέειν Hdt.3
. 134; so τὰ πρὸς τὸ ὑγιαίνειν φέροντα X.Mem.4.2.31
; τροφαὶ μέγα φ. εἰς ἀρετάν E.IA 562
(lyr.); μέγα τι οἰόμεθα φέρειν (sc. κοινωνίαν γυναικῶν τε καὶ παίδων) εἰς πολιτείαν Pl.R. 449d
; τὰ καλὰ ἐπιτηδεύματα εἰς ἀρετῆς κτῆσιν φ. ib. 444e, cf. X.Cyr.8.1.42; τοῦτο ἔφερεν αὐτῷ was for his good, M.Ant.5.8.

b point to, refer to a thing, ἐς τί ὑμῖν ταῦτα φαίνεται φέρειν; Hdt.1.120
; φωνὴ φέρουσα πρός τινα addressed to him, Id.1.159; ἐς ἀρηΐους ἀγῶνας φέρον τὸ μαντήϊον Id.9.33
, cf. 6.19; [ὄψις] φέρει ἐπὶ πᾶσαν γῆν refers to.., extends over.., Id.7.19; τὰ ἴχνη τῆς ὑποψίας εἰς τοῦτον φ. point to him, Antipho 2.3.10; πρός τινας Pl.R. 538c
; ταύτῃ <ὁ> νόος ἔφερε Hdt.9.120
; ἡ τοῦ δήμου φέρει γνώμη, ὡς .., the people's opinion inclines to this, that.., Id.4.11; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ αἱ γνῶμαι ἔφερον Th.1.79
: c. inf., τῶν ἡ γνώμη ἔφερε συμβάλλειν whose opinion inclined to giving battle, Hdt.6.110, cf. 5.118; πλέον ἔφερέ οἱ ἡ γνώμη κατεργάσεσθαι his opinion inclined rather to the view.., Hdt.8.100, cf. 3.77.

VIII carry or have in the mouth, i. e. speak of, πολύν τινα ἐν ταῖς διαβολαῖς φέρειν Aeschin.3.223
; use a word, οὐκ οἶδα καθ' ὁποτέρου τούτων οἱ παλαιοὶ τὸ τῆς ζειᾶς ἔφερον ὄνομα Gal.Vict.Att.6
, cf. 7.644, 15.753, 876; record an event, οἱ δευτέρῳ μετὰ τὴν ἔξοδον.. ἔτει φέροντες αὐτήν D.H.1.63
: more freq. in [voice] Pass., πονηρῶς, εὖ, φέρεσθαι, to be ill or well spoken of, X.HG1.5.17, 2.1.6; ἀτίμως ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων φ. Pl.Ep. 328e
; abs., φέρεται [the report] is carried about, i.e. it is said, c. acc. et inf., τοιόνδε φέρεται πρῆγμα γίνεσθαι Hdt.8.104
(v.l.); ἐν χρόνοις φέρεται μνημονευομένοις is recorded as occurring within historical times, Str.1.3.15; ὅτε καὶ Δημόκριτος φέρεται τελευτήσας Sor.Vit.Hippocr.11
; κρίνομεν.. τὰ γραφέντα ὑφ' ἡμῶν προστάγματα ἐν τοῖς ἱεροῖς νόμοις φέρεσθαι παρ' ὑμῖν OGI331.60
(Pergam., ii B. C.);
ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα φέρεται
are in use, Ptol.Geog.7.4.11
; of literary works, to be in circulation, ἐπιστόλιον αὐτοῦ τοιοῦτον φέρεται Plu.2.808a
, cf. 209e, 832d, 833c, al., Jul.Or.6.189b, Gp.2.35.8, Eun.VSp.456 B.; πρόλογοι διττοὶ φέρονται Arg.E.Rh.; ὁ στίχος οὗτος ἔν τισιν οὐ φέρεται Sch.E. Ph. 377, cf. Sch.Il.8.557.

2 of words, φέρεσθαι ἐπί τι to refer to something, A.D.Pron.61.5, Synt.21.14, al.

IX imper. φέρε like ἄγε, as Adv., come, now, well,

1 before another imper., φέρε γὰρ σήμαινε A.Pr. 296
(anap.); φέρ' εἰπὲ δή μοι S.Ant. 534
; φ. δή μοι τόδε εἰπέ Pl.Cra. 385b
; so φέρετε.. πειρᾶσθε Hdt.4.127
.

2 before [ per.] 1sg. or pl. of subj. used imperatively, φέρε ἀκούσω, φέρε στήσωμεν, Hdt.1.11,97; φ. δὲ νῦν.. φράσω Id.2.14
; φέρ' ἴδω, τί δ' ἥσθην; Ar.Ach.4
; φέρε δὴ κατίδω Id. Pax 361
, cf. 959; φ. δὴ ἴδωμεν, φ. δὴ σκεψώμεθα, Pl.Grg. 455a, Prt. 330b, cf. E.Or. 1281 (lyr.), Ph. 276, etc.: less freq. before 2 pers., φέρε.. μάθῃς S.Ph. 300
.

3 before a rhetorical question, φέρε.. τροπαῖα πῶς ἀναστήσεις; E.Ph. 571
; φ. δὴ νῦν.. τί γαμεῖθ' ἡμᾶς; Ar.Th. 788
(anap.), cf. Ach. 541, Pl.R. 348c; φ. μῶν οὐκ ἀνάγκη .. ; Id.Lg. 805d; φ. πρὸς θεῶν πῶς .. ; Id.Grg. 514d; freq. in phrase φέρε γάρ, φέρε τίς γὰρ οὗτος; Ar.Nu. 218
; φ. γὰρ πρὸς τίνας χρὴ πολεμεῖν; Isoc.4.183
, cf. Antipho 5.36; also φ. δή Pl.Grg. 455a
, al.: usu. first in a sentence, but τὴν ἀνδρείαν δὲ φ. τί θῶμεν; Id.Lg. 633c
, etc.

4 φέρε δή, ἐάν πῃ διαλλαχθῶμεν .. come let us see if we can.., Id.Cra. 430a.

5 φέρε c. inf., suppose, grant that.. φ. λέγειν τινά Plu.2.98b
; φ. εἰπεῖν let us say, D.Chr.31.93, 163, Porph.Abst.3.3; οἷον φ. εἰ. Iamb. in Nic.p.47
P., al. ( οἷον φέρε alone, Hierocl. in CA11p.439M.).

X part. neut. τὸ φέρον, as Subst., destiny, fate, τὸ φ. ἐκ θεοῦ [καλῶς] φέρειν [χρή] ye must bear nobly what heaven bears to you, awards you, S.OC 1693 (lyr., codd., sed secl. καλῶς, χρή) ; εἰ τὸ φερον σε φέρει, φέρε καὶ φέρου AP 10.73
(Pall.).

2 part. φέρων in all genders freq. joined with another Verb:

a to express a subsidiary action, φέρων ἔδωκε he brought and gave, Od.22.146; δὸς τῷ ξείνῳ ταῦτα φέρων take this and give it him, 17.345; ἔγχος ἔστησε φέρων brought the spear and placed it, 1.127; σῖτον παρέθηκε φέρουσα ib. 139, al., cf. S.Tr. 622; τοῦτο ἐλθὼν οἴκαδε φέρων τῷ πατρὶ ἔδωκα Pl.Hp.Ma. 282e
, cf. R. 345b; so ὁ μὲν Ἐπίχαρμον.. εἰς δέκα τόμους φέρων συνήγαγεν Porph.Plot. 24
; ἑκάστῃ ἐννεάδι τὰ οἰκεῖα φέρων συνεφόρησα ibid., etc.; sts. translatable by with, ᾤχοντο φέροντες τὰ γράμματα Th.7.8
.

b intr., in pass. sense, to denote unrestrained action, νῦν σε μάλ' οἴω.. φέροντα.. φιλητεύσειν h.Merc. 159
; φέρουσα ἐνέβαλε νηΐ φιλίῃ she went and rammed, rammed full tilt, Hdt.8.87; ὅταν ἐπὶ θάτερ' ὥσπερ εἰς τρυτάνην ἀργύριον προσενέγκῃς, οἴχεται φέρον down it sinks, D.5.12;
τὰ μὲν ἄλλα μέρη τοῦ πολέμου παρῆκαν, φέροντες δὲ παντὶ τῷ στρατεύματι πρὸς αὐτὸν Ἀκράγαντα προσήρεισαν
hurling themselves, Plb.1.17.8
; εἰς τοῦτο φέρων περιέστησε τὰ πράγματα Aeschin.3.82
; ὑπέβαλεν ἑαυτὸν φέρων Θηβαίοις ib.90, cf. 1.175, 3.143,146; in the foll. passages φέρων accompanies a Verb of throwing, giving, entrusting, or dedicating, and expresses wholehearted action, whether wise or unwise; there is always an accus., freq. of the reflex. Pron., governed by the principal Verb (or perh. by φέρων): ἐπεὶ ἐς τοὺς κρατῆρας ἐμαυτὸν φέρων ἐνέβαλον (sc. ὁ Ἐμπεδοκλῆς ) when I went (or took) and threw myself.., Luc.Icar.13, cf. Fug.1, Plu.Comp.Arist. Cat.1, Fab.6, Per.12, Paus.1.30.1, Ael.VH8.14, Frr.10,69, Philostr. VA3.4; τὴν κατασκευὴν.. φέρων ἐδωρήσατο τῇ μητρί D.S.31.27
, cf. Ach.Tat.1.7; σεαυτὸν.. φέρων ἀπημπόληκας Luc.Merc.Cond.24
; τί παθόντες.. τοῖς ἀτέκνοις τῶν γερόντων ἐσποιεῖτε φέροντες αὑτούς; Luc. DMort.6.3
, cf. Ind.19, Laps.22; ταύτῃ (sc. τῇ ὀργῇ) φέρων ὑπέθηκεν ἑαυτόν Plu.Them.24
, cf. Per.7; τούτῳ φέροντες ὑποβάλλουσι τοὺς υἱούς Id.2.4b
, cf. Luc.6, Pomp.27, Ael.VH6.1, Max.Tyr.1.2; προσέθετο φέρων ἑαυτὸν ἐκείνῳ Eun.VS p.456
B., cf.pp.461,465 B., Dam. ap. Suid. s.v. Σεβηριανός; ἀλλὰ σοὶ μὲν, ὦ θεῶν πάτερ, ἐμαυτὸν φέρων ἀναθήσω Jul.Or.7.231b.

3 ἔκκρισις.. ἐκ μικρῶν φέρουσα διαστημάτων occurring at short intervals, Sor.2.45.

XI φέρειν, φέρεσθαι are freq. added epexegetically to δίδωμι and similar Verbs, δῶκεν.. τρίποδα φέρειν Il.23.513
, cf. 16.665, 17.131; τεύχεα.. δότω φέρεσθαι 11.798
, cf. Od.21.349, E.Tr. 419, 454(troch.).

B [voice] Pass. is used in most of the above senses:—special cases:

I to be borne or carried involuntarily, esp. to be borne along by waves or winds, to be swept away, φέρεσθαι ἀνέμοισι, θυέλλῃ, Od.9.82, 10.54, cf. A.Pers. 276 (lyr.), etc.; πᾶν δ' ἦμαρ φερόμην, of Hephaestus falling from Olympus, Il.1.592; ἧκε φέρεσθαι he sent him flying, 21.120; ἧκα πόδας καὶ χεῖρε φέρεσθαι I let go my hands and feet, let them swing free [in the leap], Od.12.442, cf. 19.468; μέγα φέρεται πὰρ σέθεν, of a word uttered, comes with weight, Pi.P.1.87; βίᾳ φέρεται Pl.Phdr. 254a
; πνεῦμα φερόμενον Id.R. 496d
; τὸ πνεῦμα κατὰ τὰς ἀναπνοὰς εἴσω τε καὶ ἔξω φέρεται Gal.16.520
; ῥεῖν καὶ φέρεσθαι Pl.Cra. 411c
; φ. εἰς τὸν Τάρταρον Id.Phd. 114b
; simply, move, go, ποῖ γᾶς φέρομαι; S.OT 1309
(anap.); οὐκ οἶσθ' ὅποι γῆς οὐδ' ὅποι γνώμης φέρῃ Id.El. 922
, cf. E.Hec. 1076 (anap.), etc.; of the excreta, τὰ φερόμενα.. εἰ μὲν αὐτομάτως φέροιτο Philum.
ap. Aët.9.12; πρὸς κοιλίαν φερομένην Aët.4.19
: metaph., εἰς τὸ λοιδορεῖν φέρῃ E.Andr. 729
; πρὸς τὴν τοῦ κάλλους φύσιν Pl.Phdr. 254b
, cf. X.Mem.2.1.4; ἐπὶ ταὐτὸ φέρονται have the same tendency, Phld.Vit.p.42 J.; ἀπὸ δογμάτων καὶ ἀπὸ θεωρημάτων φ. Vett.Val.238.30
; of veins, to be conveyed, Gal.15.531; also ἡ φερομένη οὐσία (the doctrine of) universal motion, Pl.Tht. 177c; οἱ φερόμενοι θεοί the moving gods, i. e. the stars and planets, Plot.2.3.9.

2 freq. in part. with another Verb of motion, φερόμενοι ἐσέπιπτον ἐς τοὺς Αἰγινήτας they fell into their hands with a rush, at full speed, Hdt.8.91; ἀπὸ.. ἐλπίδος ᾠχόμην φερόμενος Pl.Phd. 98b
; ἧκε φερόμενος εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ φύσιν Aeschin.3.89
.

3 of voluntary and impulsive motion, ἰθὺς φέρεται μένει Il.20.172
; ὁμόσε τινὶ φέρεσθαι come to blows with him, X.Cyn.10.21; δρόμῳ φ. πρός τινα Id.HG4.8.37
; φυγῇ εἰς ἑαυτοὺς φ. Id.Cyr.1.4.23
; ἥξει ἐπ' ἐκεῖνον τὸν λόγον φερόμενος Lycurg.59
; φερόμενος ὑπ' ὀργῆς D.H.Comp.18
.

II metaph., καλῶς, κακῶς φέρεσθαι, of things, schemes, etc., turn out, prosper well or ill, succeed or fail, οὔτ' ἂν.. νόμοι καλῶς φέροιντ' ἄν S.Aj. 1074
; κακῶς φ. τὰ ἑαυτοῦ X.HG3.4.25
; εὖ φέρεται ἡ γεωργία Id.Oec.5.17
; ὀλιγώρως ἔχειν καὶ ἐᾶν ταῦτα φέρεσθαι to neglect things and let them take their course, D.8.67; less freq. of persons, fare well or ill, εὖ φερόμενος ἐν στρατηγίαις being generally successful.., Th.5.16, cf. 15; καλῶς φερόμενος τὸ καθ' ἑαυτόν Id.2.60
; φ. ἐν προτιμήσει παρά τινι D.S.33.5
; χεῖρον φερομένη παρὰ τἀδελφῷ J.AJ16.7.6
; of euphonious writing, σύνθεσις καλῶς φερομένη Phld.Po.5.26
.

2 behave, ὑποκριτικῶς, ἀστάτως, etc., Vett.Val.38.20, 197.8, al.

3 have an opinion, ὅπως ἠνέχθη περὶ τοῦ σφυγμοῦ what his opinion was about.., Marcellin.Puls. 233.

C [voice] Med.: for its chief usages, v. supr. A. VI. 3.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > φέρω

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

List of terms used for Germans — There are many alternative ways to describe the people of Germany, though in English the official designated nationality as well as the standard noun is German. (see also demonym). During the early Renaissance, German implied that the person… … Wikipedia
List of names and terms of address used for Charles de Gaulle — In France, Charles de Gaulle is called or referred to with different names, depending on who is talking, and possibly what are feelings of the person talking about De Gaulle are. This article gives a list of several names and terms of address… … Wikipedia
I Was Made for Lovin' You — Infobox Single Name = I Was Made for Lovin You |200px Artist = Kiss from Album = Dynasty Released = May 1979 (US) Format = 7 Recorded = 1979 at Electric Lady Studios and Record Plant Studios, New York City Genre = Hard rock, disco Length = 03:57… … Wikipedia
For You/Time Limit — Single infobox Name = For You / Time Limit For You / タイム・リミット Artist = Utada Hikaru from Album = Distance Released = June 30, 2000 Format = CD, Double A side Single Recorded = Genre = Pop Length = N/A Label = EMI Music Japan Writer = Utada Hikaru … Wikipedia
For Him and the Girls — Infobox Album | Name = For Him and the Girls Type = Album Artist = Hawksley Workman Released = 1999 Recorded = Basement of 59 Hillsdale Ave E., Toronto, Ontario, Canada Genre = Indie rock Length = 57:12 Label = Universal Music Canada, Ba Da Bing! … Wikipedia
For our freedom and yours — ( pl. Za naszą i waszą wolność) is one of the unofficial mottos of Poland. It is commonly associated with the times when Polish soldiers, exiled from the partitioned Poland, fought in various independence movements all over the world.Lonnie R.… … Wikipedia
For Unlawful Carnal Knowledge — Studio album by Van Halen Released … Wikipedia
For One More Day — is a 2006 novel taken place during the mid 1900 s by the acclaimed sportswriter and author Mitch Albom. It opens with the novel s protagonist planning to commit suicide. His adulthood is shown to have been rife with sadness. His own daughter didn … Wikipedia
For Want of a Nail (novel) — For the proverb, see For Want of a Nail (proverb). For Want of a Nail … Wikipedia
For — For, prep. [AS. for, fore; akin to OS. for, fora, furi, D. voor, OHG. fora, G. vor, OHG. furi, G. f[ u]r, Icel. fyrir, Sw. f[ o]r, Dan. for, adv. f[ o]r, Goth. fa[ u]r, fa[ u]ra, L. pro, Gr. ?, Skr. pra . [root] 202. Cf. {Fore}, {First},… … The Collaborative International Dictionary of English
For — For, prep. [AS. for, fore; akin to OS. for, fora, furi, D. voor, OHG. fora, G. vor, OHG. furi, G. f[ u]r, Icel. fyrir, Sw. f[ o]r, Dan. for, adv. f[ o]r, Goth. fa[ u]r, fa[ u]ra, L. pro, Gr. ?, Skr. pra . [root] 202. Cf. {Fore}, {First},… … The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: с греческого на все языки

was+used+for

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: с греческого на все языки

was+used+for

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка: